USA Gymnastics

XCEL
PROGRAM
CODE OF POINTS

Women's Artistic Gymnastics

2022-2026

First Edition
 Women’s Artistic Gymnastics
Xcel Code of Points
First Edition: Effective August 1, 2022 – July 31, 2026
USA Gymnastics extends its deepest appreciation to the following contributors to the Xcel Program
for the design, preparation, and presentation of the Xcel Program and Rules.

National Xcel Committee

Claudia
Jill Preston
Kretschmer Chairman
Region 1
Dianne Palmer Region 2
Louise Janecky Region 3
Megan Bankole Region 4
Nancy Gibson Region 5
Gail Caspare Region 6
Jen Skorski Region 7
Pam Kitchen Region 8

National Technical Committee

Gigi Iavarone
Cheryl Hamilton Chairman
Region 1
JeanineBlilie
Marilyn Henneford Region 2
Region 3
Linda Thorberg Region 4
Sue Kane Region 5
Pat Panichas Region 6
Jane Caruso Region 7
Evelyn Chandler Region 8

Tom Koll Women’s Development Program Committee Chairman

Annie Heffernon Women’s Vice President
Connie Maloney Women’s Development Program Technical Director
Christy Naik Women’s Development Program Director
Heather Ould Women’s Xcel Program Manager
 The Xcel Code of Points is a living document.
As changes are made or errors identified,
Xcel Updates are posted on the USA Gymnastics
website on the Xcel Update page:
[Link]

Check this site each year, for any recent updates

and/or replacement pages.
This document is available in print and electronic format.

Copyright © 2022 by USA Gymnastics Publications

First Edition 2022

All rights reserved.

Use of this publication is expressly subject to the USA Gymnastics TERMS OF USE, a copy of which appears on the USA
Gymnastics website under Women’s, Xcel Program.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any mean without permission in
writing from USA Gymnastics. All requests for permission should be made in writing to:

USA Gymnastics
1099 North Meridian Street, Suite 800
Indianapolis, IN 46204

Executive Editors: Heather Ould, USA Gymnastics Women’s Xcel Program Manager
Connie Maloney, USA Gymnastics Women’s Development Program Technical Director
Christy Naik, USA Gymnastics Women’s Development Program Director

Printed by Sport Graphics, Inc., Indianapolis, IN

 Xcel Code of Points
TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL/JUDGES SECTION
GENERAL/JUDGES.......................................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 1
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL................................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 1
I. XCEL
HIERARCHY
PROGRAM.......................................................................................................................................
OF INFORMATION FOR THE XCEL PROGRAM GENERAL/JUDGES - 1
II. GENERAL/JUDGES - 1
III. XCEL AGE/ENTRY REQUIREMENTS AND MOBILITYOVERVIEW .......................................................................
................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 2
CHAPTER 2: EVALUATION OF EXCERCISES............................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 3
I. SPECIAL
VALUE
ALLOWABLE
NO
EXECUTION
COMPOSITION
PARTS...........................................................................................................................................
REQUIREMENTS
(TECHNIQUE
VALUE DEDUCTIONS.............................................................................................................
PARTS / AMPLITUDE
.........................................................................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES
AND DIFFICULTY / POSTURE) RESTRICTIONS
AND ARTISTRY ....................................................................... -3
II. GENERAL/JUDGES - 3
III. GENERAL/JUDGES - 5
IV. GENERAL/JUDGES - 6
V. GENERAL/JUDGES - 7
VI. ROUTINE REQUIREMENT FORMULA ..................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 7
VII. CALCULATING START VALUES..................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 7
CHAPTER 3: SCORING.................................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 9
I. DETERMINING AVERAGE SCORE .............................................................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 9
II. RANGE OF SCORES................................................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 9
CHAPTER 4: UNUSUAL JUDGING SITUATIONS......................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 10
I. INQUIRIES..............................................................................................................................................
INCOMPLETE
EQUIPMENT
JUDGE INADVERTENTLY
FAILURE
EXERCISE / REPETITION
/MISSES
EXTREMELY THEOF EXERCISE
SHORT
AN EXERCISE
ROUTINE (VT /UB / BB / FX) ............................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 10
II. ............................................................................ GENERAL/JUDGES - 11
III. GENERAL/JUDGES - 11
IV. GENERAL/JUDGES - 12
V. PROCEDURES FOR FALLS / INJURIES RESULTING.....................................................................................
IN BLEEDING ..............................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 13
CHAPTER 5: DUTIES & RESPONSIBILITIES OF MEET OFFICIALS.......................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 13
I. GENERAL DUTIES OF ALL OFFICIALS ......................................................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 13
II. MEET REFEREE (MAY ALSO ACT AS CHIEF JUDGE .......................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 14
III. CHIEF JUDGE
PANEL
JUDGINGJUDGE
ASSISTANTS
..........................................................................................................................................
) GENERAL/JUDGES - 15
IV. ........................................................................................................................................ GENERAL/JUDGES - 17
V. ........................................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 17
VI. JURY OF APPEALS ..................................................................................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 19
CHAPTER 6: APPARATUS SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. GENERAL/JUDGES - 20
CHAPTER 7: ATTIRE REGULATIONS .......................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 20
CHAPTER 8: DEDUCTIONS........................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 22
I. GENERAL
CHIEF JUDGE
DEDUCTIONS
DEDUCTIONS
.........................................................................................................................GENERAL/JUDGES - 22
II. ................................................................................................................... GENERAL/JUDGES - 24

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1
 Xcel Code of Points
TABLE OF CONTENTS

VAULT SECTION
VAULT RULES ........................................................................................................................................................VAULT - 1
CHAPTER 1: VALUES AND DEDUCTIONS ..........................................................................................................VAULT - 2
III. BRONZEDIVISION
SILVER DIVISION...................................................................................................................................................... VAULT - 2
IV. ........................................................................................................................................................ VAULT - 2
V. GOLD / PLATINUM / DIAMOND DIVISION.................................................................................................................. VAULT - 2
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION ..............................................................................................................VAULT - 4
I. GENERAL
APPARATUS
MISCELLANEOUS
COACHING
UNUSUAL INFORMATION
JUDGING
SPECIFICATIONS
VAULT
SITUATIONS
RULES
...........................................................................................................................................
AND / CLARIFICATIONS
RULINGS VAULT - 4
II. ............................................................................................................. VAULT - 5
III. DEDUCTIONS........................................................................................................................................... VAULT - 6
IV. ................................................................................................... VAULT - 6
V. ............................................................................................................................... VAULT - 8
CHAPTER 3: DEDUCTIONS.................................................................................................................................VAULT - 10

VAULT ELEMENTS SECTION

VAULT ELEMENTS............................................................................................................................VAULT ELEMENTS - 1

UNEVEN BARS SECTION

UNEVEN BAR RULES ............................................................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 1
CHAPTER 1: REQUIREMENTS & RESTRICTIONS............................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 2
I. VALUE PART
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT
REQUIREMENTSCLARIFICATIONS
............................................................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 2
II. ........................................................................................................................ UNEVEN BARS - 2
III. ..................................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 3
IV. DIFFICULTY
ROUTINE EXAMPLES
RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................................................................ UNEVEN BARS - 3
V. ...................................................................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 5
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 10
I. RECOGNITION
APPARATUS
ATTIRE (COUNTING) OF VALUE PARTS (VP) ..................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 10
REGULATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
II. ...................................................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 17
III. ................................................................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 18
IV. TIMING REGULATIONS ................................................................................................................................ UNEVEN BARS - 19
V. REGULATIONS.............................................................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 19
BAR FALL REGULATIONS
SPOTTING
VI. ............................................................................................................................ UNEVEN BARS - 20
VII. MOUNT AND DISMOUNT REGULATIONS .................................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 21
CHAPTER 3: DEDUCTIONS.................................................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 22
I. COMPOSITION DEDUCTIONS ...................................................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 22
II. GRASP
INTERMEDIATE
AMPLITUDE
THIRD RUN
APPARATUS
APPROACH
(EXTRA)TO AVOID
(0.50)
SWING .....................................................................................................................
A FALL (0.30) UNEVEN BARS - 22
III. ............................................................................................... UNEVEN BARS - 22
IV. .................................................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 22
V. ................................................................................................................................................. UNEVEN BARS - 24
VI. BAR DEDUCTIONS........................................................................................................................................ UNEVEN BARS - 27

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2
 Xcel Code of Points
TABLE OF CONTENTS

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENT SECTION

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS.................................................................................................... UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 1

BALANCE BEAM SECTION

BALANCE BEAM RULES..................................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 1
CHAPTER 1: REQUIREMENTS & RESTRICTIONS............................................................................ BALANCE BEAM - 2
I. VALUE PART
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT
REQUIREMENTSCLARIFICATIONS
............................................................................................................................ BALANCE BEAM - 2
II. ..................................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 2
IV.
III. .................................................................................................. BALANCE BEAM - 3
DIFFICULTY
ROUTINE RESTRICTIONS ......................................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM -3
EXAMPLES
V. ................................................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 4
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................ BALANCE BEAM - 9
I. RECOGNITION
CLARIFICATIONS
APPARATUS
ATTIRE REGULATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
(COUNTING)
REGARDING OFSERIES
VALUE PARTS (VP) .................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 9
II. ....................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 15
III. ................................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 16
IV. .............................................................................................................................. BALANCE BEAM - 17
V. TIMING
BEAM
SPOTTING
FALL
REGULATIONS
REGULATIONS............................................................................................................................. BALANCE BEAM - 17
REGULATIONS
VI. ........................................................................................................................ BALANCE BEAM - 18
VIII.
VII. ......................................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 19
MOUNT AND DISMOUNT REGULATIONS ................................................................................................. BALANCE BEAM - 19
CHAPTER 3: EXECUTION & ARTISTRY DEDUCTIONS.................................................................. BALANCE BEAM - 21
I. EXECUTION AND ARTISTRY FAULTS.......................................................................................................... BALANCE BEAM - 21

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENT SECTION

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS .........................................................................................BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 1

FLOOR EXERCISE SECTION

FLOOR EXERCISE RULES ................................................................................................................FLOOR EXERCISE - 1
CHAPTER 1: REQUIREMENTS & RESTRICTIONS..........................................................................FLOOR EXERCISE - 2
I. VALUE PART
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENT
REQUIREMENTSCLARIFICATIONS
........................................................................................................................... FLOOR EXERCISE - 2
II. .................................................................................................................... FLOOR EXERCISE - 2
III. ................................................................................................. FLOOR EXERCISE - 3
IV. DIFFICULTY
ROUTINE EXAMPLES
RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................................................ FLOOR EXERCISE - 3
V. .................................................................................................................................. FLOOR EXERCISE - 4
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION ..........................................................................................FLOOR EXERCISE - 9
I. RECOGNITION
APPARATUS
ATTIRE
TIMING
SPOTTING
REGULATIONS
REGULATIONS
REGULATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
(COUNTING) OF VALUE PARTS (VP) ................................................................................... FLOOR EXERCISE - 9
II. .................................................................................................................. FLOOR EXERCISE - 15
III. ............................................................................................................................. FLOOR EXERCISE - 15
IV. ............................................................................................................................ FLOOR EXERCISE - 15
V. ........................................................................................................................ FLOOR EXERCISE - 16
VIII.
VII.
VI. OBSTRUCTING
MUSIC
LINE VIOLATIONS
REGULATIONS
VIEW
(OUT
................................................................................................................................
OF BOUNDS) FLOOR EXERCISE - 16
.............................................................................................................................. FLOOR EXERCISE - 17
........................................................................................................... FLOOR EXERCISE - 17

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 3
 Xcel Code of Points
TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER 3: EXECUTION & ARTISTRY DEDUCTIONS................................................................FLOOR EXERCISE - 18

I. EXECUTION AND ARTISTRY FAULTS......................................................................................................... FLOOR EXERCISE - 18

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS SECTION

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS.................................................................................... FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS - 4
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
GENERAL/JUDGES
CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
I. XCEL PROGRAM

The USA Gymnastics Xcel program was developed as an alternative competitive program offering individual flexibility to
coaches and gymnasts. The goal of Xcel is to provide gymnasts of varying abilities and commitment levels the opportunity
for a rewarding gymnastics experience. The program allows a wide choice in skills to meet requirements so selection may
be based on an individual athlete’s strengths.

The focus of the Xcel program is sportsmanship, leadership, teamwork, and fun. The emphasis in the Xcel program is on
correct technique, form, and performance.

Xcel consists of 5 Divisions – Bronze, Silver, Gold, Platinum and Diamond. Uneven Bars, Balance Beam and Floor
Exercise have four (4) Special Requirements in each Division valued at 0.50 each. Special Requirements are fulfilled by
Value Parts from the Xcel Code of Points. Additionally, each level has Value Part requirements.

A pilot program in Regions 3, 6, 7, and 8 will begin in the 2022-23 competitive year for a 6th Division called Sapphire.
Competition rules for this pilot program are available on the USA Gymnastics website within the Xcel Program
information. No information related to this Pilot program is published within the current edition of the Code of Points.

II. HIERARCHY OF INFORMATION FOR THE XCEL PROGRAM

A. The Xcel Program rules are found in the official written and published Xcel Code of Points, as updated by the
Xcel Committee minutes and the Women’s Technical Committee minutes, as they apply to Xcel. Hereafter these
committee minutes are referred to as “Updates”.

B. Xcel rules are also available in an electronic version of the Xcel Code of Points.
1. The official written and published Xcel Code of Points/Updates has final authority if discrepancies occur
between these two versions of the Xcel Code of Points.
2. For technical issues which are not specifically addressed in this Xcel Code, refer to the Development Program
Code of Points for clarification. If this procedure is followed at a competition, the Regional Xcel Committee
Chair and the Regional Technical Committee Chair are to be notified that this situation occurred.
C. In these documents, the written text takes precedence over accompanying pictures/illustrations.

D. Please realize that every variation of an element cannot be written or depicted in these documents.

E. There are many judging/coaching/study aids available. There are various judging/coaching/study aids available
either published by USA Gymnastics or through other individuals within the industry. The Official written and
published Xcel Code of Points takes precedence over any judging/coaching/study aids.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 1
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
III. XCEL AGE/ENTRY REQUIREMENTS AND MOBILITY OVERVIEW

A. There are five (5) Divisions of Xcel: Bronze, Silver, Gold, Platinum, and Diamond.

B. For gymnasts entering from the Development Program, follow the chart on the following page.

C. Gymnasts who have no previous competitive experience may enter at Bronze, Silver, or Gold at their
coach’s discretion.

D. Gymnasts currently competing in the Xcel Program must follow the chart on the following page for mobility.

E. Any athlete who has previously competed in the Xcel Program, but has been inactive for one or more years,
must contact their State Administrative Committee Chairman for proper entry regulations. The options are:
1. Remain at the Division at which they last competed.
2. Move up one Division if they achieved the mobility score during their last season.
3. Move down one Division without petitioning.

F. Any gymnast who has had previous competitive experience in programs outside of USA Gymnastics must
petition to enter at Platinum and above by submitting a formal written request to the State Administrative
Committee Chair.

G. Any gymnast who has had previous competitive experience in USA Gymnastics and who is a minimum of
14 years of age or at least a Freshman in High School is eligible to petition the State Administrative
Committee for entry into the Platinum or Diamond Division. The petition must be accompanied by a video that
demonstrates her skill level.

H. Since the Xcel Program is an alternative/separate program, it cannot be used to satisfy mobility
requirements into the Development Program.
1. Any gymnast who has had competitive experience other than USA Gymnastics but including USA Gymnastics
Xcel athletes, and who is a minimum of 12 years of age is eligible to petition by submitting a formal written
request to the State Administrative Committee for entry into Level 7 and below. The petition must be
accompanied by a video that demonstrates her skill level.

XCEL AGE/ENTRY REQUIREMENTS AND MOBILITY OVERVIEW

Entry Division from
Division Minimum Age Requirement Pre-requisite Score
Development Program^

Bronze Reached 5th Birthday None Levels 1 & 2

Silver Reached 6th Birthday None Levels 1, 2, 3

Gold Reached 7th Birthday None Levels 3 & 4

Reached 8th Birthday 31.00 AA at Gold Division
Platinum Levels 5, 6, 7
or 8.0 IES*
Reached 9th Birthday 31.00 AA at Platinum Division
Diamond Levels 7 – 10
or 8.0 IES*
* IES = Individual Event Specialist
For additional information regarding mobility and dropping back Divisions, refer to the current Women’s Rules and
Policies.
^Must have completed all-around at a minimum of one (1) sanctioned meet at the specified Development
Program level to enter in the appropriate Xcel Division.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 2
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
CHAPTER 2: EVALUATION OF EXCERCISES
I. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Uneven Bars, Balance Beam, and Floor Exercise have four (4) Special Requirements worth 0.50 each.

1. Restricted elements may not be used to fulfill Special Requirements

2. Elements are Restricted based on their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, not on the quality / amplitude
of the performance.
3. Elements with no Value Part credit may not be used to fulfill Special Requirements.

B. More than one (1) Special Requirement may be fulfilled by one (1) VP element, unless otherwise specified
(Refer to each Apparatus section – Chapter 1 – I. Special Requirements).
1. Example: Uneven Bars – Diamond Division: A clear hip circle to handstand may fulfill two Special Requirements
a. SR 1: Skill finishing in a clear support at a minimum of 45° from vertical
b. SR 2: 2 Minimum “B” 360° circling skill

II. VALUE PARTS

A. “Value Parts” (VP)

1. Elements listed in the Xcel Code of Points may:
a. Receive Value Part credit as listed, even if different from Development Program Code of Points value.
b. May receive Value Part credit twice
c. May fulfill each Division’s Special Requirements and Value Parts requirements

2. Elements listed in Xcel Code of Point have different difficulty values. Each Division has its own difficulty
restrictions (refer to each Apparatus section – Difficulty Restrictions for further information):
a. “A” = part with easy difficulty 0.10 pt.
b. “B” = part with medium difficulty 0.30 pt.
c. “C” = part with high difficulty 0.50 pt.
d. “D” = part with higher difficulty (Diamond Division only).

B. Value Part Requirements for Xcel Competition are:

BRONZE SILVER GOLD PLATINUM DIAMOND

6 “A” 5 “A”
4 “A” 5 “A” 6 “A”
1 “B” 2 “B”

Deduction for Missing VP

Missing VP Deduction
“A” 0.10
“B” 0.30
Higher Value Parts can replace lower Value Parts

C. Higher Value Parts can replace lower Value Parts, but not reverse. Replacement is one (1) to one (1) basis,
regardless of value.
1. Example: A “C” value part may replace one “A” or “B” value part.

Examples
Level VP Routine Value Parts Higher VP can replace lower VP
Requirement
Gold 6 “A” VP Routine has 4
3 “A”s,
“A”s and
1 “B”,
2 “B”s
and The 2 “B”s can replace the 2 missing “A”s
5 “A” VP, The 3 “C”s may replace the 2 missing “A”s
Diamond
2 “B” VP 3 “Cs. and the 1 missing “B”

GENERAL / JUDGES - 3
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES

D. Xcel Code of Points elements can be recognized two (2) times for Value Part credit provided the element
occurs in a different connection, (i.e., preceded or followed by a different element).
1. Exception for Floor Exercise only: Acro Flight elements with hand support:
a. Are eligible to receive Value Part credit, regardless of the number of times performed, provided series are
different.
b. Acro flight skills with hand support may also fulfill Special Requirements every time they receive VP credit.

E. Same element performed third (3rd) time, or second (2nd) time in exact Same connection:
1. No Value Part credit awarded.
a. Example – Beam: Back Walkover “A”, lands on Beam,< falls > Back Walkover “A” + Back Walkover (“0”)
1) No Value Part credit awarded for third (3rd) Back walkover and
2) No Acro Series awarded since one (1) element had no value.
2. No Special Requirements awarded.
a. Applicable Execution and Amplitude deductions are applied.
3. Exception: Value Part credit can be awarded for element performed third (3rd) time if:
a. Previously not awarded Value Part credit because:
1) Element lacked completion first (1st) or second (2nd) time performed, or
2) Element used in exact same connection second time (2nd) performed,
b. Exact same single element performed second (2nd) time with same entrance and exit.
1) Example – Beam: Back Walkover “A” stop Back Walkover (“0”) later: Back Walkover “A” + Flic-Flac
step-out “B”
2) Third (3rd) Back Walkover receives Value Part credit and can fulfill Acro Special Requirement.

F. Elements listed under the Same Number in Xcel Code of Points may be recognized as different elements.
1. Must meet specific criteria (see specific apparatus chapters for further clarifications Chapter 2– Recognition
(Counting) of Value Parts).
2. Example - Beam: Back Walkover “A” and Back Walkover on one arm “A”
a. Variations of the same element and both will receive VP credit.

G. New Elements not listed in Xcel Code of Points must be evaluated by Regional Technical Committee Chair
and Regional Xcel Committee Chair.
1. Element Evaluation forms found on [Link] website in Forms section under Women.
a. Copy of evaluation must be presented to Meet Referee prior to the competition to ensure proper awarding of
difficulty.
b. Evaluations will be valid for one (1) current Xcel quadrennium (Xcel quadrennium begins August 1 two
years following the Summer Olympics and ends four years later on July 31) and will be posted on Regional
websites.
2. If a Dance or Acro is performed that cannot be specifically found in the Xcel Code of Points, the Judge may
award comparable Value Part credit if they can recognize the “root” element.

H. “A” “B” “C” and “D” Value Parts require specific Technical Execution.
1. Elements not executed according to technical requirements:
a. Recognize as another element listed in Xcel Code of Points, OR
b. Award lower or No VP credit.
2. Specific information/clarifications for each apparatus are provided within the apparatus chapters (see specific
apparatus- Chapter 2 – Recognition (Counting) of Value Parts).

I. Salto elements – fail to land on any part of bottom of feet first:

1. No Value Part credit awarded.
2. No Special Requirement credit awarded.
3. If the gymnast lands on the bottoms of feet and hands or knees simultaneously award VP credit and SR credit if
appropriate and deduct for a Fall.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 4
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
J. Principles for Leaps and Jumps with Split Angles
1. Each Division has a minimum split angle requirement for Value Part and Special Requirement credit.

MINIMUM SPLIT ANGLE REQUIREMENT

BRONZE SILVER GOLD PLATINUM DIAMOND
BEAM No split required 90° 120° 150°
120° 150°
FLOOR 60° 90° 120° 150°

2. Leaps & Jumps that are within 20° of a Division’s split requirement may still receive Value Part and Special
Requirement credit
a. If the split angle is less than the Division’s split requirement, an up to 0.20 deduction would be applied for
insufficient split
b. It the split angle is deficient by more than 20°, award lower Value Part credit or no Value Part credit. The
element would not receive the applicable Special Requirement. Examples:
1) Beam - Gold Division (120° split requirement) – The gymnast performs a split leap (#2.201) with 100°
of split
• Award Value Part credit of “A” (Receives “A” VP since it is within 20° of split requirement for Gold,
but not to the level to receive a “B”)
• Award Special Requirement
• Deduct up to 0.20 for insufficient split
2) Beam - Diamond Division (150° split requirement) – the gymnast performs a split jump (#2.201) with
100°
• “B” value part credit is not awarded. An “A” Value Part could be awarded for a straight jump
(#2.108)
• The jump may not be used for Special Requirement of a leap/jump with 150° split
3. To receive “B”, “C” or “D” Value Part credit as listed in the Xcel Code of Points a leap/jump requiring a 180° split,
must show a minimum of 135° split. However, split angle deductions are based on each Division’s split
requirement, not 180°.
a. Example: Beam - Diamond gymnast performs a switch leap on beam (#2.305 “C”) with 150° split.
1) The switch leap receives “C” Value part credit because the split was greater than 135°
2) The deduction for insufficient split is not applied because the gymnast met the Diamond split
requirement of 150°
3) The leap may be used toward Special requirement credit
4) If the above switch leap had a split of 135°, the leap would receive “C” Value Part credit with a
deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split

III. ALLOWABLE VALUE PARTS AND DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS

A. Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points not based on the
quality/amplitude of the performance. If a restricted element is performed (All Divisions):
1. Deduct 0.50 from SV
2. Do not award Value Part credit
3. The element cannot be used to fulfill Special Requirements
4. If the dismount is a restricted element, also deduct 0.30 from SV for no dismount and do not award Value Part
or Special Requirement credit.
5. All appropriate execution and amplitude deductions would be applied to all elements, whether or not they
receive Value Part credit.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 5
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
B. Bronze Division Allowable Value Parts and Restrictions
1. Only allowable (“A”/ ”B”) elements.
2. “A” Value Parts not allowed in the Bronze Division
a. Bars: Salto Dismounts, any skills on HB, Low Bar Giants
b. Beam: Walkovers, Salto / Aerial Dismounts
c. Floor:
1) Saltos / Aerials
2) A maximum of two (2) Flight Skills are allowed
3. Allowable “B” elements receive “A” VP Credit:
a. Beam:
1) Cross Split Jump (135° - 180° split)
2) Cross Straddle Jump (135° - 180° split)
3) Split Leap (135° – 180° split)
b. Floor:
1) Side Leap (135° – 180° split)
2) Straddle Jump (135° – 180° split)
3) Other “B” or higher VP elements are not allowed.
4. All other “B” or Higher VP elements are not allowed.

C. Silver Division Allowable Value Parts and Restrictions

1. “A” elements, and “B” Dance elements are allowed.
a. Exception: “A” Value Parts not allowed in the Silver Division:
1) Bars: Low Bar Giants / Salto Dismounts
2) Floor: more than one (1) Salto / Aerial.
2. “B” or higher VP elements are not allowed, except “B” Dance elements.

D. Gold Division Allowable Value Parts and Restrictions

1. “A” elements and allowable “B” elements are allowed.
a. “B” Value Parts not allowed in the Gold Division:
1) Bars: Giants, Release moves with bar change
2) Floor: “B” Twisting Saltos
or
2. “C” higher VP elements are not allowed.

E. Platinum Division Allowable Value Parts and Restrictions

1. Only “A” / “B” VP elements and “C” Dance VP elements.
2. Allowable “C” element receives “B” VP credit
a. Bar Circle Skills without turn: #3.304 Clear Hip to Handstand, #6.304 Stalder Backward to Handstand,
#7.309 Pike Sole Circle Backward to Handstand
3. “C” or higher VP elements are not allowed, except “C” Dance elements.

F. Diamond Division Allowable Value Parts and Restrictions

1. Only “A”, “B”, “C” and one (1) “D” VP elements.
a. No Bonus awarded for “D” element.
b. (“E”) VP elements and / or more than one (1) “D” element are not allowed.

IV. NO COMPOSITION DEDUCTIONS

Composition deductions are not applied to any Xcel Division or Event. The emphasis in Xcel is on the gymnast’s
performance quality – Execution, Amplitude, Rhythm, Dynamics, and Artistry.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 6
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
V. EXECUTION (Technique / Amplitude / Posture) and ARTISTRY
A. Characteristics of excellent execution / amplitude would include:
1. Maximum amplitude or range of movement of the body:
a. Externally – relationship of body to apparatus or ground.
b. Internally – focuses upon range of motion within joints of the body. Range through which one or more
individual body segments move relative to each other.
2. Turns in Saltos (breadth axis, longitudinal axis, or combination turns) completed at highest point of flight
trajectory.
3. Optimal body lines, extension, and posture.

B. Characteristics of excellent Artistry include:

1. Lack
Quality
of of
variety in choreography
Gymnast’s movement(poses,
to reflect
phrases,
Personal
connections)
Style up to 0.10 *
3.
2. up to 0.10 *
Quality of Expression (i.e., projection, focus) up to 0.10 *
* maximum deduction of 0.10 in each category

VI. ROUTINE REQUIREMENT FORMULA

BRONZE SILVER GOLD PLATINUM DIAMOND

Value Parts (VP) 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.90 1.10
Special
2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Requirements (SR)
Execution / Artistry 7.60* 7.50* 7.40 * 6.90*
of
* Maximum amount Execution Deductions = 4.00, which includes Falls. 7.10*
Deduct for Artistry and Spotting Assistance in addition to Maximum Execution.
Compositional deductions are not applied to any Division in the Xcel Program.

VII. CALCULATING START VALUES

A. All Judges independently determine the Start Value.

B. Not mandatory that Judges agree on Start Value, but an impossible Start Value requires a Conference.

C. Steps in determining the Start Value:

1. All routines in Xcel begin at 10.00 SV
2. Deduct from Start Value:
a. Missing Value Parts (“A” – 0.10; “B” – 0.30)
b. Missing Special Requirements (0.50 each)
c. Exercise is without a Dismount (0.30)
d. Performance of Restricted Elements (0.50 each)

GENERAL / JUDGES - 7
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES

D. Examples of Determining Start Value:

Bronze Division
Value Part Requirement: 4 “A”
Gymnast performs 4 “A”, and missing 1 SR (-0.50)
Initial Start Value 10.0
Missing SR -0.5
Start Value 9.50 SV
Silver Division
Value Part Requirement: 5 “A”
Gymnast performs 5 ”A”, and all special requirements, and performs a restricted element
(does not receive VP)
Initial Start Value 10.0
Restricted Element -0.50
Start Value 9.5 SV
Gold Division
Value Part Requirement: 6 “A”
Gymnast performs On Bars, Gymnast performs: 4 “A” + 1 “B” / missing the Circling Skill
SR
Initial Start Value 10.0
Missing “A” VP - 0.10
Missing Circling Skill SR - 0.50 SR # 3
Start Value 9.4 SV
Platinum Division
Value Part Requirement: 6 “A” 1 “B”
Gymnast performs 6 “A”, 1 “C” Acro (Restricted), and 1 “C” Dance and meets all SR all
VP requirements are met
Initial Start Value 10.0
Restricted Element -0.5
Start Value 9.5 SV
Diamond Division
Value Part Requirement: 5 “A”, 2 “B”
Gymnast performs 8 “A” 1 “B” and missing 1 SR (-0.50)
Initial Start Value 10.0
Missing 1 “B” -0.30
Missing SR -0.50
Start Value 9.2 SV

GENERAL / JUDGES - 8
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
CHAPTER 3: SCORING
I. DETERMINING AVERAGE SCORE

Determining Average Score (By Panel Size)

Four (4) Judge Panel Two (2) Judge Panel
a. Highest
eliminated.
and Lowest scores are a. Two scores added.
b. Divided by two.
Establish Final
b. Add the middle two scores
Average Score
together
c. Divide by two
Chief Judge 1: 9.40 High eliminated
Judge 2: 9.00 Low eliminated Chief Judge 1: 7.80
Judge 3: 9.20 Judge 2: 7.50
Example Judge 4: 9.30 7.80 + 7.50 = 15.30 / 2 =
9.20 + 9.30 = 18.50 / 2 = 7.65 Average Score
9.25 Average Score
range
Average
between
Score determines
two countingallowable
scores. Average Score determines allowable
Allowable Range
range between two (2) scores.
Two counting
Judge scores out of range, Chief Two (2) scores out of range, Chief
calls a conference.
If out of Range Judge calls a conference.
Example: CJ 8.80, Panel Judge 8.00, Average = 8.40
Out of Range
Example Allowable range for this score is 0.70. Difference between scores is 0.80.
Conference must be called.

II. RANGE OF SCORES

A. Range of Scores is allowable difference between the two (2) counting scores.
1. Whenever a Zero score is one of the counting scores, the allowable score range does NOT apply.

B. Average Score, not the Chief Judge’s score, determines the Range.

C. USA Gymnastics Xcel competitions, allowable Range of Scores between two middle scores, or two (2)
scores, when only two (2) Judges are used:

Allowable Range of Scores

Allowable Range Between Two
Average Score Between
Counting Scores
9.50 – 10.00 0.20 pt.
9.00 – 9.475 0.50 pt.
8.00 –8.975 0.70 pt.
Below 8.000 1.0 pt.

D. Too great a difference between the two scores, a conference of Judges is called. Discrepancy is resolved by
one of the following procedures:
1. Start Value discussed.
2. Mathematical procedures checked for accuracy.
3. Adjustments made in scores to conform to allowable range.
4. Professional responsibility of Judges to come to an agreement if scores are initially out of range.
5. Judges unable to compromise, Chief Judge may mandate scores be brought into allowable range.

E. Judges may evaluate in 0.05 increments at all competitions.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 9
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
F. Final Courtesy Score of 4.00 will be awarded for any exercise that results in a score equal to or less than
four (4.00) points.
1. Exception on Vault: certain circumstances will result in a Void Vault. Refer to Vault chapter.

G. Open Scoring is not allowed at competitions below State Championships. Only the Average score is listed on
gymnast’s card and / or flashed on audience scoreboard.
1. State Administrative Committee determines if Open Scoring is allowed at Xcel State Championships.
2. Regional Administrative Committee determines if Open Scoring is allowed at Xcel Regional Championships.

H. Flashing of Start Values at Competitions

1. Required at all Divisions of Xcel competitions.
2. Start Values can be flashed or written on Gymnast’s competition card.
3. Judge’s responsibility to provide Start Value flashing units, unless provided by meet host.
4. Procedures for Flashing Start Values:
a. Each Judge independently determines Start Value.
b. Start Value and Final Score recorded on judging slip and sent via runner or electronic scoring device to
Chief Judge.
c. Each Judge displays Start Value on flashing unit, when Chief Judge receives ALL Judges’ scores.
d. Judges do not have to agree on Start Value, but an impossible SV requires a conference.
e. Conference may be called to determine if Start Value needs to be adjusted, either up or down.
f. Start Value changed as a result of a conference, adjusted Start Value flashed as “Corrected Start Value”.

I. Time Frame for Changing a Score

1. Final Average Score submitted to scoring system:
a. May not be changed unless there is an inquiry.
b. Chief Judge allowed to change a score after submission to scoring system:
1) If neutral deduction was inadvertently not applied (example: out of bounds / overtime) or
2) If data entry error was made.
3) Score change must occur:
• Prior to end of rotation, or
• Within five (5) minutes of end of session (example: data entry error).
4) Coach must be notified of score change and if possible, new score should be displayed to the public.
2. Routine mistakenly judged using Incorrect Division Rules
a. May be re-evaluated using appropriate rules, based on Judges’ shorthand or notes.
1) Re-evaluation must occur within five (5) minutes of end of session.
2) Judging Panel must notify Meet Referee and scoring personnel of the Re-evaluation.
b. Coach must be notified of score change and if possible, new score should be displayed to the public

CHAPTER 4: UNUSUAL JUDGING SITUATIONS

I. INCOMPLETE EXERCISE / EXTREMELY SHORT ROUTINE (VT / UB / BB / FX)
A. Courtesy Score of 4.0 may be awarded for an extremely Short Routine due to injury or unusual
circumstances.
1. No routine will be awarded less than 4.0.
2. Exception: if a “0” (VOID) is earned on Vault.

B. Common sense should prevail.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 10
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
II. EQUIPMENT FAILURE / REPETITION OF AN EXERCISE
A. In situations where there is an equipment failure (including broken or completely torn handgrips) occurring
through no fault of Gymnast or Coach, Gymnast may choose to:
1. Stop immediately and request permission from Chief Judge to either:
a. Repeat routine or to continue from point of interruption.
b. Permission granted, perform after reasonable amount of rest time.
c. No score would be given for the partial routine.
2. Continue to complete routine. At the completion of the routine,
a. Gymnast and Coach must decide whether to repeat the routine or accept the score given.
b. Judges will not post score until that decision is made
c. Floor Exercise: no deduction taken for music failure, if the decision is to accept the score.
3. Equipment failure does not include: unfastening of bandages / handgrips, loss / partial loss of footwear,
incorrect bar setting, or failure to tighten cables/T-handles on Bars and Beam.
4. Any decision regarding repetition of an exercise must be made by Chief Judge, in consultation with Meet
Referee.

B. Flash/light from a camera is not a reason to repeat a routine.

III. INQUIRIES
A. Coach is entitled to see the four (or two) scores of individual Gymnast.

B. Coach has a question regarding an exercise during competition:

1. Chief Judge / Meet Referee should advise Coach to submit Inquiry Form to officially receive information.
2. No casual conversation during competition between Coach and Judge regarding evaluation of an exercise.

C. Inquiries are limited to questions regarding:

1. Start Value
2. Neutral deductions
3. Falls
4. Unusual Occurrences

D. Inquiries must be legibly written on official Inquiry Form by the Coach:

1. Submitted within five (5) minutes of completion of event rotation to Meet Director or Meet Referee.
2. Meet Director will forward to Meet Referee, who gives inquiry to Chief Judge of apparatus in question.
3. No fee may be charged to submit an inquiry.
4. Coaches need to be aware that an inquiry allows for a second evaluation, which may result in:
a. No change in score.
b. Score being raised.
c. Score being lowered.

E. Score Review at Sectional / State / Regional Meets: after completion of the last event:
1. All-Around score = Maximum of 0.10 less than qualifying score to State / Regional Championships,
a. Coach may submit an inquiry for Gymnast’s lowest scoring event.
b. This does not apply to Individual Event Specialists (IES).
2. Change of Score is official and included in official results.
3. Process does not apply:
a. For mobility purposes.
b. If qualification to State / Regional meet is by percentage or designated number per age Division.

F. Chief Judge and Panel Judge(s) will respond, providing only information requested.
1. Chief Judge completes inquiry, Meet Referee / Meet Director returns form to Coach, either by hand / by pre
defined inquiry return procedure.
2. Coach may not approach Judge(s) regarding inquiry during competition.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 11
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
G. Video Review is allowed at any Xcel competition during the processing of an inquiry if the following criteria
is met:
1. At all sanctioned Xcel competitions for all Divisions, a coach can request Video Review by Meet Referee and
highest rated unaffiliated Judge (if video is available) in the event that the Inquiry involves:
a. Possibility the Judges missed an element that would affect the Start Value.
b. All events: Verification that Gymnast was Spotted/Assisted by Coach.
c. Vault: Whether Gymnast lands on bottom of feet first.
d. Bars:
1) Verification that Gymnast grasps or touches the bar with one (1) or two (2) hands before falling on a
release element.
2) Verification that the dismount landed on the feet first prior to falling.
e. Beam:
1) To determine if gymnast landed on bottom of the feet on top of the beam prior to falling.
2) Verification that the dismount landed on the feet first prior to falling.
f. Floor:
1) Verification that an element landed on bottom of the feet first on Saltos prior to falling.
2) Verification that the gymnast did not touch outside of the Floor Exercise boundary line.
g. Video Review process may not be used to appeal a judgement of degree assessment
1) Examples: degree of casts/handstands / incomplete turns / direct connection of elements / or leg
separation in leaps, as well as other like skills.
h. If the Meet Referee / highest rated Judge is affiliated with the gymnast concerned with the video review:
1) Video Review will be conducted by the two highest rated non-affiliated Judges, OR
2) Highest rated non-affiliated Judge and a USA Gymnastics officer.
i. Meet Referee must inform Judging Panel that a video review will be initiated, as well as the final decision.
j. Video Review must be viewed in normal speed.
1) Slow motion viewing is not allowed.

H. If procedures stated above (under “F.”) are not properly followed on a submitted inquiry:
1. Coach may petition the Jury of Appeals for a review within five (5) minutes of the end of rotation / competition or
return of Inquiry Form, whichever occurs later.
2. Video Review, if available, may be considered by the Jury of Appeals.
3. Jury decision should occur within 15 minutes after conclusion of meet and before awards are presented.

IV. JUDGE INADVERTENTLY MISSES THE EXERCISE

The following procedures are to be used in the rare occurrence that one (1) Judge misses the exercise:
A. 2-Judge Panel: Two options after Coach is advised of the score of the Judge who evaluated the whole
routine:
1. Accept that score, OR
2. Repeat the exercise after a reasonable period of rest. Must accept score of second routine.

B. 4-Judge Panel: Final score is determined

1. Enter score for Judge who missed routine = highest score given by three other Judges and then averaging two
middle scores, as usual.
2. Gives the benefit of having highest possible score and no need to repeat the exercise.

C. Chief Judge should consult with Meet Referee, who will then notify Coach of the options.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 12
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
V. PROCEDURES FOR FALLS / INJURIES RESULTING IN BLEEDING
A. Take steps to stop bleeding immediately and cover wound as soon as possible.

B. Bleeding wound (or any other injury due to a fall) does not give the right to repeat exercise or resume from
interruption.

C. 45-second Beam or Bars Fall Time exceeded before wound can be covered, then exercise is terminated.

D. Blood on any equipment or mats after routine finishes: Blood must be removed prior to beginning the next
Gymnast’s routine.

E. Coach and Gymnast have the right to determine if Gymnast can continue the routine after the fall (within
Fall Time limits).

CHAPTER 5: DUTIES & RESPONSIBILITIES OF MEET OFFICIALS

I. GENERAL DUTIES OF ALL OFFICIALS
A. Individual Judges shall perform their function as a Judge of the Meet according to USA Gymnastics Rules
and Policies, membership policies and USA Gymnastics Code of Ethics.

B. Individual Judges shall be limited to judging, evaluating, and scoring the competition.
1. Shall not involve herself / himself with the conduct of Gymnast during warm-ups or training.
2. Comments to Gymnast should be made only if requested from Coach or Gymnast.

C. Individual Judges will be bound by terms of individual contract agreed upon for the meet.

D. Judges are responsible, according to all appropriate laws and jurisdiction, for all financial reporting and
identification of payment / reimbursements received to the appropriate agencies (i.e., IRS).

E. Each individual Judge shall sign and return contract to Meet Director and contracting official.

F. Judges are not allowed to accept gifts in addition to USA Gymnastics Judges’ Compensation Package fees
/ expenses unless the gift does not exceed retail value of $20.00.

G. Judges are not allowed to act in dual capacity (i.e., Coach / Judge, Parenting / Judge, Meet Director / Judge,
Announcer/Judge).

H. Must act in a Professional Manner.

1. Must not leave their seat during competition without permission of Meet Referee or Chief Judge.
2. Must remain at their event station until entire competition has been completed.
3. Must avoid conversations with Coaches regarding evaluation of exercises.
4. Must be willing to compromise when the two (2) counting scores are out of range.

I. Must wear correct uniform.

1. Judges must dress appropriately, regardless of the level of competition, in the required uniform (Navy skirt/pants
and jacket, white blouse/shirt, NAWGJ navy dress/sweater).
a. Suit jackets are required for State meets and above.
b. Leggings are not acceptable attire to officiate a competition.
2. Theme meets: Judges may wear the official uniform or dress in the theme of the meet.

J. Chief Judge and Panel Judge(s) are responsible for:

1. Flashing Start Value at all Xcel meets or write the SV on Gymnast’s score card.
2. Must provide SV flashing unit, unless provided by meet host.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 13
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
K. Judges may use Electronic Devices (including: cell phones, tablets, etc.) only for Gymnastics purposes on
the Field of Play.

II. MEET REFEREE (may also act as Chief Judge)

A. Meet Referee, or acting Meet Referee, must be designated at all Xcel sanctioned competitions.

B. If Meet Referee also serves as Chief Judge at State Championships with four-judge panels or any Regional
championships, regardless of number of judges per panel, receives Chief Judge’s fee and Meet Referee’s
fee (total of $20/day).

C. Meet Referee Duties and Responsibilities:

1. If requested, assists in conducting the draw prior to / at Coaches’ meeting (depending on organization of meet in
accordance with the Rules & Policies) at State / Regional competitions, in conjunction with:
a. Appropriate USA Gymnastics Officer, and / or
b. Meet Director
2. Liaison between Coaches and Judges: must attend Coaches meeting (or designate a proxy) at State / Regional
competitions.
3. Conducts Judges’ meeting prior to competition using the Meet Referee Check List.
a. Presents Base Score videos (if available) for analysis at State and above meets.
b. Reviews procedures with Judges:
1) Logistics of the meet / scoring system, meet mechanics, etc.
2) Rule changes
3) Equipment issues
4) Information from Meet Director
5) Professional protocol reminders
4. Assigns Chief Judge and Panel Judges to respective events, as requested by State / Regional Administrative
Committee for State / Regional meets.
a. Recommended that State / Regional Administrative Committee assign the duty of event assignments to
designated Meet Referee.
b. Criteria for assignment must be followed.
1) If Meet Referee is also Chief Judge, assigning official may make event assignments.
2) Local, Pre-sectional and Sectional meets: assigning official may make event assignments.
D. During Conferences: May observe and/or give opinion during conferences.

E. Available for counsel, upon request of Chief Judge.

F. May counsel Chief Judge when, in her / his opinion, Average Score and / or Score of Chief Judge seems out
of line with scoring in the competition.

G. May recommend, but never force, a change of any score.

H. Corrects and signs official score sheets after any change of score.

I. Gives any technical or judging information pertinent to competition to Meet Director or Organizing
Committee for distribution.

J. Acts as final authority in all technical matters involving Judges, Timers, Line Judges, Flashers, individual
event, and AA Tabulators.

K. Notates Warning(s) given by the Chief Judge concerning:

1. Incorrect Attire or Signaling with Verbal Cue.
2. Notifies Chief Judges on other events, a warning has been given and appropriate deductions may be applied.

L. Issues warning to Coach for Unsportsmanlike Conduct: upon notification from Judge(s).
1. Follow USA Gymnastics’ Safe Sport Policy and Coaches Behavior Policy in Rules and Policies.
2. Applied for excessive cheers and / or behavior of Teammates, or
3. Applied for Coach who is disruptive to competition.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 14
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES

M. Available for minimum of five (5) minutes following last competitors’ exercises to deal with questions or
concerns with technical decisions and / or Judges’ scores.

N. Serves as President of the Jury of Appeal.

O. May be an Affiliated Judge.

P. Indicates any violations of Rules and Policies on Sanction Report Form or Notifies USA Gymnastics
Member Services directly in writing by e-mail.

Q. Judges’ fees and expenses: Is responsible for compiling and checking information regarding judges’ fees and
expenses for the Meet Director.

R. Checks with scoring personnel to verify all scores for Gymnasts are entered and all inquiries have been
resolved.

S. Coach Issues warning to coach and notifies Meet Director if she/he observes more than one gymnast on
Uneven Bars at the same time during any warm-up (pre-meet or 30-second touch).

T. Monitors Judging Panels to ensure the appropriate use of Electronic Tablets for judging and reference
purposes.

III. CHIEF JUDGE

A. Prepares Panel Judges for correct evaluation of exercises at Judges’ meeting prior to competition.

B. Advises the Meet Director of any equipment safety concerns or non-approved equipment and checks that
all materials necessary are available and functioning properly. This could include:
1. Light or Time Signals
2. Stopwatches
3. Electronic scoring devices

C. Instructs Judging Assistants to assure:

1. Correct use of signal to indicate Line Violations.
2. Correct use of Stopwatch and Timing Device to indicate Time Limitations.
3. Proper reporting procedures for the following Violations:
a. Exceeding Time allowed
b. Stepping out of floor exercise Boundary Area
4. Correct method of Scoring.
5. Correct procedures for Flashing of Start Values, Individual Score and / or Average Score.

D. Responsible for correct work of Panel Judges / Assistant Judges.

E. Uses green flag / hand signal to acknowledge the Gymnast.

F. Must evaluate the exercises:

1. Accurately without bias.
2. Must first write / enter electronic score, before reviewing scores from other Judges.

G. Must record number of “A” “B” “C” “D” VPs / Special Requirements / Start Value, and record deductions for
Execution / Amplitude, Artistry and Neutral Deductions.

H. Verifies proper range of scores.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 15
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
I. Verifies properly recording: Chief Judge score, Panel Judge(s) score, Average Score and Time / Line deductions.
1. Note: It is not necessary to sign official score sheet.

J. Confirms when Gymnast may repeat an exercise (or portion of the exercise) due to technical failure and
determines when repetition (or continuation) will occur.
1. Camera flash/light is not a valid reason to allow Gymnast to repeat exercise.
2. Decisions must be made in consultation with Meet Referee prior to score being flashed.

K. Responsible for calling Conference if impossible Start Value awarded and / or to assist Judges in arriving at
common basis for scoring during competition. During the Conference:
1. Start Value differences clarified.
2. Meet Referee may be notified / included in the discussion.
3. Judges may change scores, but are not obliged:
a. Scores are out of allowable range, adjustments must be made.
b. Professional responsibility to come to agreement, if scores are initially out of range.
4. Judges unable to compromise, Chief Judge may mandate scores be brought into allowable range.

L. Chief Judge deducts from Average Score:

1. Neutral Deduction must be indicated to Coach either verbally or visually, at conclusion of exercise.
(See table of Chief Judge Deductions- Chapter 6: Deductions, item II. Chief Judge Deductions)

M. Terminates an Exercise after a fall exceeds allotted Fall Time:

1. Uneven Bars: 45 seconds once gymnast is standing up on her feet
2. Balance Beam: 45 seconds once gymnast is standing up on her feet
3. Bleeding wound (or any other injury due to a fall) does not give the right to repeat exercise or resume from
interruption. Fall Time (BB / UB respectively) exceeded before wound can be covered, routine terminated.

N. Reports to Meet Referee / Jury if:

1. Gymnast’s attire is incorrect.
2. Unsportsmanlike conduct of Coach (after warning).
3. Excessive cheers / behavior disruptive to competition by Teammates / Coaches.
a. Example: standing around FX area, blocking view of Judges / spectators.
4. Failure to observe Warm-up Time by Team (after warning).
a. Deduction applied to Team Event score, where infraction occurred.
5. Coach / Teammates were warned about Technical Verbal Cues.
O. Responsible for responding, in conjunction with Panel Judge(s), to inquiry in professional manner.

P. May not be affiliated at any sanctioned qualifying meets.

1. Exceptions:
a. State Administrative Committee determines if any additional criteria / change in criteria will be used for State
organized competitions.
b. Affiliated Judge(s) can be used for one-Judge Panel for Bronze / Silver / Gold Divisions.
c. In extenuating circumstances, Meet Director may request permission from SAC to allow Affiliated one-Judge
Panel for Platinum and Diamond Divisions.
d. Shall not involve herself / himself with conduct of Gymnast during warm-ups or training. Comments to
gymnast should be made only if requested from Coach or Gymnast.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 16
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
IV. PANEL JUDGE

A. Must evaluate the exercises quickly and accurately, without bias.

B. Must record the number of skills “A” “B” “C” “D” VP / Special Requirements / Start Value, and deductions for
Execution / Amplitude and Artistry.

C. Must include on Score Slip sent to Chief Judge (when electronic score input is not available):
1. Signature and Assigned Number
2. Start Value
3. Special Requirement deductions
4. Skills “A” “B” “C” VP missing
5. Notification of deduction taken for Coach spotting Gymnast
6. Notification that Gymnast exceeded border marking on Floor Exercise.
a. If No Line Judges are present, attempt to signal by raising a hand.
7. Should write European 7.

D. Responsible for Flashing Score and Start Value.

1. Must provide SV flashing unit, unless provided by meet host.

E. When changing a score, must cross out first score, initial change, and write in new score. Do not erase.

F. Must act in a Professional Manner.

1. Must not leave seat, during competition without permission of Chief Judge.
2. Must remain at event station, until entire competition completed.
3. Must avoid conversations with Coaches, regarding evaluation of exercises.
4. Must be willing to compromise, when the two (2) counting scores are out of range.

G. May be Affiliated: may not be more than one (1) Judge per Panel with the same affiliation.

V. JUDGING ASSISTANTS
A. Do not evaluate or score the exercise.

B. Signal and record specific faults and penalties to assist Chief Judge.

C. Types of Judging Assistants and Responsibilities:

1. Line Judges for Floor Exercise
a. Must be a USA Gymnastics Judge member with a current rating.
b. Signal by raising hand or flag when Gymnast steps (or touches some part of body) beyond Boundary Line.
c. Inform Chief Judge in writing of Line Violations.
2. Timers
a. Vault – Fall Timer
1) Chief Judge monitors Vault Fall Time on first vault.
2) The watch: The fall time is 45 seconds
• Starts when Gymnast is standing up on her feet.
• Stops when Gymnast salutes for second vault.
3) Announcing Time:
• Announces “20 seconds remaining” at 25 seconds.
• Announces “10 seconds remaining” at 35 seconds.
• Announces “Time” at 45 seconds.
(i) A second vault not allowed after “Time” is announced.
b. Uneven Bar – Fall Timer
1) The watch: The fall time is 45 seconds
• Time Starts when Gymnast is standing up on her feet after a fall.
• Time Stops when Gymnast leaves mat to re-mount.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 17
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
2) Announcing Time:
• Announces “20 seconds remaining” at 25 seconds.
• Announces “10 seconds remaining” at 35 seconds.
• Announces “Time” at 45 seconds.
c. Balance Beam – Routine Timer
1) The watch:
• Time Starts when Gymnast leaves the floor or mount apparatus to mount.
• Time Stops when Gymnast arrives on mat on her dismount.
• If the Gymnast Falls:
(i) Time Stops when the Gymnast lands on the floor after a fall.
(ii) Time Re-starts with the first movement to continue routine.
2) Signals with an acoustic instrument (or verbally):
• “Warning” at 10 seconds remaining.
• “Time” at final time.
3) Informs Chief Judge, verbally or in writing, of any Time Violation.
d. Balance Beam – Fall Timer
1) The watch: The fall time is 45 seconds
• Time Starts when Gymnast is standing up on her feet after a fall.
• Time Stops when Gymnast leaves the floor to re-mount.
2) Announcing Time:
• Announces “20 seconds remaining” at 25 seconds.
• Announces “10 seconds remaining” at 35 seconds.
• Announces “Time” at 45 seconds.
e. Floor Exercise – Timer
1) The watch:
• Time Starts with the first movement of the Gymnast.
• Time Stops with the final movement of the Gymnast.
• Informs Chief Judge of Time Violation verbally or in writing, indicating the actual time.
f. Additional Timers and Assistants:
1) Control of Warm-up periods: during timed warm-up / 30-second touch warm-up
• See the Rules & Policies for complete warm-up regulations.
• Timer should begin when Gymnast is prepared to mount (within reasonable time).
• Adjustments not included in 30-second touch warm-up time:
(i) Adjustment (setting) of Bars
(ii) Adjustment / marking of Beam
(iii) Setting Board for Beam / Bars
• Procedures for 30-second Touch Warm-ups:
(i) Announces “20 seconds remaining” at 10 seconds.
(ii) Announces “10 seconds remaining” at 20 seconds.
(iii) Announces “Time” at 30 seconds.
• Exceeding Warmup Time:
(i) “Time” called, if preparing for skill / dismount, may continue to finish without penalty.
(ii) “Time” called, fails to leave apparatus, Timer must announce “Time exceeded”.
(iii) Fails to leave apparatus, Timer reports infraction to Chief Judge,
(iv) Chief Judge deducts 0.20 from Average Score.
2) Control beginning of exercise after flashing of Green Light / Signal from Chief Judge (Fall Timer may
keep time).
3) Assistant to operate instrument or flashboard that indicates Vault Numbers.
4) Other Assistants as required by Chief Judge, Jury of Appeals, or Meet Organizers

GENERAL / JUDGES - 18
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES

VI. JURY OF APPEALS

A. Comprised of the following individuals:
1. Meet Referee / Technical Director – President of the Jury
2. Meet Director (non-voting, if the question relates to her / his Gymnast)
3. Chief Judges of all four (4) events (or of the event involved, whichever would be appropriate)
4. USA Gymnastics personnel (State / Regional Administrative Committee Chairman and / or Regional / National
Xcel Committee Chairman)
B. Regional Competitions, the Jury of Appeals is comprised of:
1. Meet Director (unless affiliated with the Inquiry)
2. Meet Referee
3. USA Gymnastics elected Xcel / Administrative officer

C. Rights and Duties of the Jury of Appeals

1. Governs all technical and organizational matters of the competition.
2. Makes the final decision regarding any unusual situations.
a. Deduction taken from All-Around score by Meet Referee challenged,
b. Jury of Appeals would convene to make final decision.
3. Reviews improperly handled Inquiries:
a. Administrative procedures not followed properly on submitted inquiry:
1) Coach may petition Jury of Appeals for a review
2) Within five (5) minutes of end of rotation / competition / return of inquiry form, whichever occurs later.
4. State meets and above, Video Review (if available),
a. May be considered by the Jury of Appeals.
b. Jury decision should occur within fifteen (15) minutes after conclusion of meet and before awards are
presented.
5. Methods of settling a case by the Jury of Appeals
a. Discussion
b. Vote on a Decision
c. Majority vote dictates the final decision

D. Procedures for Inquiries:

1. Properly written inquiry form by the Coach.
2. Inquiry submitted in a timely manner to Meet Referee / Meet Director.
3. Inquiry reviewed / answered by Judging Panel of event in question.
4. Inquiry returned to Meet Referee / Meet Director.
Meet Referee / Meet Director returns inquiry form to Coach by hand or by predefined Inquiry return procedure.
5. At all sanctioned Xcel competitions for all Divisions, Coach may request video review by the Meet
Referee and the highest rated unaffiliated judge (if video is available) if the inquiry involves possibility
that the judges missed an element that would affect the Start Value.
a. The video review process may NOT be used to appeal a judgment of degree assessment, i.e., degree of
casts, handstands, incomplete turns, direct connection of elements, or leg separation in leaps as well as
other like skills.
b. If the Meet Referee or highest rated judge is affiliated with the athlete in question, the video review will be
conducted by the two highest rated unaffiliated judges, or the highest rated unaffiliated judge and a USA
Gymnastics officer.
c. The Meet Referee must inform the judging panel that a video review will be initiated as well as the final
decision.
d. Examples of reasons for video review:
1) All judges did not record a full turn on Beam.
2) One or more judges recorded a 1/1 twist instead of 2/1 twist on FX.
3) To verify if the gymnast grasps or touches the bar with one or two hands before falling on a release
element.
4) To verify if the gymnast lands on the bottom of the feet first on a Vault, Uneven Bar/Beam dismounts,
Beam Acro elements that finish on top of the beam (foot/feet), and Floor Exercise saltos.
5) To consider spotting deductions.
6) To consider floor line violations.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 19
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
CHAPTER 6: APPARATUS SPECIFICATIONS
A. Refer to the following information for Apparatus Specifications
1. Refer to the current USA Gymnastics Women’s Rules and Policies book. Requirements are subject to change
every competitive year, beginning August 1.
2. Specific information/clarifications for each apparatus (related to deductions) are provided within each event
chapter (see Event - Chapter 2 – II. Apparatus Specifications).

B. Conversions – Inches to Centimeters: Approx. ¾ inch = 2 cm.

Conversion of Inches to Centimeters

(1 in. = 2.54 cm.)
Inches Centimeters
Approx. ¾ inch 2 cm.
4 inches 10 cm.
8 inches 20 cm.
9 inches 24 cm.

CHAPTER 7: ATTIRE REGULATIONS

A. Specific information/clarifications for each apparatus are provided within each event chapter (see Event - Chapter 2
– Attire Regulations).
B. Incorrect Attire – includes jewelry (on the event after warning was issued)

C. Warning issued by Meet Referee / Chief Judge.

1. Deduction applied to first event competed after warning. MR must inform CJ at subsequent events, no further
penalty taken. Deduction taken one (1) time only.
D. Acceptable Apparel: Acceptable attire is one-piece leotard with / without sleeves and no bare midriff. Unitards with
long legs, with / without sleeves are acceptable. In addition to leotard or ankle-length unitard, acceptable attire
would also include:
1. Ankle-length tights worn under leotard (that match leotard or are skin tone).
2. Solid black Lycra shorts (small manufacturer’s branding allowed) with no embellishments. Must be worn over
the leotard and length must be above the knee or shorter.
3. Head covering is acceptable, if attached to the leotard or unitard and fits snugly over the head, not to impose a
safety hazard to the Gymnast.

E. Medical
1. Medically necessary bandages are allowed.
2. Medical bracelets are allowed

F. Unacceptable Attire:
1. Leotard Cut/ Backless
a. Leg cut of leotard must be below pelvis / hip bone.
b. Backless leotards are not acceptable.
1) Unless the open area is filled in with mesh or flesh-colored fabric, a leotard is considered backless
when the open area visually extends:
• Lower than two (2) inches (approximately) below the bottom of the scapula (shoulder blade)
• Wider than the vertical midpoint of the scapula.
2. Underwear (including sports bras) should not be visible.
a. Visible underwear due to cut of leotard, warning given. No correction made, take deduction on subsequent
event.
b. Underwear should not be intentionally visible throughout entire routine.
1) Clear bra strap is acceptable.
2) Briefs / Bra straps show due to activity, do not take deduction.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 20
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
c. Common sense should prevail.
3. Jewelry:
a. Only Stud Earrings allowed in any part of ear. All other piercings must be removed and not covered with
tape or bandage.
b. Jewelry is not allowed to be worn during warm-ups or competition.
c. Necklaces / Bracelets not allowed. (Exception: medical bracelets)
4. Other:
a. Spaghetti Straps considered inappropriate attire – minimum of 2cm (7/8”) wide.
b. Elastic Waistbands considered incorrect attire.
5. Competitor Number: Failure to wear Competitor Number, when required.
6. Failure to secure Hair away from the face, may not obscure vision of apparatus.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 21
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
CHAPTER 8: DEDUCTIONS
I. GENERAL DEDUCTIONS
General deductions for faults in Technique, Execution, Amplitude, and Artistry on Bars, Beam and Floor

GENERAL DEDUCTIONS
each time 0.05 Flexed / Sickled feet during Value Part elements
0.05 Failure to hold ending pose for 1 second. (Floor exercise)
Lands with Feet Apart
0.05 Lands Vault or UB/BB dismount with Feet Hip-width apart or closer, but Never Joins Heels
0.10 Lands Vault / Dismount with feet further than Hip-width apart
up to 0.10 Entire Foot / Feet slide or lifted off floor to join on controlled extension of Vault / Dismount landing,
(u S aults
mallF
.10)
0
pto when feet are maximum of Hip-width apart (small step)
up to 0.10 Slight Hop, small adjustment of feet, or feet staggered * (one in front of the other) on landing of
elements or Dismounts
No deduction FX Acro elements: small, controlled step after landing to finish in lunge is allowed.
up to 0.10 Deviation from straight Direction on landing
up to 0.10 Arm Swings on landing to maintain balance
up to 0.10 Legs Crossed during Value Part elements with a Twist
up to 0.10 Brush / Touch of Foot / Feet on Apparatus or Mat
each 0.10 Step(s) on Landing
Max. 0.40
up to 0.20 Leg or Knee separations
Insufficient Exactness of Body Positions
up to 0.20 • Insufficient Tuck (Ideal = min. of 90° bend in both Hips and Knees)
up to 0.20 • Insufficient Pike (Ideal = min. of 90° bend in Hips, 91° - 135° = insufficient pike)
up to 0.20 • Insufficient Stretch (Ideal = straight 180° position (136° to 180° is stretched)
up to 0.20 • Arch
up to 0.20 • Hip angle = 136° - 179°
up to 0.20 Failure to maintain Stretched body position (Pikes down)
up to 0.20 Incorrect Body Posture on landing of Elements and Dismount
up to 0.20 Insufficient Split when required (Dance / Non-flight Acro elements)
Large Step / Jump on landing (approximately 3 feet or more)
Max. 0.40
0.20
up to 0.20 Additional Trunk movements to maintain balance / control upon landing UB / BB Dismounts or Floor
Acro elements.
Applies to “stuck” landings, using trunk movements to avoid steps.
up to 0.20 Incomplete Turn / Twist
up to 0.30 Bent Arms in Support (90° or more = 0.30)
up
max.
to 0.60
0.30 Bent Legs (90° or more = 0.30)
Maximum on any one element (0.30 bent arms & 0.30 bent legs)
up to 0.30 Additional Movements to maintain balance / control on the Beam
up to 0.30 Squat on Landing (hips even with / lower than knees)

up to 0.30 Brushes / Touches landing surface with one (1) or two (2) hands (No Support)
up to 0.30 Insufficient Extension (open) of body prior to landing – UB / BB dismounts and BB / FX Acro Elements
up to 0.30 Insufficient Height of Salto Dismount (UB / BB) or Salto element (FX)
0.30 Use of Supplemental Support (BB) – Examples in specific apparatus chapter

GENERAL / JUDGES - 22
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
0.50 Support on Mat / Apparatus with 1 or 2 hands upon landing element or dismount
0.50 Fall Onto or Off the Apparatus, or upon landing dismount, Fall Against the apparatus or onto Mat to
knee(s) or Hips
0.50 Fall / Failure to land on bottom of feet first on Aerial/Salto elements or Dismounts
• No Value Part / No Special Requirement
0.50 Spotting Assistance during an element or dismount: No Value Part / No Special Requirement
0.50 Spotting Assistance upon landing of Dismount element: Award VP / Award SR
Additional 0.50 Fall after Spotting Assistance on element or dismount landing

A. Clarification on Steps on Landing:

1. Deduct 0.10 for step-close, considered one (1) step.
a. Examples: one (1) step
1) Lands with feet together, takes one (1) step forward / sideward / backward on Right foot; then
returns Right foot to join Left foot, OR
2) Lands with feet together, takes one (1) step forward / backward / sideward on Right foot; then
steps with Left foot to join Right foot.
2. Deduct 0.05 for very small step-close or other small foot movement.
3. Out of control / additional movements to maintain balance after step(s), additional deductions may be
applied.
4. Maximum deduction of 0.40 for any number of Steps (small / large). Steps out of control, leading to a fall,
only apply the 0.50 deduction for a fall.
5. If Gymnast lands with feet apart / staggered and then continues to take step(s), deduct only for the
step(s). Deductions for landing with feet apart / staggered are to be applied only when Gymnast “Sticks”
the landing.

GENERAL / JUDGES - 23
 Xcel Code of Points
GENERAL / JUDGES
II. CHIEF JUDGE DEDUCTIONS
CHIEF JUDGE DEDUCTS FROM AVERAGE SCORE
No Deduction Coach standing between the Bars or next to Beam, throughout the entire exercise
No Deduction Coach on Floor Exercise mat inside border marking
0.10 Overtime
each time 0.10 Any part of the body touching outside of the Floor Exercise border marking
each time 0.10 Failure to present before and after exercise.
It is required to present to the Chief Judge before the exercise.
Presentation to a judge is not required at the end of the exercise.
0.10 Failure to Mark Boundary Line on additional matting, which covers Boundary Line (FX)
0.20 Incorrect Attire – includes jewelry (on the event after warning was issued)
• Refer to the previous section – Chapter 7: Attire Regulations for attire descriptions.
0.20 Failure to begin exercise within 30 seconds after Chief Judge signals to begin
0.20 Unsportsmanlike Conduct of Gymnast (after warning)
0.20 Incorrect padding (wearing Heel / Hip pads on Bars)
• Chief Judge observes Heel / Hip pads prior to mount, Warning must be given.
• Heel / Hip pads worn during exercise (whether warning given or not), deduction must be taken.
0.20 Technical verbal cues by Coach or Teammate(s) to own Gymnast (after warning)
The Judge(s) must hear the words. Deduction taken only once, regardless of number of cues given.
Examples:
• Technical Cues – “hollow”, “pull”, “breathe”, etc.
• Gymnast competing, Coach gives specific information on what to do next, deduct without warning given.
0.20 Failure to observe specified Warm-up Time (after warning)
• Deduction taken from the gymnast’s Event score or Team score at Team competitions.
• Deduction applies only to the practice of an element(s).
◦ Preparing for Skill / Dismount, when time called, continue to finish without penalty.
◦ No deduction for jumping on board / briefly touching apparatus immediately prior to competition on UB / BB.
• If the gymnast fails to leave apparatus, when “Time” is called, the timer must warn the gymnast by announcing
“Time Exceeded”.
• If the gymnast remains on the apparatus, Timer reports infraction to the Chief Judge, who deducts 0.20 from
average score.
0.20 Excessive Use of Magnesia (chalk) or Incorrect Use of Tape
• Vault: Use of Tape or Excessive Chalk not permitted on Vault Table.
◦ Athletic Tape or Velcro strips (No chalk) may be used on Vault runway.
◦ Markings (no more than 2 inches wide) must be removed by end of rotation.
◦ Warning before deduction, if measurement exceeded / markings not removed.
◦ Athletic Tape is allowed on the Mat stack for Bronze/Silver Divisions.
• Beam: Small chalk markings may be placed on Beam (tape markings NOT allowed)
• Floor: Spreading magnesia on FX mat not allowed; only small marks are allowed.
◦ Single-Line Arc in corner of Floor is acceptable.
◦ Velcro / Tape markings not allowed within Floor mat area.
◦ Tape markings allowed at corners to indicate Boundary Line with carpet using two (2) colors.
0.20 Performing an element on the mat after a fall from the beam prior to re-mounting
(Additional warm-up; Deduction applied-No warning required)
0.30 Use of Unauthorized or Additional Mats, Springboard on Unauthorized Surface,
or use of Hand Placement Mat for traditional approach Vaults
0.30 Failure to remove Board after mount
0.30 Failure to remove Board / Authorized Spotting Device after a release element
0.30 Using Incorrect Apparatus Specifications – including incorrect spring configuration
0.30 Land UB/BB dismount or FX Acro Salto in Solid or Loose Foam Pit (No VP / SR)
0.50 Starting before Signal given
• Starts before signal given, asked to stop and repeat performance immediately.
• Deduct from repeated performance score.
• See Vault Chapter for specifics on Vault.
1.00 Absence of Music / Music with words / song / speech
1.00 Performance of one-arm Vault: half of vault Panel saw only one-hand touch VT Table

GENERAL / JUDGES - 24
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

VAULT RULES
Timed Warm-Ups
Allowable Vaults Total time per squad
determined by number
No other vaults, other than those listed in each Start Alternative of gymnasts in largest
Additional squad
Division are permitted. Value Springboard
Allowed? Clarifications
(SV) Guaranteed
If another vault is unintentionally performed, it will Warm-Up
Min. # of
Time Per
be a “VOID” vault. Warm-Up
Gymnast
Vaults

1A (SV 4.5) Stretch Jump onto mat

Vault
THEN 9.0 total If a gymnast
Option
1B (SV 4.5) Kick to Handstand (hands Start Value lands in a flat
1
placed on board or mat) fall to flat back. back position
Yes
Vault and then slides 30
Jump to Handstand - fall to flat back on 10.0 Start 1
Option off the end of seconds
mat. (no repulsion required). Value the mat, there is
2
no penalty for a
Mat Minimum: 16” (+1”) fall.
Stack Maximum: 48” (+1”)
Vault
Handspring over the sideways mat 10.0 Start
Option
stack. Value
1 Unfolded panel
¼ -½ (90-180˚) turn on – Repulsion off mat or sting mat
Vault to feet, landing facing mat stack. 10.0 Start may be placed
Option
(Additional twist results in a VOID Value on top of the
2 45
vault.) Yes mat stack 2
seconds
Mat stack sideways.
Minimum: 24” (± 1”) Sting mat may
Mat Maximum: 48” (± 1”) be used on the
Stack Landing Mat: A minimum 6’x12’x4” mat landing mat
must be placed on the floor behind the
mat stack.
10.0 Start
Value Yes
9.5 SV if 9.5 Start 1:00
Gold Xcel Gold Vault Chart
using value if
2
minute
alternative used
springboard

Xcel NO
If used, the 1:30
Platinum Xcel Platinum Vault Chart Platinum vault will be 2
SV Chart minute
VOID.

Xcel NO
If used, the 2:00
Diamond Xcel Diamond Vault Chart Diamond vault will be 3
SV Chart minutes
VOID.

Clarifications applied to ALL Xcel Divisions

(0.50) Spot on landing Guaranteed If the guaranteed number of vaults per gymnast has not
Warm-Up been provided to some of the gymnasts in a squad
(1.00) Spot during any other phase Vault before the time expires, those gymnasts may continue to
Clarification finish their guaranteed number of vaults.
Spotting The Chief Judge must monitor the Vault Fall time.
Fall Time Time Starts: when the gymnast is standing up on her
(1.50) Max. Total Spot deduction
45 Seconds feet after the fall.
Time Stops: when gymnast salutes for her second vault.

VAULT - 1
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

CHAPTER 1: VALUES AND DEDUCTIONS

III. BRONZE DIVISION
B. There are Two Allowable Vaults in this Division.
1. The gymnast may perform the same vault twice or one of each vault, provided the mat stack does not have to
be moved or changed in height by more than 8”.
2. Performance of a restricted vault will result in an event score of “0” (VOID).
3. Spotting deductions apply to all phases of Bronze vaults 1 & 2.

C. Bronze Vaults:
1. Bronze Vault 1: Vault 1A: Stretch Jump onto mat stack; (SV 4.5) THEN Vault 1B: Kick to Handstand, fall to
flat back (SV = 4.5).
a. Gymnast may step back onto board to kick to handstand with hands on mat stack or board.
b. Each part of Vault 1 is evaluated separately and is worth 4.5; total the two scores to arrive at the final score
(max. 9.00).
2. Bronze Vault 2: Jump to Handstand – Fall to Flat Back (SV = 10.0)
a. No repulsion required.

D. Mat Stack: Minimum of 16” (+1”), maximum of 48” (+1”) mat stack.

E. Use of Alternative Trampoline-Like Springboard Apparatus: The Alternative trampoline-like springboard

apparatus and manufactured “Junior” vault board are allowed.

IV. SILVER DIVISION

A. There are Two Allowable Vaults in this Division.
1. The gymnast may perform the same vault twice or one of each vault.
2. Performance of a restricted vault will result in an event score of “0” (VOID).
a. Any vault with more than ¼ twist in 2nd flight phase is a VOID

B. Silver Vaults:
1. Silver Vault 1: Handspring over mat stack
2. Silver Vault 2: ¼-½ (90-180˚) turn on – repulsion off to feet, landing facing the mat stack.

C. Mat Stack:
1. Minimum 24” (+1”), maximum 48” (+1”) mat stack sideways.
2. A mat, minimum 6’x12’x4”, must be placed on the floor behind the mat stack.

D. Use of Alternative Trampoline-Like Springboard Apparatus: The use of the alternative trampoline-like
springboard apparatus is allowed.

V. GOLD / PLATINUM / DIAMOND DIVISION

E. Allowable Vaults: The Vaults listed within the vault chart are allowed as noted.

F. Start Value:
1. Gold Division: All Vaults for Gold Division are Valued at 10.0.
2. Platinum & Diamond Divisions: See Platinum and Diamond Vault Chart for Start Values.

G. Use of Alternative Trampoline-Like Springboard Apparatus:

1. Gold Division: Start Value will be 9.50.
2. Platinum & Diamond Divisions: Not Allowed. If used, the vault will be VOID.

VAULT - 2
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

H. Performance of a Restricted Vault will result in an EVENT score of “0” (VOID).

1. If a Gymnast attempts a Vault listed on the Vault Chart for her Division, but does not complete it, resulting in a
Vault that is not found on the Chart, the Vault is scored “0” (VOID).
a. However, the gymnast does NOT receive a “0” (VOID) as the Final Score for the event if the
other Vault is a legitimate Vault.
2. If either of the two Vaults performed are Vaults that are not allowed at the gymnast’s Division, the gymnast
receives a Final Score of “0” (VOID) for that event, because a Restricted Vault wasperformed.

GOLD, PLATINUM, & DIAMOND DIVISION VAULT CHART

Gold Allowable
Vault Platinum Diamond
Xcel Code # Name of Specific Allowable Vault (9.5 SV if Alternative
(10.0 SV) Start Start
Value Value
Springboard Used)
1.101 Handspring Allowed 9.7 9.4
1.102 Handspring → ½ twist off Allowed 9.9 9.6
1.103 Yamashita Allowed 9.7 9.4
1.104 Yamashita → ½ twist off Allowed 10.0 9.6
1.105 ½ twist on → ½ twist off OR
Allowed 9.9 9.6
¼ twist on → ¾ twist off
¼ twist on → Repulsion (with flight to feet) off OR
1.106 Allowed 9.7 9.4
½ twist on → Repulsion (with flight to feet) off
1.109 ¼ twist on → ¼ twist off - to land facing away from the table Allowed 9.7 9.4
1.201 Handspring → 1/1 twist Allowed 10.0 10.0
1.202 Handspring → 1½ twist 10.0
1.203 Yamashita → 1/1 twist Allowed 10.0 10.0
1.205 ½ twist on → 1½ twist off OR ¼ twist on – 1 ¾ twist off 10.0
1.206 ½ twist on → 1/1 twist off OR ¼ twist on – 1 ¼ twist off Allowed 10.0 9.9
1.207 1/1 twist on → Handspring or Yamashita off Allowed 10.0 10.0
1.208 1/1 twist on → ½ twist off Allowed 10.0 10.0
1.301 Handspring → 2/1 twist off 10.0
1.306 ½ twist on → 2/1 twist off OR ¼ twist on → 2 ¼ twist off 10.0
3.201 Tsukahara → Back Tuck 10.0
3.303 Tsukahara → Back Pike 10.0
3.304 Tsukahara → Back Layout 10.0
4.101 RO, FF on → Repulsion (with flight to feet) off 9.7 9.4
4.102 RO, FF on → Repulsion ½ twist off 9.7 9.6
4.201 RO, FF on → 1/1 twist off 10.0
4.202 1½ twist
RO, FF on → Back Tuckoff (Allen) 10.0
4.203 10.0
4.304 RO, FF on → Back Pike 10.0
4.305 RO, FF on → Back Layout 10.0
5.101 RO, FF ½ on → Handspring 9.6
5.102 RO, FF ½ on → ½ twist off 9.8
5.201 RO, FF ½ on → 1/1 twist off 10.0
5.202 RO, FF ½ on → 1½ twist off 10.0
5.312 RO, FF ½ on → 2/1 twist off 10.0

VAULT - 3
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

I. GENERAL INFORMATION
A. Final Score: Determination for all Divisions
1. The gymnast has the right to perform two (2) Vaults. A total of three (3) attempts allowed (see supplemental
approaches).
2. For ALL Divisions, the Vaults may be the same or different.
3. Each Vault is scored and averaged separately.
4. The better score is counted.

B. Supplemental Approaches: The gymnast is allowed three (3) attempts (running approaches) to successfully
complete one or both Vaults.
1. A Balk: a running approach that results in a fall during the run, stopping mid-run, running off the runway, or
making contact with the springboard or vault apparatus without coming to rest or support on top of the mat stack
or vault table.
a. One balk is allowed in the three attempts without penalty. Any additional balk will be considered a Void
vault.
2. Contact with Hand Placement Mat, Safety Zone Mat, Springboard and/or Mat Stack or Vault Table
a. If the gymnast runs over or touches the Hand Placement Mat, the Safety Zone Mat, or the springboard or
runs into the front of the Mat Stack or Vault Table WITHOUT coming to rest or support on top of the Mat
Stack or Vault Table, it is considered one of the three Vault approaches (a balk) but is NOT considered a
Void Vault.
3. If the gymnast falls during her running approach to the vault, it is considered a balk and is counted as one of the
three Vault approaches.
4. Performance of an Incorrect / Incomplete Vault = VOID
a. Vault #2 for Bronze Division: If the gymnast rebounds from the springboard and comes to rest or support on
her hands on the top of the mat stack without passing through the vertical plane, it is considered a Void
Vault. Example of Void Vault:
1) Gymnast jumps from board to arrive in support on hands on top of mat, then either places her feet on
the mat (or Table) or falls back onto board or runway.
2) Refer to Unusual Judging Situations for an option to perform Bronze Vault 1B, instead of taking a zero
score (Void) on Bronze Vault 2.
b. Silver, Gold, Platinum and Diamond Divisions: If the gymnast rebounds from the springboard and comes to
rest or support on her hands but does not go over the Mat Stack or Vault Table to complete the vault, it is
considered VOID. Examples of Void vault:
1) Gymnast jumps from the board to arrive in support on her hands on the Mat Stack or Vault Table but
fails to invert resulting in her stepping down onto the table or falling down onto the board or the floor.
2) Gymnast’s steps are off on the run, and she cannot slow down her horizontal speed and ends up in a
“belly slide” on top of the Mat Stack or Vault Table.

C. Fourth Attempt is not allowed: Examples for determining final score.

Examples
Vault Attempts Score
a. Attempt #1: Gymnast runs and Balks.
Attempt #2: Gymnast runs and Balks - Considered as first Vault with “0” Gymnast receives score for
(VOID). the one Vault performed.
Attempt #3: Gymnast runs and completes a Vault.
b. Attempt #1: Gymnast runs and completes first Vault
Gymnast receives score of
Attempt #2: Gymnast runs and Balks.
the higher scoring Vault.
Attempt #3: Gymnast runs and completes second Vault.
c. Attempt #1: Gymnast runs, rebounds from board, comes to support on top of
Vault table or Mat Stack without going over Table and completing the Vault -
Gymnast receives a final
Score of “0” (VOID) on first Vault.
score of “0” (VOID). No
Attempt #2: Gymnast runs and Balks.
Fourth Attempt is allowed.
Attempt #3: Gymnast runs and Balks - Considered as second Vault with a “0”
(VOID) score.

VAULT - 4
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

D. Announcement of Intended Vault and Performance of the Wrong Vault:

1. Designate the Vault: Before beginning the approach, the gymnast or coach must announce the name of the
vault or flash the Vault Number on the XCEL Vault Chart for the Specific Division.
a. At meets below State Championships, the coach may announce the vault to be performed instead of
flashing the number.
b. For Gold, Platinum and Diamond Divisions, the Vault Number must be announced or displayed at all State
level and above competitions.
1) Vault numbers may be displayed in various ways. Examples: score flashing unit, whiteboard, or chalk
board.
c. The Chief Judge will signal the gymnast to vault as soon as the intended vault has been flashed or
announced by the coach.
1) Different Vault: No Deduction for performing a Vault that is different than the Vault announced or
displayed, provided it is a Vault allowed at the specific Division of the gymnast.
2) Vault Performed Determines the SV: Not the Vault Number displayed or announced.
3) Body Position: Demonstrated for the majority of the Vault will determine which Vault has been
executed.
d. Performance of a Vault Without a Signal from the Chief Judge
1) Vault is ignored, even if both judges see it.
2) Gymnast has the opportunity to repeat this Vault.
3) The Chief Judge applies a 0.50 penalty to the average of the next completed vault.
4) The penalty may or may not affect the final score. Example:
• Vault 1 - runs/vaults over table without being signaled to start
• Vault 2 - completes a vault, scores 9.0, receives penalty of -0.50 for score of 8.5
• Vault 3 - completes a vault, scores 9.0, which will be her final score.

II. APPARATUS SPECIFICATIONS AND RULINGS

Refer to the current USA Gymnastics Women’s Rules and Policies book. Requirements are subject to change every
competitive year, beginning August 1.

A. Vault Table and Mat Stack:

1. Vault Table and Mat Stack may be used at any manufactured setting up to maximum height specified in the
current USA Gymnastics Women’s Rules and Policies book.
2. Specific mat height restrictions for minimum and maximum height are specified within the respective rules for
Bronze and Silver Divisions.

B. Springboard:
1. Alternative Springboard apparatus / manufactured “Junior” vaulting board may be used at Bronze / Silver
/ Gold Divisions.
a. If used at Platinum or Diamond Division, the vault is considered VOID.
2. Inflatable Rebounding Device: If an inflatable rebounding device is used at ANY Division, the vault is
considered VOID.

C. Tape / Excessive Chalk:

1. Tape/ Excessive Chalk is not permitted on Vault Table
a. For Bronze and Silver Divisions, there is no deduction for Tape or a Chalk Mark placed on the Mat Stack.

D. Hand Placement Mat:

1. Hand Placement Mat may be placed on runway (but not on vaulting board)
a. Platinum and Diamond Division only for Round-off entry vaults.
b. Manufactured Mat must be placed on runway according to manufacturer’s directions (Velcro-side down).
Mat must not exceed two (2) inches in height.
c. Sting mat (or any other type of matting) not allowed on runway.
d. Mat may not be placed on runway as visual aid for Forward-entry Vaults in any Division.
2. Hand Placement Mat slips on runway:

VAULT - 5
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

a. Mat is not considered apparatus / personal equipment failure and not a reason to repeat vault without
penalty.
b. It is the coach’s responsibility to ensure mat is placed properly with Velcro secure.

E. Round-off “Safety Zone” Mat:

1. Round-off “Safety Zone” Mat required:
a. For Platinum and Diamond Division when Round-off Entry Vaults are performed at Xcel competitions.
1) Failure to use Safety Zone Mat, when performing Round-off Entry Vault, “0” (VOID) score.
2) Round-off Entry Vaults, Safety Zone Mat must be placed in proper direction (around the board) or “0”
(VOID) score. Safety Zone Mat designed to protect area between board / vault / sides of board and
must fit snugly against board with no space between board and Safety Zone Mat.
2. “Safety Zone” Mat may also be used:
a. Safety Zone Mat may also be used (but not required) for any other Vault in Xcel Program.
b. Group 1/2/3 Vaults (forward entry with / without turns in pre-flight), Safety Zone Mat may be placed in
either direction behind board and may have space between board and Safety Zone Mat.

F. Combinations of *Skill Cushions (maximum of 9 inches):

1. *Sting mats / *4-inch Throw mats / *8-inch Skill Cushions may be placed on top of allowable competition landing
mats (9 inches).
2. 8-inch thick Skill Cushion must be minimum of 5’ x 10’.
3. Unauthorized type of matting will receive a deduction of 0.30 from Average Score by Chief Judge.

G. Vault Runway must be securely fastened to floor with Athletic tape / Velcro.

H. Athletic Tape or Velcro Strips (NO CHALK) placed across width of vault runway:
1. May not exceed two (2) inches in width.
2. Markings should be removed no later than at end of rotation.

III. COACHING DEDUCTIONS

A. Spotting:
1. Spot the Landing: All Judges take the 0.50 deduction for Spot (assistance) upon Landing. If a fall occurs after
the spot, judges deduct an additional 0.50 for the fall.
2. Spot During the Vault: All Judges take the 1.00 deduction for Spot (assistance) during any other phase.
3. Spot both Vault & Landing: 1.50 maximum total deduction for Spot (assistance) is per Vault.

B. Coach standing between the Board and Vault apparatus:

1. There is NO deduction if the coach, when standing between the board and the vault apparatus, makes contact
with the safety zone mat or inadvertently touches the vault apparatus.
2. For Bronze Vault 2 or Silver Vaults, there is NO deduction if the coach, in the attempt to assist / spot the
gymnast, leans against / bears weight on the Mat Stack.

C. Coaching the Gymnast: The coach may speak to the gymnast between vaults without penalty but may not give
verbal coaching cues during the Vault.

IV. MISCELLANEOUS VAULT RULES / CLARIFICATIONS

A. Arrival on the Vault Table:

1. May occur from a run with forward arrival on the board with both feet.
2. May occur from a run with backward arrival on the board with both feet from a Round-off (Platinum and
Diamond only).
B. Two Hands: All vaults must be performed with support of both hands on the Mat Stack or Vault Table. (Exception:
Deduction for Bronze Division Vault 1A is different; refer to the Bronze Vault deduction table)

VAULT - 6
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

1. If neither hand makes contact with the vault table, the Vault is scored “0” (VOID).
2. The Chief Judge takes the 1.00 deduction from the Average Score for the performance of a one-arm vault, if at
least half of the vault panel saw that only one hand touched the vault table.

C. Insufficient / Late Opening and Total Absence of Extension

1. Opening deduction should reflect body shape prior to landing. Deduction applied according to small, medium,
and large errors. Illustration refers to degree of closure of upper body towards the legs.
2. Example:
a. Gymnast begins to extend or completely extends hips prior to landing, but upon landing cannot maintain
upper body posture and closes upper torso downward toward the legs (compresses), apply up to 0.20
deduction for “incorrect body posture on landing”.
b. Gymnast never opens, lands in a full squat position, and proceeds to fall. Deduct 0.50 for the fall. In
addition, deduct 0.30 for total absence of extension and up to 0.20 for incorrect body posture

D. Landings
1. Feet First Landings: All Vaults in the Silver, Gold, Platinum, and Diamond Divisions must land on the feet first
on the landing mat.
a. Landing on the feet first is defined as “any part of the bottom of the foot touching the mat first.”
b. Any vault that fails to land on the feet first will be scored “0” (VOID).
1) Exception: Silver vaults receive a 2.00 deduction, which includes the 0.50 for a fall.
c. At all sanctioned meets, all Void Vaults should be unofficially scored, but not submitted, unless a video
review is decisive in determining the vault was complete.
2. Landing on the Mat Stack or Vault Table for Gold, Platinum and Diamond Divisions: If the gymnast lands
sitting, standing, or lying on the Mat Stack or Vault Table, the score for that Vault will be “0” (VOID.
a. If Silver gymnast lands in a sitting, lying, or standing position on the top of mat stack after passing through
the vertical plane (handstand), deduct 2.00+ 0.50 for the fall = 2.50.
3. Deep Squat: Squat on landing deduction guideline

E. Whenever a Zero score is one of the counting scores, the allowable score range does NOT apply.

F. Restricted Vaults:
1. If a gymnast attempts a Vault listed on the Vault chart for her Division, resulting in a Vault that is not found on
the chart, the vault is scored “0” (VOID).
2. The gymnast does NOT receive a “0” (VOID) as the Final Score if the second Vault is an Allowable Vault.
3. If either of the two Vaults performed are Vaults that are not allowed at the gymnast’s Division, the gymnast
would receive a Final Score of “0” (VOID), because a Restricted vault was performed.
G. Warm-up Procedures: Vault Touch Warm-up is not regulated by time.
1. Run Back: After presenting to the Judges, gymnasts are allowed one (1) “run-back” from the board before the
Vault attempts are counted.
2. Jump Off: Each gymnast (Silver, Gold, Platinum, Diamond) is allowed to stand on the Mat Stack or Vault Table
and jump off (or salto-Diamond only) one (1) time only, in addition to their specific number of guaranteed Vaults.
VAULT - 7
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

3. Guaranteed Vaults: Each gymnast is guaranteed a specific number of warm-up Vaults, depending upon her
Division.
a. Diamond: gymnasts are guaranteed three (3) Vaults.
b. Silver, Gold and Platinum: gymnasts are guaranteed two (2) Vaults.
c. Bronze: gymnasts are guaranteed one (1) Vault.

H. Vault Clarifications
1. Bronze Division
a. Vault 1
1) (Vault 1A), If the gymnast performs the Straight Jump and fails to land on the bottom of the feet first,
that part of the vault will be scored “0”.
2) (Vault 1B), The gymnast may then continue to perform the kick to handstand, fall to flat back for a
maximum score of 4.50.
b. Vault 2
1) If the gymnast fails to complete the handstand flat back vault and comes to a rest on the floor, board,
or Mat Stack, she may continue to perform Bronze Vault 1B for a maximum score of 4.50.
2. Group 1 (Handspring):
a. Pre-Flight Turns: Vaults may be performed with ¼ (90°) to ½ (180°) LA (long axis) turn.
b. Twisting Directions: In both the First and Second flight phase, the twist may be performed in either direction.
3. Group 3 (Tsukahara Entry):
a. Slight Arm Bend of the Lead Arm: Is allowed for all Group 3 Vaults.
b. Pre-Flight Turn: May be performed with ¼ (90°) to ½ (180°) LA turn in the first flight phase. There is NO
deduction for incomplete turn.

I. Maximum Execution Deduction is 4.00:

1. For Bronze Vault #1, this maximum deduction would be for both parts of the vault 1-A & 1-B combined.
2. Maximum execution deductions apply to Bronze Vault 2, Silver, Gold, Diamond, and Platinum.

J. Courtesy Score:
1. A Courtesy Score of 4.00 may be awarded for unusual circumstances, including injury.
a. This does not apply if a gymnast has earned a “zero” for the vault or the event for balking, Restricted vault
or a landing position (not feet first or on the table).

K. Vault Fall Timing:

1. If a gymnast falls on her first vault attempt and an injury is being assessed, once she is standing on her feet,
she has 45 seconds to salute for the second vault.
2. If the allotted fall time is exceeded, a second vault will not be allowed.
3. The Chief Judge must monitor the Vault Fall time. The watch:
a. Starts when the gymnast is standing up on her feet after the fall.
b. Stops when gymnast salutes for her second vault.
4. Announcing:
a. After 25 seconds have passed, announces “20 seconds remaining”.
b. After 35 seconds have passed, announces "10 seconds remaining”.
c. At 45 seconds, announces “Time”.
5. A second vault is not allowed after “Time” is announced.

V. UNUSUAL JUDGING SITUATIONS

A. Bronze Division - Vault Option 1:
1. Vault 1-A (Part 1): If the gymnast fails to hurdle and do a Stretch Jump onto the Vault apparatus (i.e., runs off
the board and onto the mat or jumps on board and fails to land on feet first on Mat Stack) she would receive a
“0” (VOID) for Part 1 (deduction of 4.50 for Bronze)
2. Vault 1-B (Part 2): The gymnast is still permitted to do the Kick to Handstand, fall to flat back. Her maximum
score would be 4.50.
a. The courtesy score of 4.0 may still be applied in this situation.

VAULT - 8
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

B. Bronze Division - Vault Option 2:

1. If a gymnast attempts Bronze Vault Option #2: Jump to Handstand - Fall to Flat Back, but performs an
incomplete or incorrect vault:
a. instead of taking a 0 score (VOID) on Bronze Vault option #2
b. use that attempt as a VOID for Bronze Vault Option 1A (deduction of 4.50) and perform Vault 1B to achieve
a Score.

Example
Vault Attempts
Gymnast designates intent to perform Vault Option 2 - Handspring onto Mat Stack - to finish in lying position
on flat back and:
Attempt #1: Gymnast runs and Balks.
Attempt #2: Gymnast runs and jumps from board, arrives in 3/4 handstand, and comes back down onto
board.- VOID
Attempt #3: Gymnast jumps to support on hands but comes back down to squat stand on Mat Stack
• Since there is no deduction for calling the wrong vault, gymnast is allowed to perform Part 2 of
Bronze Vault Option # 1 (kick up to handstand-fall to flat back). Her maximum score would be 4.50.
• If she does not continue to perform Vault 1-B, she will receive a zero “0” score for the event.
• This choice to perform Vault 1B would be available to this gymnast in attempt #2 above.

C. At all sanctioned meets, all VOID vaults should be unofficially scored, but not submitted, unless a video
review is decisive in determining the vault was complete.

VAULT - 9
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

CHAPTER 3: DEDUCTIONS
BRONZE VAULT 1A: STRETCH JUMP (SV = 4.5)
Minimum of 16”, maximum 48” (+1”) mat stack
Each 0.30 Additional jumps on the board (double bouncing)
4.50 Runs onto board & steps up onto Mat Stack or rebounds from board to come to rest or support on
(VOID 1A) Mat Stack on body parts other than feet first

Up to 0.50 Lack of height on Stretch Jump

Failure to maintain a stretched body position during jump
Up to 0.50 • Pike
S
t om
tumpfr
retchJ Up to 0.50 • Tuck
Up to 0.30 • Arch
Up to 0.30 Incorrect arm and head alignment
at
oM Up to 0.20 Legs separated
Up to 0.10 Incorrect foot form (flexed/sickled)
Up to 0.50 Failure to land in demi-plié with control and proper body position
oard
B 0.05 Failure to join (slide) heels together on controlled extension of landing with feet a maximum of hip-width
apart
Up to 0.10 Entireof foot/feet slide or lifted off the mat to join on controlled extension of landing with feet a maximum
hip-width apart
to
Up 0.10 Landing with feet staggered (one in front of the other)
0.10 Landing with feet further than hip-width apart
Up to 0.30 Insufficient dynamics (speed/power)
F G 0.50 Fall (onto hands, knees and/or hips) after landing stretch jump on feet first
aults eneral
(CJ) 0.50 Vaults without signal from Chief Judge (CJ deduct 0.50 from Average of next completed Vault)
No deduction 1st Balk
VOID (1A) Performing a 2nd or 3rd Balk
No deduction Tape or Chalk Mark placed on Mat Stack
BRONZE VAULT 1B: KICK TO HANDSTAND, FALL TO FLAT BACK (SV = 4.5)
Gymnast may step back onto board to kick to handstand with hands on mat stack or board.
Each up to Failure to maintain arms next to ears, while reaching for the mat or board
0.20

Each 0.50 Extra Kick-up to Handstand

Up to 0.50 Bent arms

Up to 0.30 Bent legs
Up to 0.20 Legs separated
H
andstand Incorrect alignment in the Handstand
Up to 2.00
0.50
0.30
1.00 • Incorrect shoulder alignment (Showing a shoulder angle less than 180°)
• Pike
• Arch
• Failure to show an inverted vertical position from hands to hips (performing a forward rolling action)
• Failure to contact mat with both hands
Each 0.10 Additional hand placements (taking steps/hops on the hands) Max. 0.30
Up to 0.10 Incorrect foot form
H Up to 1.00 Failure to land in a straight-lying position on the back
Landing andstand
P No deduction If a gymnast lands in a flat-back position and then slides off the end of the mat, there is no penalty for a fall.
ost
She does not get back on the mat stack to complete the vault.

VAULT - 10
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

BRONZE VAULT 2: JUMP TO HANDSTAND – FALL TO FLAT BACK (SV = 10.0)

Minimum of 16”, maximum 48” (+1”) mat stack, no repulsion required.
Each phase up to 0.50
0.30 Failure to maintain a straight body position
• Arch
• Pike
Each phase up to 0.30 Legs bent
Each phase up to 0.20 Legs separated
Each phase up to 0.10 Incorrect foot form (flexed/sickled)
Each phase up to 0.10 Failure to maintain neutral head position
Up to 0.30 Deviation from a straight direction
Up to 0.30 Insufficient dynamics (speed/power)
0.50 Assistance (spot) of coach on the landing
(CJ) 0.50 Vaults without signal from Chief Judge (CJ deduct 0.50 from Average of next Vault)
1.00 Spot during any phase of Vault (Maximum spot deduction = 1.50)
*VOID Run approach which results in gymnast coming to rest or support on top of the mat stack
without execution of the vault
(Example: Rebounds from board, jumps to place hands on mat, does not pass through the vertical
plane and returns to the board or lands on the mat stack between the board and hand placement)
*VOID Performing incorrect vault (i.e., squat on)
No Deduction 1st Balk
*VOID Performing a 2nd or 3rd Balk

No deduction Tape or Chalk Mark placed on Mat Stack

No deduction Coach standing between board and mat stack or leaning against / bearing weight on the Mat
Stack
F F
light irst
See Vault General Faults above

Up to 0.50 Arms bent

2.00 Head contacting mat stack in support phase (includes 0.50 deduction for extreme arm bend)
Up to 0.30 Incorrect shoulder alignment (showing a shoulder angle less than 180°)
Up to 2.00 Failure to show an inverted vertical position from hands to hips (performing a
forward rolling action)
Contacting the mat stack with the hands after vertical
.05 –0.50 • Contact from 1° to 45° past vertical
0.55-1.00 • Contact from 46° to 89° past vertical
Each 0.10 Additional hand placements (taking steps/hops on hands) Max. 0.30
3.00 Failure to contact mat with both hands (performs a salto or touch with only one hand)

Up to 1.00 Failure to land in a straight-lying position on the back

Examples for applying this deduction:
0.50 • Gymnast lands on her feet, salutes, & steps off mat.
1.00
• Gymnast lands on her seat (90° hip angle), salutes & steps off mat.
0.50 • Gymnast lands on her back with an arch & bent legs, salutes, & steps off mat.
Clarification: If the gymnast makes any of the above execution errors, then lies back to a straight-lying position, NO
DEDUCTION for failure to finish in a straight-lying position is taken; however, execution deductions may be applied for the
errors while the gymnast is falling to her back (Post-Handstand Phase).
The evaluation ends when in a straight-lying position.
No deduction If a gymnast lands in a flat-back position and then slides off the end of the mat, there is no penalty
for a fall. She does not get back on the mat stack to complete the vault.

VAULT - 11
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

SILVER DIVISION VAULT DEDUCTIONS

1. Silver Vault 1: Handspring over mat stack or;
2. Silver Vault 2: ¼ - ½ (90-180˚) turn on – repulsion off to feet, landing facing the mat stack.
Minimum 24” (+1”), maximum 48” (+1”) mat stack sideways.
A mat, minimum 6’x12’x4”, must be placed on the floor behind the mat stack.
Up to 0.10 Failure to maintain neutral head position
Up to 0.10 Incorrect foot form (flexed, sickled)
to
Up to 0.30
0.10 Incorrect leg form
0.20
• Legs crossed
• Legs separated
• Knees bent
Failure to maintain stretched body position
Up to 0.50
0.30 • Arch
• Pike
to
Up 0.30 Incomplete LA turn (Option 2 Vault)
Failure to pass through vertical on Option 2 Vault
Up to 0.20
0.10 Poor technique
• Staggered/alternate hand placement on the handspring vault (option 1)
• Failure to maintain neutral head position
• Incorrect shoulder alignment (showing shoulder angle less than 180°)
• Alternate repulsion from hands on the handspring vault (option 1)
Up to 0.50
0.30 Failure to maintain stretched body position
• Arch
• Pike
(Max
Each0.30)
0.10 Additional hand placements (taking steps/hops on hands)

Up to 0.50 Bent arms (90° or more = max. deduction)

• a slight arm bend of the lead arm is allowed on the ¼ - ½ on vault (option 2)
Up to 0.30 Too long in support
(CJ) 1.00 Touch with only one hand on the mat stack
• Chief Judge deduction, if at least ½ of panel sees only ONE hand touch
VOID No hand contact on the mat stack
2.00 Head contacting the mat stack in support phase (includes 0.50 deduction for extreme arm bend)

Up to 0.10 Incorrect foot form (flexed, sickled)

Up to 0.10 Failure to maintain neutral head position
Up to 0.30
0.10 Incorrect leg form
0.20
• Legs crossed
• Legs separated
• Knees bent
Up to 0.50
0.30 Failure to maintain stretched body position
• Arch
• Pike
to
Up 0.20 Brush or hit of body/head on mat stack table during post-flight
Up to 0.30 Incomplete twist (Option 2 Vault)

VAULT - 12
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

SILVER DIVISION VAULT DEDUCTIONS (Continued)

Lands with Feet Apart
There is no deduction for feet a maximum of hip-width apart, provided the heels join (slide) together on the
0.10
0.05 controlled extension.
Lands with feet hip-width apart or closer, but never joins feet (heels) together
Lands with feet further than hip-width apart
Clarifications:
0.10 • If upon landing with the feet apart / staggered the gymnast takes a step(s), deduct only for the step(s).
If the entire foot/feet are sliding or lifting off the floor to join, it is considered a small step.
Up to 0.10 Slight hop, small adjustments of feet or *staggered feet
(Max.
Each0.40)
0.10 Steps (per step)

Up to 0.10 Arm swings to maintain balance

Up to 0.20 Incorrect body posture on landing
Up to 0.20 Additional trunk movements to maintain balance
(Max.
Each0.40)
0.20 Large step or jump (approximately 3 feet or more)

Up to 0.30 Squat on landing (hips even with or lower than knees)

Up to 0.30 Slight brush/touch of 1 or both hands on mat (no support)

Up to 0.30 Deviation from a straight direction (determined by initial contact with mat)
Up to 0.30 Insufficient dynamics (speed/power)
Up to 0.30 Failure to land facing the mat stack (Option 2 Vault)
0.50 Support on the landing mat with 1 or 2 hands
0.50 Fall on mat to knee(s) or hips
0.50 Fall against the mat stack
0.50 + 2.00 = Landing in a sitting, lying, or standing position on top of the mat stack after passing through the vertical
plane (handstand)
(Fall
2.50
on
apparatus)
0.50 Assistance of coach upon landing
0.50 Additional deduction for Fall after assistance by coach
(CJ) 0.50 Vaults without signal from Chief Judge
• CJ deducts 0.50 from average of next completed vault
Failure to land on any part of the bottom of the feet first
the • Vault is scored if gymnast falls, landing on hands and bottoms of feet simultaneously
(includes2.00
fall)
1.00 Spotting assistance during the vault
• (Maximum total Spot deduction not to exceed 1.50)
No deduction 1st Balk-run approach without coming to rest or support on top of mat stack
VOID Performing 2nd or 3rd Balk
VOID Gymnast never achieves vertical and returns to the board/floor or lands on the mat stack between the
board and hand placement (Considered an “incorrect vault”)
VOID Any vault with more than ¼ twist in 2nd flight phase
No deduction Tape or chalk place on the Mat Stack
No deduction Coach standing between board and mat stack or leaning against / bearing weight on the Mat Stack

VAULT - 13
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

GOLD, PLATINUM, AND DIAMOND DIVISION VAULT DEDUCTIONS

Up to 0.10 Incorrect foot form (flexed, sickled)
Up to 0.30
0.20
0.10 Incorrect Leg Form
• Legs crossed
• Legs separated
• Knees bent
Poor Technique
Up to 0.20 • Hip angle
• Arched body
Up to 0.30 Incomplete LA turn
Up to 0.30 Failure to pass through vertical on Vaults with LA turn in pre-flight
Poor Technique
Up to 0.10 • Staggered/alternate hand placement on all vaults, except Diamond Tsukahara vaults
Up to 0.20 • Shoulder angle
Up to 0.20 • Arched body
Up to 0.20 • Alternate repulsion from hands on all vaults, except Diamond Tsukahara vaults
Up to 0.30 Prescribed LA turn begun too early
Each 0.10 Additional hand placements (taking steps/hops on hands) Maximum 0.30
Up to 0.30 Legs bent (in support) or early tuck (Salto vaults)
Up to 0.50 Bent arms (90° or more = max. deduction)
• A slight arm bend of the lead arm is allowed on Tsukahara vaults
Up to 0.50 Angle of Repulsion applies to Non-Salto Vaults only. The angle of repulsion is determined by the angle
created from the hands to the body part that is furthest past vertical.
If the gymnast leaves the Vault Table:
No deduction • By Vertical
0.05 – 0.25 • 1º to 45º past Vertical
0.30 – 0.50 • 46º past Vertical to Horizontal
Up to 0.50 Too long in support
(CJ) 1.00 Touch with only one hand on the vault table
• Chief Judge deduction, if at least ½ of panel sees only ONE hand touch
VOID No hand contact on the vault table
2.00 Head contacting the table in support phase (includes 0.50 deduction for extreme arm bend)
to
Up 0.10 Incorrect foot form (flexed, sickled)
Up to 0.10 Insufficient exactness of LA turn
0.10 Under-rotation of salto vaults
Up to 0.30
0.20
0.10 Incorrect Leg Form
• Legs crossed
• Legs separated
• Knees bent
Up to 0.20 Brush or hit of body/head on vault table during post-flight
Up to 0.30 Insufficient Length
When evaluating length, consider size of the athlete, type of vault, where the hands contact the table and
where the feet land and overall trajectory (amplitude) of the 2nd flight phase; not just the distance from
where the gymnast lands in relation to the end of the vault table.
Up to 0.30 Failure to maintain stretched body (pike down of stretched vaults to facilitate landing)
Up to 0.30 Insufficient exactness of body position:
• Insufficient tuck/pike (tuck = min. 90° bend in hip & knee; pike = min. 90° bend in hips)
• Insufficient stretch (ideal = 180°, but > than 135° is considered stretched position)
• Insufficient stretched position (hip angle 136° - 179°)
• Arch
Up to 0.30 Late completion of the twist
Up to 0.25 Insufficient extension (open) of body before landing (Salto Vaults ONLY)
• Insufficient and/or late extension (tuck & pike vault)
0.30 • Total absence of extension (tuck & pike vault)

Up to 0.50 Insufficient height

VAULT - 14
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

Lands with Feet Apart

There is no deduction for feet a maximum of hip-width apart, provided the heels join (slide) together on the
controlled extension.
0.05 Lands with feet hip-width apart or closer, but never joins feet (heels) together
0.10 Lands with feet further than hip-width apart
Clarifications:
• If upon landing with the feet apart / staggered the gymnast takes a step(s), deduct only for the step(s).
0.10 If the entire foot/feet are sliding or lifting off the floor to join, it is considered a small step.
Up to 0.10 Slight hop, small adjustments of feet or *staggered feet
Each 0.10 Steps (per step)
(Max. 0.40)
Up to 0.10 Arm swings to maintain balance
Up to 0.20 Incorrect body posture on landing
Up to 0.20 Additional trunk movements to maintain balance
(Max.
Each0.40)
0.20 Large step or jump (approximately 3 feet or more)

Up to 0.30 Squat on landing (hips even with or lower than knees)

Up to 0.30 Slight brush/touch of 1 or both hands on mat (no support)

0.15
Up to- 0.20
0.10 Prescribed LA turn incomplete
• 1° -30° missing
• 31° -60° missing
Award
0.25 -0.30
lower • 61° - 89° missing
• 90° or more missing
value
Up to 0.30 Deviation from a straight direction (determined by initial contact with mat)
Up to 0.30 Insufficient dynamics (speed/power)
0.50 Support on the landing mat with 1 or 2 hands
0.50 Fall on mat to knee(s) or hips
0.50 Fall against the apparatus
VOID Landing on top of the Vault Table in a sitting, lying, or standing position
No deduction 1st Balk-run approach without coming to rest or support on top of Table
0.50 Performing 2nd or 3rd Balk
(CJ) 0.50 Vaults without signal from Chief Judge
• CJ deducts 0.50 from average of next completed vault
VOID Failure to land on any part of the bottom of the feet first
• Vault is scored if gymnast falls, landing on hands and bottoms of feet simultaneously
1.00 Spotting assistance during the vault
• Maximum total Spot deduction not to exceed 1.50 (Including all spotting inclusive of spotting assistance on
landing)
0.50 Spotting assistance on landing
Additional deduction for Fall after assistance by coach
VOID Run approach which results in the gymnast coming to rest or support on top of the Vault Table
without execution of the vault
Example: Rebounds from board, places hands on Table, arrives in 3/4 handstand position, loses momentum
and steps down onto Table or falls back onto board.
VOID Failure to use Safety Zone mat for Round-off Entry Vaults
VOID Use of alternative springboard for Platinum and Diamond Divisions (If an alternative springboard is used
in the Gold Division, the Start Value is 9.50.)
No deduction Coach standing between board and Table

VAULT - 15
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

VAULT - 16
 Xcel Code of Points
VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS - 1
Xcel Code of Points
VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS - 2
Xcel Code of Points
VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS - 3
Xcel Code of Points
VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS - 4
Xcel Code of Points
VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS - 5
Xcel Code of Points
VAULT ELEMENTS

VAULT ELEMENTS - 6
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

UNEVEN BARS RULES

Special Requirements (SR) Value Part Difficulty Restrictions Warm-Up
Extra Swing Time
(VP) Restricted Skills Deduction Taken Per
Deduct 0.50 for Each Missing SR Required 0.50 deduction - off SV Gymnast

1. Mount – Low bar only • No “B” or higher VP.

2. Cast (hips must leave bar) (not mount or
Minimum of 4 • No skills on High
dismount) 30
“A” VP Bar. No
3. 360° Circling skill (not mount or dismount) seconds
(0.10 each) • No Salto dismounts.
4. Dismount – Low bar only (no saltos)
• No LB Giants.
1. Mount
2. Cast to a minimum of 45° below horizontal Minimum of 5 • No “B” or higher VP.
(not mount or dismount) 45
“A” VP • No Giants (LB or HB) No
3. 360° Circling skill (not mount or dismount) seconds
(0.10 each) • No Salto dismounts.
4. Dismount - from Low bar or High Bar (no
saltos)
1. A skill finishing in clear support at a • No “C” or higher VP.
minimum of horizontal (not mount /
dismount) Minimum of • B Exceptions:
o No Giants (LB or 1:00
2. 360° Circling skill (not mount or dismount) 6 “A” VP No
3. 2nd 360° Circling skill (not mount or HB) minute
(0.10 each)
dismount), same or different from SR# 2 o No Release Skills
4. Dismount – High Bar with bar change.
Yes
• No “C” or higher VP. Exception: Only one
1. A skill finishing in a clear support above Minimum of
horizontal (not mount or dismount) 6 “A” • Exceptions: Clear (1) tap/underswing
Bkwd to Stalder
Hip HS, HS, counterswing may 1:30
2. 360° Circling skill (not mount or dismount) (0.10 each),
Pike receive an “A” VP and minutes
3.
4. Kip 1 “B” VP be performed without
Dismount – High Bar (0.30) Sole Circle Bkwd to
a 0.30 Extra Swing
HS (All without turn)
deduction.
1. Skill finishing in a clear support at a min. of
45° from vertical (not mount or dismount) Minimum of
2. Minimum “B” 360° Circling Skill 5 “A” • Maximum of one (1)
3. Additional Min. “B” skill - either a Release, (0.10 each), “D” VP allowed (No 2:00
Yes
Turn, or 2nd 360° Circling Skill, same as or 2 “B” VP bonus) minutes
different from SR#2 (0.30 each) • No “E” VP.
4. Salto or Hecht Dismount – High Bar, or any
dismount (minimum “B”) from the high bar
Clarifications
Clarifications applied to ALL Xcel Divisions
Cast Angle: The DP cast angle deductions will not be used in any Division. Fall Time: 45 Seconds
Value Parts: Any skills listed in the Xcel Code of Points and allowed at the respective Division. (Bronze/Silver: Any “A” VP;
Gold/Platinum: Any “A” or “B”; Diamond: Any “A”,”B”,”C” VP & 1 “D”)
Element Clarifications
Skill preceded by a Cast: When a skill is preceded by a cast, both cast & skill may receive separate VP/skill credit, if cast achieves
Division’s angle requirement with the following exceptions:
Exceptions: cast squat, stoop, or straddle on–also with or without jump to HB, cast shoot through, & cast off to stand dismount (bronze
only) receive 1 “A” VP in all Divisions. These skills may not be used to fulfill the cast SR.
Long Hang Pullover: A long hang pullover is considered a 360° circling skill only if preceded by a cast for Platinum & Diamond.

UNEVEN BARS - 1
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

CHAPTER 1: REQUIREMENTS & RESTRICTIONS

I. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

Special Requirements (SR) each worth 0.50.

A. Bronze Division
1. Mount (from LB only)
2. Cast (hips must leave the bar) (not in the mount or dismount)
3. 360° Circling skill (not in the mount or dismount)
4. Dismount (from LB only; No saltos)

B. Silver Division
1. Mount
2. Cast to a minimum of 45° below horizontal (not in the mount or dismount)
3. 360° Circling Skill (not in the mount or dismount)
4. Dismount (from low bar or high bar - No saltos)

C. Gold Division
1. Skill finishing in a clear support at a minimum of horizontal (not in the mount or dismount)
2. 360° Circling Skill (not in the mount or dismount)
3. 2nd 360° Circling skill (not mount or dismount), same or different from SR 2
4. Dismount (from the high bar)

D. Platinum Division
1. Skill finishing in a clear support above horizontal (not in the mount or dismount)
2. 360° Circling Skill (not in the mount or dismount)
3. Kip
4. Dismount (from the high bar)

E. Diamond Division
1. Skill finishing in a clear support at a minimum of 45° from vertical (not in the mount or dismount)
2. Minimum “B” 360° Circling Skill
3. Additional Min. “B” skill - either a Release, Turn, or 2nd 360° Circling Skill, (same as or different from SR#2)
4. Salto or Hecht Dismount (from the high bar), or any dismount (minimum “B”) from the high bar

II. VALUE PART REQUIREMENTS

A. Value part requirements for Xcel are provided in the following chart. Refer to the General/Judges Section for further
clarification on value parts and deductions related to missing value parts.

Value Part Requirement

Bronze 4 “A” VP (0.10 each) 6 “A” VP (0.10 each)
(0.10 each) Platinum
Silver 5 “A” VP 1 “B” VP (0.30 each)
Gold 6 “A” VP (0.10 each) 5 “A” VP (0.10 each)
Diamond
2 “B” VP (0.30 each)

UNEVEN BARS - 2
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

III. SPECIAL REQUIREMENT CLARIFICATIONS

A. Clarifications applied to ALL Divisions
1. Skill preceded by a cast:
a. When a skill is preceded by a cast, both the cast and skill receive separate VP/skill credit.
1) Exceptions:
• These skills may not be used to fulfill the cast/clear support angle special requirement and
receive one (1) “A” Value Part in ALL Divisions.
(i) Cast squat, stoop, or straddle on
(ii) Cast shoot through
(iii) Cast off to stand (An element for Bronze only).
• A mount or dismount may not be used to fulfill the cast /clear support angle special
requirement.
2. Cast/Clear Support Special Requirement Angle:
a. SR credit will be awarded for the cast/clear support angle within 10° of the Division’s specified angle. A
deduction of 0.10 will be applied for amplitude will be applied for 1-10° below the requirement.
1) 11° or more below the requirement will not receive SR credit. No angle deduction will apply.
b. The Development Program (DP) cast angle deductions will not be used in any Division.
3. Restricted Skills: Restricted skills receive a deduction of 0.50 each and do not receive VP or SR credit.
a. Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, not based on the
quality/amplitude of the performance.
4. More than one Special Requirement may be fulfilled by one Skill/Value Part element, unless otherwise
specified.

B. Clarifications applied to Specific Xcel Divisions

CLARIFICATION BY DIVISION
1. The same 360° circling skill, if performed more than one time, may be used to fulfill SR #2
and #3.
Gold
2. No giants are allowed (LB or HB).
3. No release skills with a bar change are allowed.
1. A long hang pullover is considered a 360° circling skill only if preceded by a cast.
2. Clear hip circle to handstand, back stalder to handstand and pike sole circle to handstand
Platinum receive “B” VP credit (All without turn).
3. One (1) tap or underswing - counterswing is allowed for VP credit. Any others will incur an
extra swing deduction.
1. The same minimum “B" 360° circling skill, if performed more than one time, may be used to
fulfill SR #2 and #3.
2. A long hang pullover is considered a 360° circling skill only if preceded by a cast.
Diamond
3. Any tap or underswing - counterswing will receive an extra swing deduction.
4. Two SRs may be fulfilled with one skill, unless stated otherwise. – Example - A cast to
handstand with 1/2 (180˚) turn fulfills SR #1 and #3.

IV. DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS

A. Restricted Elements: Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points not
based on the quality/amplitude of the performance.

B. If a restricted element is performed: (All Divisions)

1. Deduct 0.50 from SV
2. Do not award Value Part credit
3. The element cannot be used to fulfill Special Requirements
4. All appropriate execution and amplitude deductions would be applied to all elements, whether or not they
receive Value Part credit.

UNEVEN BARS - 3
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS BY DIVISION

Division Restrictions
Only allowable “A” elements are allowed.
• The following “A” VPs are NOT Allowed in the Bronze Division:
o LB Giants
Bronze
o Salto Dismounts
o Skills on the high bar
• “B” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed.
Only allowable “A” elements are allowed.
• The following “A” VPs are NOT Allowed in the Silver Division:
Silver o LB Giants
o Salto Dismounts
• “B” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed.
Only “A” elements, and allowable “B” elements are allowed.
• The following “B” VPs are NOT allowed in the Gold Division:
Gold o Giants (LB or HB)
o Release moves with bar change
• “C” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed.
Only “A” and “B” VP elements are allowed.
• “C” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed.
o Exceptions: The following “C” circle skills are allowed, receive “B” value and may fulfill
Platinum Special Requirement:
▪ Clear Hip Handstand (no turn) #3.304
▪ Stalder backward to Handstand (no turn) #6.304
▪ Pike Sole Circle backward to Handstand (no turn) #7.309
Only “A”, “B”, “C” and one (1) “D” VP elements are allowed. No bonus is awarded for a “D”
Diamond element.
• “E” VP elements and/or more than one “D” VP elements are NOT allowed.

UNEVEN BARS - 4
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

V. ROUTINE EXAMPLES

The following provides sample bar routines for each Division. The Value part (VP) and Special Requirement (SR) is
provided for each routine element as applicable.

• In some instances, there are multiple elements within the routine which may fulfill one special requirement. The first
element to fulfill the special requirement is noted with the special requirement.

BRONZE – ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Pullover (LB) 1.003a A SR1
Cast (Hips leave bar) 2.001 A SR2 • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
1 Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR3 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Underswing clear to stand (dismount • Start Value - 10.0
8.101 A SR4
from LB)
Jump to Front Support (LB) 1.001 A SR1
Front Hip Circle 7.101 A SR3
Cast (Hips leave bar) • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
2.001 A SR2
2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Cast to Squat on 2.102 A
• Start Value - 10.0
From squat position on LB - Stretch jump
8.004 A SR4
off to stand
Single leg jam kip (from glide or run) 1.006 A SR1
Stride Circle backwards 7.004 A SR3
Single leg swing backward 7.001 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
3 Cast (Hips leave bar) 2.001 A SR2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Cast straddle on 2.102 A • Start Value - 10.0
Underswing dismount from LB (Sole
8.101 A SR4
circle)
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
to
Glide swing stand 1.004 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR2
Jump to Front Support 1.001 A SR1 and SR3
1 • Meet Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” VP
¾ forward circle to stand 8.002 A SR4 • Start Value – 8.9 (0.50 for each missing SR, 0.10
for missing “A” VP)
Single leg jam kip (from glide or run) 1.006 A SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 2
Stride Circle backwards 7.004 A SR3 – Cast requirement cannot be in the mount or
2 Single leg cut backward 7.002 A dismount
• Meet Value Parts – Yes
Cast off to stand dismount 8.001 A SR4
• Start Value –9.5 (0.50 for missing SR)
to
Jump clear support, immediate back
1.109 A SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 3.
hip circle - 360 circling element cannot be in mount or
Cast shoot thru 2.002 A dismount. Missing SR2 – The cast shoot through
Single leg basket swing backward 7.003 A may not be used to meet SR2 – See Special
3
Single leg swing backward 7.001 A requirement clarifications (Bars Chapter 1, III.
Cast to Squat on 2.102 A Special Requirement Clarifications - Letter A.)
From squat position on LB - Stretch jump • Meet Value Parts – Yes
8.004 A SR4 • Start Value – 9.00 (0.50 for each missing SR)
off to stand

UNEVEN BARS - 5
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

SILVER - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Glide swing to stand (LB) 1.004 A SR1
Pullover to front support (LB) 1.003a A
Cast (to 45° below horizontal) • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
2.001 A SR2
1 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR3
• Start Value - 10.0
Underswing clear to stand (dismount
8.101 A SR4
from LB)
Pullover (LB) 1.003a A SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Cast (to 50° below horizontal) 2.001 A SR2 (SR2 is met because the cast can be within 10° of
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR3 the specified cast angle and receive SR credit and
2. Cast to Squat, jump to high bar 2.102 A VP credit. An amplitude deduction of 0.10 will be
Tap Swing, Counter Swing 2.003 A applied - not taken from start value.)
Tap swing ½ turn dismount • Meet Value Parts – Yes
8.005 A SR4 • Start Value - 10.0
Single leg jam kip (from glide or run) (LB) 1.006 A SR1
Stride Circle backwards 7.004 A SR3 • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Single leg swing backward 7.001 A The cast angle exceeds the minimum
3 Cast (to horizontal) 2.001 A SR2 requirements of silver for SR2.
Cast straddle on 2.102 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Underswing dismount from LB with toes • Start Value - 10.0
8.101 A SR4
on in a straddle position (Sole circle)
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Pullover to front support (LB) 1.003a A SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 2
Cast shoot through 2.002 A – The cast shoot through may not be used to meet
Stride Circle forward 7.004 A SR3 SR2 – See Special requirement clarifications
1 Single leg cut forward 7.002 A (Bars Chapter 1, III. Special Requirement
¾ back seat circle dismount (piked) Clarifications - Letter A.)
8.003 A SR4 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
• Start Value – 9.5 (0.50 for missing SR)
Single leg jam kip (from glide or run) (LB) 1.006 A SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 2
Stride Circle backwards 7.004 A SR3 – The cast to squat may not be used to meet SR2
Single leg swing backward 7.001 A – See Special requirement clarifications (Bars
2 Cast squat on 2.102 A Chapter 1, IV. Special Requirement Clarifications -
Underswing dismount from LB with toes Letter A. 1. b.) within the next section.
on in a pike position (Pike sole circle) 8.101 A SR4 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
• Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Cast (to 45°
Pullover (LB)below horizontal) 1.003a A SR1
• Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 3
2.001 A SR2
– No 360° Circling Skill
3 Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
• Meet Value Parts – Yes
Tap Swing, counter swing 2.003 A
• Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Tap swing fwd with ½ turn dismount 8.005 A SR4

UNEVEN BARS - 6
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

GOLD - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Glide swing to stand (LB) 1.004 A
Pullover 1.003a A
Cast (to horizontal) 2.001 A SR1
• Meet Special Requirements- Yes
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2
1 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR3
• Start Value - 10.0
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
Tap Swing, Counter Swing 2.003 A
Tap swing ½ turn dismount 8.005 A SR4
Pullover (LB) 1.003a A
Cast (to horizontal) 2.001 A SR1
• Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Clear hip circle to clear support (ending 3.204 B SR2
Should the clear hip circle element end in clear
below horizontal)
support at horizontal it may have also been used
Glide kip 1.101 A
2. to fulfill SR2.
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes, the “B” element may
Long Hang
Cast (to 30°Pullover
below horizontal) 7.005 A SR3 also be used to fulfill a lower VP if needed
Not an • Start Value - 10.0
element
Fly away (tucked) 8.103 A SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Cast (to 5° below horizontal) 2.001 A (SR1 is met because the cast can be within 10° of
SR1
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2
the specified angle and receive SR credit and VP
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A credit. An amplitude deduction of 0.10 will be
3 Long Hang Pullover 7.005 A
SR3 applied - not taken from start value.) (SR3 - A long
hang pullover from the low bar is considered a
Underswing (clear support) dismount to 8.101 A
SR4
circling skill for Gold.)
stand (from HB)
• Meet Value Parts – Yes
• Start Value - 10.0
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Pullover (LB) 1.003a A
Cast (to 25° below horizontal) Not an
element
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2
Cast (to 15° below horizontal) Not an • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 1.
element • Meet Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” element
1
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A • Start Value – 9.40 (0.50 for each missing SR,
Long hang pullover 7.005 A SR3 0.10 for missing “A”)
Cast (to 30° below horizontal) Not an
element
Underswing (clear support) dismount to
stand (on HB) 8.101 A SR4

Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A

Cast (to horizontal) 2.001 A SR1
• Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 3
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2
2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
• Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Tap Swing, Counter Swing 2.003 A
Tap swing ½ turn dismount 8.005 A SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A
Cast to Squat, jump to high bar 2.102 A
Cast (to
Long 15°Kip
Hang below horizontal) 1.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR1
Not an and SR3
3 element • Meet Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” elements
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2 • Start Value – 8.90 (0.50 for each missing SR,
Cast (to 30° below horizontal) Not an 0.10 for missing “A”)
element
Fly away (tucked) 8.103 A SR4

UNEVEN BARS - 7
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

PLATINUM - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A SR3
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A • All Special Requirements- Yes
1 Cast (above horizontal) 2.001 A SR1 • All Value Parts – Yes
Long hang pullover (from clear support) 4.102 A SR2 • Start Value - 10.0
Tap Swing, Counter Swing 2.003 A
Fly away (tucked) with 180° twist 8.203 B SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A SR3 • All Special Requirements – Yes
Cast (above horizontal) 2.001 A SR1 All Value Parts – Yes, the clear hip circle for
Clear hip circle to handstand 3.304 B SR2 Platinum receives “B” VP credit. The glide kip as
Glide kip 1.101 A a mount is considered a different element from a
2. to to
Cast Squat, jump high bar 2.102 A glide kip within the exercise. Therefore, the kips
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A within the exercise may both be counted as “A”
Cast (above horizontal) VP.
2.001 A
• Start Value - 10.0
Underswing, Counter Swing 2.003 A
Fly away (layout) 8.103 A SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A SR3
Cast (to above horizontal) 2.001 A SR1
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2
• All Special Requirements – Yes
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
3 • All Value Parts – Yes
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A
Cast (to above horizontal) • Start Value - 10.0
2.001 A
Toe on Underswing (clear support) with 1
8.201 B SR4
½ twist dismount to stand
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Glide Kip (LB) 1.101 A SR3
Not an
Cast (to 25° below horizontal) element
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR2
Not an
• All Special Requirements – No, missing SR1
Cast (to 15° below horizontal) element • All Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” and 1 “B”
1 element
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
• Start Value – 9.10 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.10 for
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A missing “A”, 0.30 for missing “B”)
Not an
Cast (to 30° below horizontal) element
Underswing (clear support) dismount to
8.101 A SR4
stand (from HB)
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A SR3
Cast (to above horizontal) 2.001 A SR1
• All Special Requirements – Yes
Back Hip Circle 7.101 A SR3
2 • All Value Parts – No, missing “B” element
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
• Start Value – 9.7 (0.30 for missing “B”)
Tap Swing, Counter Swing 2.003 A
Fly away (tuck) 8.103 A SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A SR3
Cast (to above horizontal) 2.001 A SR1
• All Special Requirements – No, missing SR2
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A
• All Value Parts – No, missing 2 “A” elements
3 Long Hang Kip 1.101 A
• Start Value – 9.30 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.10 for
Not an
Cast (below horizontal) each missing “A”)
element
Fly away (layout) with 360° twist 8.203 B SR4

UNEVEN BARS - 8
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

DIAMOND - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A
Cast to handstand 2.201 B SR1
Clear hip circle to handstand 3.304 C SR2
• All Special Requirements- Yes
Underswing (pike sole circle) on LB,
• All Value Parts – Yes, higher VP may be
1 release and counter movement forward 7.310 C SR3
used to fulfill lower VP
in flight to hang on HB
• Start Value - 10.0
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A
Cast (to 45° above horizontal) 2.001 A
Fly away (layout) 8.103 A SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A
Not an
Cast (to horizontal) element
SR1 &
Clear hip circle to 45° from vertical 3.204 B
SR2
Glide kip 1.101 A • All Special Requirements – Yes
2. All Value Parts – Yes
Cast to Squat, jump to high bar 2.102 A
• Start Value - 10.0
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A
Not an
Cast (to 30° above horizontal) element
Backward giant 4.202 B SR3
Fly away (layout) 8.103 A SR4
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A
Cast to Squat on, jump to high bar 2.102 A • All Special Requirements – No, missing SR3
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A • All Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” element
1
Cast (to handstand) 2.201 B SR1 • Start Value – 9.40 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.10
Backward giant 4.202 B SR2 for missing “A”)
Tuck double fly away 8.304 C SR4
Glide kip (LB) 1.101 A • All Special Requirements – Yes
Cast (to handstand) full pirouette SR1 & • All Value Parts – Yes
2.401 D
SR3 • Restricted Element VP- Only (1) “D” VP
Glide kip 1.101 A element is allowed, the 2nd “D” element does
to to
Cast Squat, jump high bar 2.102 A not receive VP credit and not used to fulfill SR
Cast (to handstand)
Long Hang Kip 1.101 A • Start Value – 9.50 SV (Deduct 0.50 from Start
2 Value for restricted element)
2.201 B
Clear hip circle to handstand 3.304 C SR2
No value
Back giant with full pirouette Restricted
(2nd “D”)
Fly away (layout) with 360° twist 8.203 B SR4

UNEVEN BARS - 9
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

I. RECOGNITION (COUNTING) OF VALUE PARTS (VP)

A. Uneven Bar Skills
1. Any Uneven Bar Skill listed in the Xcel Code of Points may receive VP credit two (2) times in an exercise,
provided that the element occurs in a different connection (i.e., preceded or followed by a different element).
Any skill that is listed in the Xcel Code of Points is given the value that is listed, even if it is different than the
value listed in the DP Code of Points.
2. If an element is performed that cannot be specifically found in the Xcel Code of Points, the Judge may award
comparable Value Part credit if they can recognize the “root” element.
3. Any new element not listed in Xcel Code of Points;
a. Must be evaluated by the Regional Technical Committee Chair and the Regional Xcel Committee Chair.
b. Element Evaluation Forms can be found on the [Link] website in the Forms section under
Women.
c. A copy of this evaluation must be presented to the Meet Referee or Chief Judge prior to the competition to
insure proper awarding of difficulty.
d. Evaluations will be valid for one current Xcel quadrennium (Xcel quadrennium begins August 1 two years
following the Summer Olympics and ends four years later on July 31) and will be posted on the Regional
websites.
4. If the same element is performed a third time, or is performed a second time in the exact same connection:
a. The VP credit is not awarded.
b. All applicable execution and amplitude deductions are applied.
c. It cannot be used to fulfill SR. An element must receive VP credit to fulfill SR.
d. Exception: VP credit can be awarded for an element that is performed for the third time, if it was not
previously awarded VP credit because the element:
1) Lacked completion the first or second time it was performed, or
2) Was performed in the exact same connection the second time it was performed.
Example
• Pullover (A), Cast (A), Back Hip Circle (A), Cast (A), Back Hip
Circle (No VP-exact same connection),Cast (No VP), Back Hip
Circle (A), Underswing Dismount (A)

B. Elements Considered Different: In the following instance, elements will be considered different for the counting of
VP:
1. If they have a different number in the Xcel Code of Points.
2. If they have the same number in the Xcel Code of Points, but meet the following criteria:
a. If Mount elements are performed as elements within the exercise.
b. If the element is performed with different degrees of turn (½, 1/1, 1½).
c. If the support is on one or both arms.
d. If saltos are performed with different body positions.
e. If the legs are together or straddled in saltos.
Examples of Elements Considered Different for the Counting of VP
Criteria Example
If they have the same number - If • 1.101 Glide kip mount and;
Mount elements are performed as
• Glide kip on the LB (for example out of a clear hip)
elements within the exercise
• #4.303 Giant circle backward to Handstand with ½ turn and;
If the element is performed with
different degrees of turn (½, 1/1, 1½). • #4.303 Giant circle backward to Handstand with ½ - ½ turn
in different directions.
If the support is on one or both arms. • Giant circle backward and;
• Giant circle backward on one arm

UNEVEN BARS - 10
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

C. Elements Considered the Same: In the following instance, elements listed under the same number will be
considered the same:
1. If the elements finish with a different grip position.
2. If the elements are performed with legs together or separated (not to include saltos)
Examples of Elements Considered the Same for the Counting of VP
Criteria Example
• #2.301 Cast handstand with ½ turn in handstand and Cast to
handstand with ½ turn in handstand to L-grip are considered
If the elements finish with a different
the same element.
grip position.
• Finishing in a different grip does not make an element
different ((Unless listed as a different number in the code)
• #5.302 Giant circle forward with legs straddled with ½ turn
and Giant circle forward with legs together and ½ turn are
If the elements are performed with legs considered the same element.
together or separated (not to include • Cast to handstand with legs together or cast to handstand
saltos) with legs straddled are considered the same element.
• A Glide kip with legs straddled or together are considered
the same element

D. If a swing forward or backward reaches the handstand phase (within 20° of vertical), it will be considered a
separate element. (i.e., Backward Giant, Forward Giant)

E. Awarding VP Credit When a fall occurs while performing a Release Element Consider:
1. During the performance of a release, the gymnast grasps or touches the bar with one or two hands and then
falls:
a. VP is awarded
b. Execution and amplitude errors are taken in addition to the fall.
c. SR will be fulfilled, if applicable.
2. During the performance of a release element, the gymnast’s hand(s) never grasps or touches the bar:
a. Element is considered incomplete; therefore, VP credit is not awarded.
b. Execution and amplitude errors are taken in addition to the fall.
c. The element cannot be used to fulfill Special Requirements.
d. The gymnast may repeat the element. If performed successfully, VP credit is awarded, as well as SR credit,
if applicable.

F. Awarding VP credit when a fall occurs while performing dismount element:

1. If the gymnast lands on the hands and bottoms of the feet simultaneously, award VP credit and deduct 0.50 for
the fall.
2. If the gymnast falls on the dismount without landing on the bottom of the feet first, Value Part credit is not
awarded, and a 0.50 deduction is taken for missing the dismount SR.
3. Fall on a Salto dismount without landing on the bottom of the feet first for Gold, Platinum and Diamond
Divisions:
a. Do NOT award Value Part credit and deduct 0.50 for the Fall
b. If salto was initiated, do not take additional 0.30 for No dismount.
c. If salto was NOT initiated, deduct an additional 0.30 from Start Value for No dismount.

G. Required Technique for the Recognition of VPs

1. Evaluating angle of the body
a. If there is a shoulder angle, look at the line from the shoulders through the mid-point of the lowest body part.
b. When there is no shoulder angle (such as the ending of a clear hip circle nearing handstand phase), look at
the line from the hands through the mid-point of the lowest body part.
c. In the case of casts and back uprises with straddled legs, the angle of completion is determined when the
hips are extended and/or legs are joined.
d. If hips are extended, but the legs are not fully together at the peak of the cast or uprise, a deduction for leg
separation is applied.

UNEVEN BARS - 11
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

2. Casts/Skills finishing in clear support: Refer to Bars Chapter 3: Deductions for further information related to
angle deductions and value part credit for casts and skills ending in a clear support.
a. Angle Requirements: (within 10° of the requirement will receive VP/SR credit)
1) Bronze: Cast, No angle requirement, hips must leave bar (not mount or dismount)
2) Silver: Cast to a minimum of 45° below horizontal (not mount or dismount)
3) Gold: Horizontal requirement - Skill finishing in a clear support at a minimum of horizontal (not in the
mount or dismount)
4) Platinum: Above Horizontal requirement - Skill finishing in a clear support above horizontal (not in the
mount or dismount)
5) Diamond: 45° from Vertical or Above requirement - Skill finishing in a clear support at a minimum of
45° from vertical (not in the mount or dismount)
b. A cast within 10° of the requirement will receive VP/SR credit.
1) A 0.10 deduction will be applied for amplitude for 1-10° below the requirement.
2) 11° or more below the requirement will not receive VP/SR. No angle deduction will apply.
c. DP Cast Angle Deductions will NOT be used in any Division

3. Counting Casts for VP Credit

a. When a skill is preceded by a cast, both the cast and the skill receive separate VP credit.
1) Exceptions: The following will count as one (1) “A” VP:
• Cast squat, stoop, or straddle on – with or without jump to HB
• Cast shoot through (Bronze, Silver, Gold)
• Cast off to stand dismount (Bronze Only)

UNEVEN BARS - 12
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

4. Uprises to Handstand (#2.303)

a. The uprise skill includes the tap swing forward to counter swing (or underswing to counterswing) to initiate
the uprise.
b. Back Uprise to handstand must be completed to within 20° of vertical to receive “C” VP credit. If the
handstand finished within 11° to 20°, deduct 0.05. (Diamond Only)
c. When an attempt at a Back Uprise to Handstand fails to finish within 20° of vertical and:
1) The gymnast is able to create a closed shoulder angle, finishing in a clear support, recognize it as a
Back Uprise to clear support (#2.203) and award “B” VP credit.
2) If the Back Uprise to clear support (#2.203) is directly connected to a Group 3, 6 or 7 circling element,
award one or two skills, to the benefit of the gymnast.
3) If the body finishes in a clear support but below horizontal, an up to 0.20 deduction for insufficient
amplitude would be applied.
4) If, from the clear support, the gymnast pulls the hips to the high bar and performs either an immediate
cast or a back hip circle followed by a cast, a 0.30 deduction is applied for an Extra Swing/Cast for the
Platinum and Diamond Divisions.
5) If the gymnast does not show a closed shoulder angle, (pulling the shoulders in over the high bar to a
clear support) do not award VP credit, since there is no such element listed in the Xcel Code of
Points.
5. Elements with Flight arriving in support (not in handstand) on the Low Bar (#2.205, 3.203, 3.303, 4.204,
4.304, & 5.303)
a. The up to 0.20 insufficient amplitude deduction is used to evaluate the height of the release over the low
bar, not necessarily the angle of arrival.
b. Elements from a counterswing or forward giant swing on the HB, straddle (or pike) with flight backward over
low bar to grasp LB:
1) Proper technique is to catch LB in an extended body position from shoulders to hips; however, it is
acceptable to maintain a pike in the hips.
c. Underswing, clear hip circle or long swing elements on HB with ½ (180°) turn and flight over LB to grasp LB:
1) Proper technique is to catch in an extended body position (shoulders to feet) at horizontal or above for
no deduction for insufficient amplitude.
2) Once both hands contact the LB, the element is considered complete and VP credit is awarded
6. Elements with Flight arriving in Handstand on Low Bar
a. The handstand position on low bar must finish within 20° of vertical to receive the higher VP credit. If the
release element does not finish within 10° of vertical, but is within 20°, deduct 0.05.
b. If it finishes at 21° or more from vertical, recognize it as the lower valued element.
1) Example: a counterswing to straddle back to handstand on low bar (“C” - #2.305), but arrives at a 30°
angle upon making hand contact on the low bar (award “B” for straddle back to grasp low bar
(#2.205).
2) No deduction for insufficient amplitude would be applied.
7. Circles to Handstand and Circles/Swings to Handstand
(Circles: Clear Hip, Stalder, Pike Sole Circle, Clear Pike Sole Circle, Weiler Kip, etc.)

a. If the handstand position is achieved within 20° of vertical, award the VP as listed in the Xcel Code of
Points.
1) Deduct 0.05 if the handstand is between 11° to 20° of vertical (Diamond Division Only).
2) No angle deduction in Platinum Division, when higher VP is a “C” because they can only receive
credit for “B” VP Circles.
3) Deduct 0.50 for a restricted element. Exceptions: Clear Hip to handstand, Stalder backward to
handstand and Pike sole circle backward to handstand (All with no turn) are allowable “C’s.”
b. If the angle achieved is between 21° - 45° of vertical, award the lower VP (if applicable) as listed in the Xcel
Code of Points.
1) No deduction for insufficient handstand angle would be applied.
• Example: Gymnast performs a Clear Hip Circle backward, finishing at 45° from vertical. Award “B”
VP credit for a Clear Hip Circle backward. No deduction for insufficient amplitude would be
applied at any Division.
c. If the circle finishes below 45° from vertical, award the same lower VP as in (b.) above (if applicable) and:
1) Deduct Up to 0.20 for insufficient amplitude:
• A “rule of thumb” is to take the full 0.20 if the body is at 90° (Horizontal) or below.
2) Exception: “B” Clear hip circle (#3.204): deduct Up to 0.40 for insufficient amplitude.
UNEVEN BARS - 13
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

• These deductions apply ONLY to Platinum and Diamond Divisions. Gold Division has NO
amplitude deductions for clear hip circles.
• 0° - 10° from vertical – No deduction (Restricted Skill at Gold)
• 11° -20° from vertical – 0.05 for Diamond Division ONLY (Restricted Skill at Gold)
• 21° - 45° from vertical – No deduction
• 46°- 89° from vertical - 0.05 -0.25. Do not deduct for a restricted element in Gold Division.
• at Horizontal (90°) - 0.30
• Below Horizontal - 0.35 - 0.40
3) If the hips contact the bar, it is considered a back hip circle and receives “A” VP (#7.101). It will not
meet the SR of a 360° “B” circling element for the Diamond Division.
4) Circle or Circle/Swing elements that do not finish within 20° of vertical on the upswing are considered
incomplete elements and no VP credit is awarded.
• Any Circle element (Clear Hip, Stalder, Pike Sole Circle, etc.) that does not pass over the bar, but
finishes short of 20° from vertical and falls off.
(i) No VP credit awarded + 0.50 for a fall.
8. Circle/Swings: Backward (#4.202) and Forward Giants (#5.302)
a. The Backward/Forward Giant Circle must be completed to within 20° of vertical in order to receive the “B”
VP credit as listed in the Xcel Code of Points.
1) Even if the starting position is not in handstand, VP credit will be awarded, if the element is completed
to within 20° of vertical.
2) If the Backward giant circle does not reach 20° and falls = No VP credit awarded; deduct 0.50 for fall.
3) If a Front Giant Circle is not completed to within 20° of vertical, no VP credit is awarded (a ¾ Front
Giant circle is not listed as an element).
• A ¾ front giant has a hop-grip change and continues with exercise = no VP credit awarded.
9. Tap Swing or Underswing - Counterswings: (Considered the same skill)
a. Bronze Division: Gymnasts are not allowed to perform skills on the high bar.
b. Silver and Gold Divisions:
1) Two (2) Tap swings or Underswing - Counterswings are allowed for “A” VP credit provided they are in
different connections.
2) A third Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswing would not receive VP credit
3) All Tap swings or Underswing - Counterswings are subject to execution deductions.
4) Do not deduct for an extra swing.
c. Platinum Division:
1) One Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswing may be used for “A” VP credit.
2) Any subsequent Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswings will receive an extra swing deduction of
0.30 with a maximum deduction of 0.50 for multiple extra swings following an element.
3) All Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswings are subject to execution deductions.
d. Diamond Division:
1) Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswing is not a VP at Diamond Division.
2) All Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswings will receive an extra swing deduction of 0.30 with a
maximum deduction of 0.50 for multiple extra swings following an element.
• Exception: Tap swing – counterswing performed prior to salto forward dismount (front fly away) =
no deduction for extra swing.
3) All Tap swing or Underswing - Counterswings are subject to execution deductions.
10. Casts, Uprises, and Circle Elements performed with ½ (180°) turn on the Upswing – to Descend on the
Same Side of the bar
a. In order to receive the value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, a Cast, Back uprise, or Circle element
must first reach within 20° of vertical on the upswing.
b. The timing of the initiation of the turn is irrelevant as long as the long swing/circle is completed to within 20°
of vertical.
c. If the element never swings/circles up into the handstand phase (within 20° of vertical), but still completes a
½ (180°) turn, the value will be based on the value of the root skill.
d. Depending upon the angle of completion of the turn, deductions for late completion may be appropriate.

UNEVEN BARS - 14
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

Examples
Example Value
Clear hip circle backward with ½ (180°) turn performed prior to reaching handstand “A” (#3.102) for the Root
phase element

Back Giant swings up to within 21°- 44° from vertical with ½ (180°) turn
If the forward upswing finishes at horizontal to 45° from vertical “A” (#4.101)
If the swing finishes below horizontal, even if a ½ (180°) turn is completed. No VP credit is awarded
Cast to 21°- 45° from vertical with ½ (180°) turn (descends on same side of bar) “A” (#2.101)
If the cast finishes more than 45° from vertical, even if a ½ (180°) turn is completed No VP credit is awarded
Front Giant to 21° or more from vertical with ½ (180°) turn No Value

11. Elements with Hop-Grip change to Handstand

a. In order for elements with Hop-Grip change to Handstand to receive VP credit as listed in the Xcel Code of
Points, the Hop-Grip change MUST:
1) Show a simultaneous release of the bar with both hands
2) Finish in a different grip (mixed, reverse, mixed-L, L, etc.)
3) Occur as the body is ascending (that is, on the upswing)
4) Be completed by vertical, provided that the circle/cast/swing reaches within 20° of vertical with hips
extended
b. If any or all of the above requisites are missing, the element is not recognized as an element with a hop-grip
change, and therefore:
1) Receives the value of the root skill (if applicable)
2) Cannot fulfill the “Flight” SR for the Diamond Division
c. The Hop-Grip change, as well as the Handstand position (with hips extended), must be completed to within
20° of vertical to receive VP credit.
1) If the hop-grip change to handstand is incomplete (that is, the gymnast is unable to continue over the
top of the bar), the VP credit listed may be awarded provided that the upswing is to within 20° of
vertical and the requirements listed in 10.a. are fulfilled.
2) If the Hop-Grip change occurs on the upswing, but the element lacks enough swing to achieve a
position within 20° of vertical, then the element is considered incomplete and VP credit is not
awarded. Examples:
• Gymnast casts and hops to reverse grip on the way up but does not swing to within 20° of vertical
and falls from the bar. No VP credit is awarded.
• Gymnast performs a clear hip circle and hops on the upswing but the body does not swing to
within 20° of vertical. No VP credit is awarded
3) If the cast (or any forward circling element) is performed with legs straddled and hips bent, the hop
grip change must be completed before or by vertical, showing a handstand position with extended
hips and legs closed.
• If the legs are separated throughout or close after vertical, but the hips are extended through the
handstand position, deduct up to 0.20 for leg separation.
• If the handstand position with extended hips is never achieved, it will retain the value of the root
skill, if applicable and will not meet the requirement of a “flight” element.
d. If the Hop-Grip change occurs after the handstand position is achieved; that is, on the descending
(downswing) phase, it will retain the value of the root skill and will not meet the requirement of a “flight”
element.
1) Example: Gymnast performs a cast to handstand, and as the body passes through vertical over the
bar and begins the descent phase, the hands hop simultaneously to a reverse grip. Award “B” for cast
to handstand.
e. If an element with a Hop-Grip change also has an LA (longitudinal axis) turn, the hop-grip change to a
different grip must be completed prior to the initiation of the turn to be considered a flight element.

UNEVEN BARS - 15
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

12. Twisting Salto Dismounts

a. Incomplete LA (longitudinal axis) twist:
1) If 1° - 44° of the twist are missing, deduct 0.05 – 0.10
2) If 45° - 89° of the twist are missing, deduct 0.15–0.20
3) If 90° or more of the twist is missing, award VP credit for
the element performed, as listed in the Xcel Code of
Points.
4) Example: Gymnast attempts a 1½ twisting flyaway
dismount (C) and is missing 90° of the twist.
• Award “B” VP credit for a 1/1 twisting flyaway
dismount.
• Deductions for balance, execution and amplitude
errors are also applied.
5) Clarification regarding the completion of Twists: Once the feet land on the floor at the finish of the
salto, it is considered complete. Appropriate VP credit is awarded for the degree of twist completed at
the moment the feet land on the floor. The placement of the front foot is decisive for the awarding of
the VP credit.

H. Selected Individual Element Requirements

1. #4.202 Backward Giants (B)
a. Accelerated giant circles backward into a release element or dismount are technically acceptable. This type
of giant uses a “hollow arch” technique and produces an “elliptical” shape rather than a symmetrical circle. It
is not required to pass through a stretched vertical position. However, execution errors such as bent
arms/legs are unacceptable and will be deducted.
b. If a backward giant is performed with a splitting of the legs through vertical, then placing the feet alternately
on the bar to initiate an underswing type element, there is no deduction. This is considered an acceptable
technique to accomplish a late toe-on.
2. Low Bar Giants:
a. It is permissible to bend the knees as the body circles under the low bar; however, the legs must begin to
straighten as soon as possible and must be completely straight and body stretched by vertical.
b. All Giant circles performed on the low bar with extended body/legs throughout will receive the same value
as the corresponding giant circle performed on the high bar.
3. #3.301, #6.305, #7.310, #7.313 - Circle elements with release from Low Bar to High Bar and Counter movement
forward in flight
a. This type of release element must also show balance between height and rotation. Look for good height
with hips rising, approaching the level of the high bar and hips/legs rotating backward.
b. Deduct up to 0.10 for under-rotation if, upon catching the bar, the hips/legs do not continue to rotate
backward to a fully extended, stretched position.
4. #2.205 & #5.303 - Counterswing to Straddle or Pike Back over Low Bar (B) & from a Forward Giant Circle,
Straddle or Pike Back over Low Bar (C)
a. The element must show good flight (distance between the hips and the low bar) to a hand grasp on the low
bar.
1) When the catch occurs, the body should be in an extended position from shoulders to hips, but it is
acceptable to maintain a pike in the hips. This is an exception to the principle for determining the
angle by the line from the shoulders through hips and feet.
2) The feet may be placed on the bar for a sole circle or “toe on” action after flight and hand grasp. If feet
hit the low bar first, or hands and feet hit simultaneously, then it is recognized as an “A” element.
3) If the feet contact the floor on the glide (following the grasp of the low bar in the Straddle Back), apply
the appropriate execution deductions on the glide kip, but award the appropriate VP credit for the
Straddle Back.
4) If the hand grasp and foot contact on the mat occur simultaneously, the deduction will be applied to
the flight element, not the glide.
b. Note: Principles 2, 3, and 4 above would apply to any element that transfers from high bar to low bar and
are followed by a glide kip.
5. #3.203, #3.303, #4.204, & #4.304 - Underswing or Long Swing with ½ (180°) Turn and Flight over LB to
handstand on LB
a. The element must show good flight (distance between the hips and the low bar) to a hand grasp on the low
bar.
UNEVEN BARS - 16
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

1) When the catch occurs, the body should be in an extended position (from shoulders to feet) at
horizontal or above for no deduction for insufficient amplitude.
2) Once the hands contact the bar, the element is considered complete.
3) See #4 regarding contacting the bar or mat with the feet.
6. #3.207 Weiler Kip (B)
a. Ideally, the Weiler Kip should be performed in reverse grip (undergrip), starting from a near handstand
position. It usually follows a front giant or a cast to handstand with hop-grip change. It should demonstrate
the reverse circling pattern of a clear hip circle to handstand.
b. It is acceptable for the mid-to-lower thighs to touch the bar on the ascending phase of the circle. The Weiler
Kip should not resemble a kip, cast handstand, which allows for the upper thighs, hips, and abdomen to
contact the bar.
c. The inherent difficulty in performing the Weiler Kip is the “dropping in” phase from a handstand. If the
element prior to the initiation of the Weiler Kip does not achieve handstand phase (within 20° of vertical),
then that element will not receive the VP credit as listed in the Xcel Code of Points.
d. If the Weiler Kip does circle to within 20° of vertical, it is element #3.407-Weiler Kip to handstand and is only
allowed at the Diamond Division.
7. #6.204 Stalder Circle Backward and #7.209 Pike Sole Circle Backward (B’s)
a. The “B” Stalder Circle Backward and Pike Sole Circle Backward to clear support do not require an open hip
angle at the completion but should show an opening of the shoulder angle on the upward part of the circle.
1) Consider the line from the shoulders to the hips, when evaluating the amplitude of the body. This is an
exception to the principle for determining the angle by the line from the shoulders through hips and
feet.
2) #6.104 Clear Straddle Circle Backward to clear support is an “A” element and is described as a
straddle seat circle to straddle “L” position, with no opening of the shoulder angle.
8. Flyaway dismounts: All flyaway dismounts must be initiated from the High Bar in order to receive VP credit.
9. 3/4 Forward Circle to Stand Dismount - Bronze only (in addition to the up to 0.30 deduction for bent legs)

3/4 Forward Circle to Stand Dismount (Bronze only)

Landing Position Deduction
Feet land behind the bar No deduction
Feet land under the bar 0.10
Feet land in front of the bar 0.20

II. APPARATUS SPECIFICATIONS

Refer to the current USA Gymnastics Women’s Rules and Policies book. Requirements are subject to change every
competitive year, beginning August 1.

A. Height of Bar measured from floor to top of rail:

1. Measurement not based on length of upright, but actual distance from rail to floor, using a plumb line.
2. 0.30 deduction for competing on apparatus using incorrect specifications.
3. Chief Judge must take deduction from Average Score before next Gymnast begins.

B. Combinations of *Skill Cushions (maximum of 9 inches):

1. *Sting mats / *4-inch Throw mats / *8-inch Skill Cushions may be placed on top of allowable Competition
Landing Mats (9 inches) in two separate areas (under Bars / Dismount area.)
2. 8-inch thick Skill Cushion must be minimum of 5’ x 10’.
3. 4-inch throw mat (Skill Cushion) placed on Competition Landing Mat(s) for Dismount purposes may have an up
to 8-inch Skill Cushion placed on top for protection on a Release Element and must be removed immediately
after release element performed.
4. An alternate skill cushion made of softer foam (Manufactured “Pit Pillow”) is allowed at invitationals but is
REQUIRED to be provided at Xcel State meet and above for the Diamond Division athletes who wish to use it
when performing a “C” or higher release move. The mat must be a minimum of 4 ft. x 6 ft. and eight (8) inches.
It may be used for bar releases ONLY (to be placed under the gymnast during the release and immediately
removed). It is NOT allowed for dismounts or landing on any event.
5. Unauthorized type of matting will receive a deduction of 0.30 from Average Score by Chief Judge.

UNEVEN BARS - 17
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

6. Conversions – Inches to Centimeters: Approx. ¾ inch = 2 cm.

Conversion of Inches to Centimeters

(1 in. = 2.54 cm.)
Inches Centimeters
Approx. ¾ inch 2 cm.
4 inches 10 cm.
8 inches 20 cm.
9 inches 24 cm.

C. Matting Regulations for Mounts

1. Mounts without use of board / other mounting apparatus:
a. May stand on one (1) 12 cm / 20 cm mat or two (2) 12 cm Competition Landing Mats, with / without 1½ inch
base mat (unfolded panel mat).
b. May stand on additional up to 8-inch of mats (Sting mats / 4-inch Throw mats / 8-inch Skill Cushions) placed
on Competition Landing Mat(s).
2. Mounting Apparatus:
a. May be placed on one (1) 12 cm / 20 cm mat or two (2) 12 cm Competition Landing Mats, with / without 1½
inch base mat (unfolded panel mat). Panel mat be placed under / on top of Competition Landing Mat.
b. May be placed on top of Sting mat / 4-inch Throw mat that is placed on Competition Landing Mats.
c. Plywood not permitted underneath mounting apparatus.
d. For all Divisions, a Mount trainer/mount mat MAY be placed on an 8-inch skill cushion.
1) A springboard may NOT be placed on an 8-inch skill cushion.
e. Must be removed as soon as possible after mount is completed.
1) Chief Judge deducts 0.30 from Average Score, if mounting apparatus placed on unauthorized surface
(e.g., 8-inch Skill Cushion / floor / plywood).
f. Mounting Apparatus – Exception for Bronze / Silver / Gold Divisions:
1) Any combination of competition Landing Mats, Skill Cushions and Panel Mats may be used to
facilitate the Mount on the low bar.
2) A Mount trainer/mount mat, folded panel mat or padded spotting/skill block may be placed on top of
the Competition Landing Mats (CLMs) and skill cushions used for the purpose of mounting.
• A springboard MAY be used on any combination of Competition Landing Mats, sting mats
or 4-inch skill cushions (throw mat), but a springboard is NOT allowed directly on an 8-inch
skill cushion.
• Inflatable rebounding device cannot be used for mounting purposes.
Example
Mount with glide swing, then back hip pullover:
May stand on panel mat / spotting block / mount mat / board placed on above specified
matting to initiate jump into glide swing. Mat / Board must be removed as soon as possible
after jump into glide swing.

D. Warm-up Regulations
1. Only one (1) Gymnast at a time allowed on Bars during any warm-up (general / open, timed or 30-second touch)

III. ATTIRE REGULATIONS

A. Hip or Heel Padding: Hip or heel padding is not allowed. The Chief Judge deducts 0.20 from the average score if
hip/heel padding is used.
1. If the Chief Judge notices the heel/hip pads prior to the gymnast’s mount, a warning must be given. However, if
the gymnast wears the heel/hip pads during her exercise (whether or not the Chief Judge warned her
previously), the deduction must be taken.

UNEVEN BARS - 18
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

B. Bandages, Hand/Wrist Guards, etc. are allowed, but must be securely fastened. A broken or completely torn
handgrip will be treated as equipment failure and the gymnast has the right to repeat the exercise or continue from
the point of interruption.
1. Bandages, etc. that become loose or unfastened do not constitute equipment failure; therefore, no repetition of
the exercise is allowed.

C. Appropriate attire for gymnasts is found in the Rules and Policies Chapter one, section two. The deduction for
incorrect attire is 0.20, taken at the next event after the warning has been issued.

IV. TIMING REGULATIONS

A. Touch Warm-Up (When required by meet format)
1. The gymnast is allowed a 30-second touch warm-up time.
a. Setting of the bars and/or board is not included in the 30-second touch warm-up time.
b. A warning will be called with 10 seconds remaining. Time will be called at 30 seconds.
c. If the gymnast continues to warm-up after a warning is issued, the Chief Judge deducts 0.20 from the
average score.
1) Note: If the gymnast is preparing for a skill, allow her to complete the skill.
2. Immediately prior to performing the exercise, the gymnast may run and jump onto the board and briefly touch
the bars without penalty.
a. The deduction for exceeding the warm-up time 0.20 would be taken by the Chief Judge only in the instance
that the gymnast actually practices an element.

B. Timing of Fall
1. The gymnast is allowed 45 seconds to re-mount the bar after a fall.
2. If the gymnast does not re-mount within 45 seconds, the exercise is terminated.
a. The fall time begins when the gymnast stands back up on her feet.
b. The 45-second fall period stops when the gymnast leaves the floor to re-mount in preparation to resume her
routine
3. While off the apparatus following a fall and once the gymnast is standing on her feet, a warning will be
communicated at:
a. The Timer gives notification of “20 seconds remaining” and “10 seconds remaining” in the Fall Time.
b. “Time” is called at 45 seconds.

V. BAR FALL REGULATIONS

A. The gymnast may chalk up and adjust her grips during the fall time, but she may not go outside of the
competition area.

B. During the fall, the coach may speak to the gymnast without penalty. Once the gymnast remounts, the coach
may not give verbal assistance without penalty.

C. If the gymnast falls from the apparatus and does not re-mount to finish the exercise with a dismount element:
1. Deduct 0.50 for the fall.
2. Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for the missing Dismount Special Requirement.
3. Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for No Dismount.
4. Deduct for any other missing Special Requirements.
5. Deduct for VPs missing, if applicable.
6. A Courtesy Score of 4.0 may be awarded for an extremely short routine, due to injury or unusual circumstances.
Common sense should prevail.

D. After a fall, the gymnast is allowed to jump (or be lifted) to the low bar or high bar.
1. Maximum of 2 pump swings to initiate momentum to resume the exercise without penalty.
2. If more than two pump swings are taken, a 0.30 deduction would be applied to the third and to the fourth pump
(extra) swing(s). (Applies to Platinum and Diamond only.)
3. The maximum deduction for consecutive extra swings is 0.50.
4. If the gymnast jumps or is lifted to the high bar, the coach may push the gymnast to initiate her swing without
penalty.

UNEVEN BARS - 19
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

E. Judging Resumes: After a fall from the bars, judging resumes with the performance of an element that is listed in
the Xcel Code of Points.
1. If, after a fall, the gymnast re-mounts with a glide kip, then stops in a front support to crawl up to stand on the
low bar, take 0.10 for lack of continuity.

F. Cast Squat On fall backwards: If, when executing a cast-squat on, the gymnast falls backward, but stays on the
bars to continue with a glide kip, do NOT consider it a fall. Apply applicable execution deductions, such as bent
arms/legs, touch of mat with feet, etc.

VI. SPOTTING REGULATIONS

A. If the coach assists/spots the gymnast during an element:
1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. If the gymnast falls after the spot, an additional 0.50 deduction is taken for the fall.
3. No VP credit awarded.
4. No SR credit awarded.
5. If the spot occurs on the dismount element, even though it receives no VP credit, do not deduct 0.30 from the
Start Value for no dismount.

B. If the coach spots the gymnast upon landing of the dismount:

1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. If the gymnast falls after the spot, an additional 0.50 is taken for the fall.
3. VP credit is awarded.
4. SR credit is awarded.

C. If the coach inadvertently touches the gymnast without assisting:

1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. VP credit is awarded.
3. SR credit is awarded.

D. If the coach catches a falling gymnast, do not deduct for the spot; deduct 0.50 for the fall ONLY.

E. There is no penalty if the gymnast inadvertently touches the coach.

F. When a raised surface is necessary for spotting release moves: It is recommended that a spotting block or
folded mat be used; however, there is no penalty for the coach standing on the mounting apparatus, provided that
the mounting apparatus (or spotting device) is removed immediately after the release move is performed.
1. If the spotting device is not removed, the Chief Judge takes a deduction of 0.30 from the Average Score.
2. The coach may not use chairs or other items that are not produced by a gymnastics supply company to stand
on for spotting purposes.
a. A warning should be given. If the coach continues to use an inappropriate item to stand on, then a 0.30
deduction for use of unauthorized equipment should be taken.

G. The coach may stand between the bars during the entire exercise without penalty.
1. Clarification: At all USA Gymnastics sanctioned events, a spotting block or folded mat that is used for spotting
purposes between the bars may remain in place as long as the coach continues to utilize it during the routine.

H. There is no penalty for the coach leaning on or touching the bars while spotting (without touching the
gymnast).

UNEVEN BARS - 20
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

VII. MOUNT AND DISMOUNT REGULATIONS

A. Mounts
1. See Bar Chapter 2, II. Apparatus Specifications for specific information on allowable matting for mounts.
2. The Board, Mount Trainer Mat or Panel Mat must be removed as soon as possible after the gymnast has
mounted. An inflatable rebounding device cannot be used for mounting purposes.
3. Mount Attempts
a. The gymnast may have two attempts to mount the bars without penalty, provided that she has not touched
the board and/or bars or run underneath the bars on either attempt. Such an attempt without mounting is
considered a “balk.”
b. If the gymnast balks two times, she may take one more approach; however, on the third attempt, each judge
takes a 0.50 deduction.
c. A Fourth Approach is not permitted

Examples
Mount Attempts Deduction
a. Attempt #1: Runs, balks, no mount performed
No Deduction
Attempt #2: Run, mount performed
b. Attempt #1: Run, balk, no mount performed
Attempt #2: Run, balk, no mount performed Each judge deducts 0.50 for third approach.
Attempt #3: Runs, performs a mount
c. Attempt #1: Run, balk, no mount performed
Each judge deducts 0.50 for third approach. A
Attempt #2: Run, balk, no mount performed
fourth attempt is not allowed, gymnast must
Attempt #3: Run, balk, no mount performed
climb onto UB to begin exercise.
A fourth attempt is not allowed.

d. If the gymnast runs and touches the board and/or bars or runs underneath the bars without mounting, a
0.50 deduction is applied (considered a fall).
1) It is acceptable for the gymnast to walk/run under the bar to mount with a jump to the high bar from
between the bars.
e. If, in the attempt to perform a Round-off entry mount, the gymnast performs only the Round-off, she may
repeat the mount and receive appropriate VP credit. A 0.50 deduction for a fall will be applied, since contact
was made with the board, which is considered part of the apparatus.
4. If the gymnast mounts the bars and realizes that the setting is incorrect, she may dismount the bars and has 45
seconds to re-adjust the bars. This is treated as a FALL from the apparatus and receives a deduction of 0.50.
5. Mounts that are preceded by one element prior to take-off from the board will be allowed.
a. Only the movements done after the feet leave the board will be evaluated.
b. If more than one element before the mount is performed, each judge takes a 0.20 deduction.
6. For Bronze, Silver and Gold Divisions:
a. The gymnast may perform a mount with one or two elements (two-part mount). The maximum number of
elements allowed is two (2).
1) If a third element is performed, the third element will not receive VP credit and will receive execution
deductions.
2) Clarification:
• If a mount element is performed (as listed under Group 1 Mounts in the Table of Elements) then the
athlete would receive SR credit for a mount (based on Division rules as applicable).
• If two glides are performed (without foot touching between glides), it is considered one element.

Example
Acceptable two-part Mount
Element #1: Glide swing to stand
Element #2: Pullover
b. If the gymnast performs a mount with two parts, she must maintain hand contact on the bar between the two
parts.
1) Example: Glide swing mount followed by a pullover or jump to clear support.
• Failure to maintain hand contact will incur a 0.10 deduction for poor rhythm between the two parts
of the mount.
UNEVEN BARS - 21
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

B. Dismounts
1. Unless otherwise stated, dismounts may be performed from the Low Bar.
a. All Salto must be performed from the High Bar to receive VP credit.
2. All “A”, “B”, and “C” Flyaway Dismounts will retain their difficulty value regardless of starting position.
Appropriate body position must be maintained in order to retain the VP credit, as listed in the Xcel Code of
Points.
3. If a gymnast performs a dismount element from the Xcel Code of Points that does not meet Division criteria:
a. Deduct 0.50 for missing the Dismount Special Requirement.
b. Do not deduct 0.30 for no dismount.
4. If the gymnast performs a Dismount element of No Value – one that is not listed the Xcel Code of Points or
performs a restricted element for the Division:
a. Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the dismount SR.
b. Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for no dismount.
c. Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value if the dismount performed is a restricted element for the Division.
5. If the gymnast leaves the apparatus (terminates the exercise early, intentionally or due to a fall):
a. Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the dismount SR.
b. Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for no dismount.
c. Deduct 0.50 for the fall from the apparatus, with or without an actual fall onto the mat.
d. A Courtesy Score of 4.0 may be awarded for an extremely short routine due to injury or unusual
circumstances. No routine will be awarded less than 4.0. Common sense should prevail.
6. Falls on a Salto Dismount (Gold / Platinum / Diamond Divisions):
a. If the gymnast never initiates the salto action, and falls without landing on the bottom of the feet first:
1) No VP credit awarded for the dismount.
2) Deduct for any missing value parts, if appropriate, from the Start Value.
3) Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the dismount SR.
4) Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for no dismount.
5) Deduct 0.50 for the fall.
6) Deduct for any other execution/amplitude errors.
b. If the gymnast initiates the salto action and falls without landing on the bottom of the feet first,
1) No VP credit awarded for the dismount.
2) Deduct for any missing value parts, if appropriate, from the Start Value.
3) Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the dismount SR.
4) Deduct 0.50 for the fall.
5) Deduct for any other execution/amplitude errors.
7. Dismounts initiated from the feet are not allowed unless specifically listed in the Xcel Code of Points.

CHAPTER 3: DEDUCTIONS
I. COMPOSITION DEDUCTIONS
A. Composition deductions are not applied in the Xcel Program.

B. Emphasis is on the performance of allowable skills, not the routine construction.

II. THIRD RUN APPROACH (0.50)

III. GRASP APPARATUS TO AVOID A FALL (0.30)

IV. INTERMEDIATE (EXTRA) SWING

A. Definition: The momentum of the element is stopped, and the gymnast must swing forward and backward to restart
her routine.

UNEVEN BARS - 22
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

B. Deduction: This deduction is only applied at Platinum and Diamond Divisions - 0.30
1. The maximum deduction for more than one extra swing following an element is 0.50.
2. If after an intermediate (extra) swing(s) is taken, the athlete jumps down from the bars, apply only the deduction
of 0.50 for the fall.

C. Successive (Multiple) Casts: before or after a skill/VP

1. Bronze, Silver and Gold Divisions: No extra swing deductions are taken.
a. Two casts are allowed for “A” VP credit, provided they are in different connections and meet the angle
requirements to count as an “A”.
b. A third cast would not receive VP credit.
c. All casts are subject to execution deductions.
d. Do not deduct for an extra swing.
e. An up to 0.10 deduction may possibly be applied for poor rhythm in connections.

2. Platinum and Diamond Divisions:

a. Each extra swing is a 0.30 deduction with a maximum deduction of 0.50 for multiple extra swings following
an element.
b. If a gymnast performs an “A” or “B” cast that meets the Special Requirement amplitude for that Division but
then returns to a front support, it still receives a 0.30 extra swing/cast deduction.
1) Example: Platinum – cast above horizontal, cast squat on is an intermediate swing.

D. Tap Swing-Counterswing or Underswing - Counterswings: (Considered the same skill)

1. Emphasis:
a. Underswing: During the underswing, the emphasis is straight arms and legs and straight hollow body
position and a neutral head. The completion of the underswing should show an open arm angle.
b. Counterswing: At the high point of the counterswing the chest should be hollow with a rounded hip angle
body position. The head remains neutral, and the legs remain together.
c. Tap swing: The tap swing should show a slight arch at the bottom of the tap swing through vertical (under
the bar) and kick legs forward-upward with the legs together with a good hollow body position on the
forward swing.
d. Counterswing: At the high point of the counterswing the chest should be hollow with a rounded hip angle
body position. The head remains neutral, and the legs remain together.
TAP SWING-COUNTERSWING OR UNDERSWING-COUNTERSWING
All Tap swing - Counterswing or Underswing - Counterswing are subject to execution deductions.
Allowed as a Value Number Allowed for Subsequent Tap Swing-Counterswing or
Division
Part “A” VP Underswing - Counterswing
Bronze No, not allowed to
perform skills on N/A N/A
high bar
Two (2) are allowed A third will not receive VP Credit
Silver Yes provided they are in different
connections. Do not deduct for extra swing

Two (2) are allowed A third will not receive VP Credit

Gold Yes provided they are in different
connections. Do not deduct for extra swing

Any subsequent Tap swing - Counterswing or

One (1) may be used for “A” Underswing - Counterswing will receive an
Platinum Yes VP credit. extra swing deduction of 0.30 with a maximum
deduction of 0.50 for multiple extra swings
following an element.
N/A - All Tap swing - Counterswing or Underswing - Counterswing will receive
No, not a VP in
Diamond an extra swing deduction of 0.30 with a maximum deduction of 0.50 for multiple
Diamond
extra swings following an element.

UNEVEN BARS - 23
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

V. AMPLITUDE
A. Elements used to fulfill the Angle Special Requirement
1. Casts

CASTS
Angle
Division Cast Height Amplitude Deduction VP/SR
Requirement
No angle 0° - 20° from Vertical RESTRICTED Do not award VP/SR
requirement, Hips off the bar - 21° from Vertical No amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
Bronze
hips must
Hips remain on bar as legs swing No amplitude deduction Do not award VP/SR
leave bar
0° -20° from Vertical RESTRICTED Do not award VP/SR
Minimum 45°
below 45° Below horizontal - 21° from Vertical No amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
Silver
horizontal 46° - 55° from horizontal 0.10 amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
requirement
56° or more Below horizontal No amplitude deduction Do not award VP/SR
0° - 20° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “B” VP/SR
Horizontal 21° - 90° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
Gold
requirement 1° -10° Below horizontal 0.10 amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
11° or more below horizontal No amplitude deduction Do not award VP/SR
0° -20° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “B” VP/SR
Above 21° - 89° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
Platinum Horizontal
Horizontal - 9° Below horizontal 0.10 amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
requirement
10° Below horizontal No amplitude deduction Do not award VP/SR
45° from 0° to 20° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “B” VP/SR
Vertical or 21° to 45° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
Diamond Above
requirement 46° to 55° from vertical 0.10 amplitude deduction Award “A” VP/SR
More than 55° from vertical No amplitude deduction Do not award VP/SR
UNEVEN BARS - 24
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

2. Clear Support:
a. Elements in clear support must be within 10° of the specified angle requirement for the respective Division to
receive SR credit.
1) Clear support elements that are 1° - 10° below specified angle requirement will receive a 0.10 deduction for
insufficient amplitude related to the Special Requirement.
2) In addition, any Amplitude and Value Part would be applied to the specific element as applicable (as specified
within the Amplitude section that follows).

B. Amplitude of flights to handstand on low bar (Applies to Diamond Division Only)

Amplitude of Flights to Handstand on Low Bar (Applies to Diamond Division Only)

Angle Requirement Amplitude Deduction Value Part
0° - 10° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award higher VP
11° -20° from vertical 0.05 amplitude deduction Award higher VP
21° or more from vertical No amplitude deduction Award lower VP

C. Amplitude of Circling Elements

1. Amplitude deductions of circling elements are specified by clear hips and all other circling elements within the
chart below.
2. Clear Hip Circle (Only):
a. Clear hip circles receive either “B” or “C” VP credit, depending upon the degree from vertical achieved once
the hands shift to the top of the bar.
b. The following deductions for Insufficient Amplitude apply ONLY to Platinum and Diamond Divisions.
1) Gold Division has NO amplitude deductions for clear hip circles.

Amplitude of Circling Elements

Angle Amplitude Deduction Value Part
Circling 0° - 10° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award higher VP
Elements 11° -20° from vertical 0.05 amplitude deduction* Award higher VP
(excluding 21° - 45° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award lower VP
More than 45° from vertical to
Up 0.20 amplitude deduction Award lower VP
Clear Hip *No angle deduction in Platinum Division, when higher VP is a “C”, because they can only receive
Circle) credit for “B” VP Circles. Deduct 0.50 for a “restricted” element. Exception: Clear Hip- to Handstand.

Clear Hip 0° -10° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “C” VP

11° -20° from vertical 0.05 amplitude deduction^ Award “C” VP
Circle
21° - 45° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award “B” VP
46° - 89° from vertical 0.05 – 0.25 amplitude deduction Award “B” VP
(Platinum Horizontal 0.30 amplitude deduction Award “B” VP
& Below horizontal 0.35 -0.40 amplitude deduction Award “B” VP
Diamond ^At the Platinum Division, no amplitude deductions are applied from 45° to Vertical because gymnasts
ONLY) receive only “B” credit for any clear hip circle, regardless of whether it achieves handstand phase or not.

D. Amplitude of Body at Turn Completion

1. For all elements that require a Turn in handstand phase:
a. The angle of completion is determined when the second hand re-grasps the bar. This applies to:
1) All elements with a 180° turn (regardless of technique or grip)
• Examples: Cast Handstand with ½ turn; Clear Hip Circle to Handstand with ½ turn
2) Any element with 360° turn in handstand phase that is not performed on one arm (regular pirouettes;
not using a Healy technique):
• Example: Back giant on LB with 1/1 turn
2. For all Handstand elements with a 1/1 (360°) Turn AFTER handstand and all 1½ Pirouettes. This applies to:
a. All elements that include a 1/1 turn completed on one arm (after handstand phase) in the descent phase
(Healy technique)
b. Any element with 1½ (540°) turn or more (using ANY turn technique)
UNEVEN BARS - 25
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

Amplitude of Body at Turn Completion

Angle of Completion Amplitude Deduction Value Part
Turn In Handstand 0° - 20° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award VP
21° -30° from vertical 0.05 -0.10 amplitude deduction Award VP
Phase 31° - 45° from vertical 0.15-0.20 amplitude deduction Award VP
More than 45° from vertical 0.25 -0.30 amplitude deduction Award VP
Up to 30° from vertical No amplitude deduction Award VP
Turn After 31° - 45° from vertical 0.05 -0.15 amplitude deduction Award VP
Handstand Phase More than 45° from vertical 0.20 -0.30 amplitude deduction Award VP

E. Insufficient Amplitude of Uneven Bar Elements

1. Insufficient Amplitude on Elements (Including Releases) - Each Up to 0.20
a. Exceptions:
1) “B” Clear hip circle Up to 0.40
• Apply ONLY to Platinum and Diamond Divisions.
• Gold Division has NO amplitude deductions for clear hip circles.
• Clear Hip to 0° - 20° from vertical is a Restricted Skill at Gold.
2) Height of salto dismounts Up to 0.30
3) Refer to the General faults and penalties

UNEVEN BARS - 26
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

VI. BAR DEDUCTIONS

BAR FAULTS
• Execution deductions CANNOT exceed 4.0. This includes falls but does not include spot deductions.
• Courtesy Score of 4.0 may be awarded for an extremely short routine due to injury or unusual
circumstances.
• No routine will be awarded less than 4.0. Common sense should prevail.
each time 0.05 Flexed/sickled feet on Value Part or Skill elements
each up to 0.10 Under-rotation of release/flight elements
each up to 0.10 Insufficient extension of glides/swings into kips
each up to 0.10 Poor rhythm in elements/connections
each up to 0.10 Hesitation during jump to HB or swing to handstand
each up to 0.10 Touch/brush on apparatus or mat with foot/feet
0.10 Failure to maintain hand contact on the bar between glide swing mount and 2nd part of
mount (pullover or jump to clear support)
0.10 Insufficient amplitude of Cast/ Clear Support for Angle Special Requirement (1° -10° below
specified angle requirement)
Lands with Feet Apart
0.05 Failure to join (slide) heels together on controlled extension of dismount landing when feet
are a maximum of hip-width apart
0.10 Lands dismount with feet further than hip-width apart
Clarification: If upon landing with the feet apart / staggered the gymnast takes a step(s), deduct only
for the step(s).
Up to 0.10 Slight hop, small adjustments of feet or staggered feet (one in front of the other) on landing
of dismount
Up to 0.10 Entire foot/feet slide or lift off floor to join on controlled extension of dismount landing when
feet are a maximum of hip-width apart (small step)
each 0.10 Step(s) on landing
Max. 0.40
Up to 0.10 Dismount
Deviation from straight direction on landing of dismount
Arm swings to maintain balance on landing of dismount
Legs crossed during twisting dismounts
0.10 Lands too close to the bar on dismount (when applicable)
No Deduction Swing forward or backward below horizontal
each up to 0.20 Leg or knee separations
each up to 0.20 Insufficient exactness of body shape: tuck or pike position
each up to 0.20 Insufficient amplitude of bar elements (including releases)
Exception: Clear Hip Circles & salto dismounts (see large faults)
0.20 Hit on apparatus with foot/feet
M to
each time up 0.20 Insufficient exactness of stretched position
(U aults
ediumF • Arch
.20)
0
pto • Hip angle (136°-179°)
up to 0.20
up to 0.20 Failure to maintain stretched body position (pikes down dismount)
up to 0.20 Incomplete turn or twist
up to 0.20 Incorrect body posture on dismount landing
up to 0.20 Additional trunk movements to maintain balance/control upon landing dismount
Large step or jump on landing (approximately 3 feet or more)
(Max. 0.40)
0.20
up to 0.20 Insufficient dynamics throughout exercise
• Insufficient swingful execution throughout exercise
• Energy not maintained throughout exercise
• Gymnast fails to make difficult look effortless

UNEVEN BARS - 27
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BARS

each up to 0.30 Bent arms in support or bent legs (90° bend or greater receives 0.30)
Maximum on any one element = 0.30 bent arms & 0.30 bent legs
0.30 Hit on mat with foot/feet
0.30 Grasp of bar apparatus to avoid a fall
up to 0.30 Insufficient extension (open) of the body prior to landing the dismount (tuck/pike)
up to 0.30 Insufficient height (amplitude) of salto dismounts
up to 0.30 Squat on landing (hips even with or lower than the knees)
up to 0.30 Brush/touch of one or both hands on the landing mat (no support)
Intermediate (extra) swing (Platinum/Diamond only)
(Max. 0.50)
0.30 More than one extra swing following an element
Clarification: Falls (jumps down) after extra swing(s), deduct 0.50 for Fall only
Exception: Tap swing – counterswing performed prior to salto forward dismount (front fly away) =
no deduction for extra swing.
0.30 On counterswing, body arched and/or hips open to extended position with feet over the
low bar
0.30 Lack of release of the bar, prior to landing dismount, when indicated
up to 0.40 Insufficient amplitude of “B” clear hip circle (Platinum and Diamond Only)
0.50 Third run approach on mount
0.50 Full support on foot/feet on mat during exercise
0.50 Support on mat with 1 or 2 hands upon landing dismount
0.50 Fall on mat to knee(s) or hips
0.50 Fall on or against the apparatus
0.50 Spotting assistance during an element Do not award VP or SR credit
0.50 Spotting assistance upon landing the dismount Award VP and SR credit
0.50 Fall after spot on element or on landing of dismount
0.50 Fall/Failure to land on the bottom of the feet first on dismount
• Salto initiated No VP, No SR
• Salto never initiated No VP, No SR and take the deduction 0.30 No Dismount

UNEVEN BARS - 28
 Xcel Code of Points
UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS

BARS
Elements Limited by Division - Receiving "A" VP.

Group 1 - Mounts

# Element Name
1.001 Jump to Front Support ✓
1.002 Jump to Squat on ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1.003a Pullover on Low Bar (from 1 or 2 feet or run) ✓ ✓ ✓
1.003b Pullover on High Bar ✓ ✓
1.004 Glide Swing to Stand ✓ ✓ ✓
1.005 Run out Glide Kip ✓ ✓ ✓
1.006 Single leg jam Kip (from Glide or Run Out) ✓ ✓ ✓
Group 2 - Casts/Counterswings
# Element Name
Cast (to 21° from Vertical) [Casts Within 10° of the requirement
receives SR/VP credit (Deduct 0.10 for amplitude) ]
Cast - Hips must leave bar✓
2.001 Cast to minimum of 45° below Horizontal ✓
Cast to a minimum of Horizontal ✓
Cast 89° to 21° from Vertical ✓
Cast 45° to 21° from Vertical ✓
2.002 Cast Shoot Through ✓ ✓ ✓
Tap swing - counterswing or Underswing - counterswing
2.003 ✓ ✓ ✓
Platinum Only one (1) allowed

Group 7 - Circle Swings/Hechts

# Element Name

7.001 Single leg swing forward or backward ✓ ✓

7.002 Single leg cut forward or backward ✓ ✓ ✓
7.003
7.004 Single
Stride Circle
leg basket
forward
swing
or (bent
backward
knee ok) ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ ✓ ✓
Long Hang Pull-Over (from long swing) [Eligible for Circling Skill
7.005 ✓✓
SR at these levels only]

Group 8 - Dismounts

# Element Name
8.001 Cast off with release of bar prior to arriving at stand [One (1) single ✓
element, not eligible for cast SR or cast VP]
8.002 ¾ Fwd. Circle to Stand ✓
¾ back seat circle dismount (pike, straddle, or stretched) from Low
8.003 ✓
Bar
From squat, straddle, or stoop position on low bar - Stretched
8.004 ✓ ✓
Jump off forward to a stand
8.005 Tap Swing Fwd. with ½ turn ✓ ✓

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 1

 Group 1 – Mounts (limited by Division)
A A A
BRONZE ONLY SILVER/GOLD/PLATINUM/DIAMOND ONLY
1.001 Jump to Front Support 1.002 Jump to Squat on

BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY SILVER/GOLD ONLY

1.003a 1.003b
Pullover on Low Bar (from 1 or 2 feet or run) Pullover on HIgh Bar

BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY

1.004 1.005 1.006
Glide Swing to Stand Run out Glide Kip Single leg jam Kip (from Glide or Run Out)
(No Visual Available) (No Visual Available)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 2

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.101 1.201 1.401
Glide kip on LB, also with reverse grip Glide kip on LB with grip change to hang Glide
1.301 kip on LB with 1/1 (360°) turn and
on HB grip change to hang on HB

360

Glide, 1/2 (180°) turn, glide kip (also within

exercise) - also with 1/2 (180°) turn

180 180

1.102 1.202 1.302 1.402

Jump with 1/2 (180°) turn, kip to support Jump with 1/2 (180°) turn, glide kip on LB Jump with 1/2 (180°) turn, glide kip on LB
with or without 1/2 (180°) turn and grip with 1/1 (360°) turn and grip change to
change to hang on HB hang on HB

180 180

180 OR

360

or with stoop
081 through to rear support
(back kip-up) 180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 3

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.103 1.203 1.303 1.403
Jump with 1/1 (360°) turn, kip to front Jump with 1/1 (360°) turn and kip on LB
support on LB with grip change to hang on HB

360

360

1.104 1.204 1.304 1.404

Glide on LB or swing forward on HB, Glide on LB, stoop through, back kip-up Glide on LB, stoop through, back kip-up
stoop through,
support LBkip-up
back
(touching with back
– to of
brief rear
thighs), change to hangclear
on LB through on HBrear
– also withwith
support 1/2 grip with straddle cut backward to hang on HB

also with
with or without 1/2 (180°)
grip change turn on HB –
to hang (180°) turn

Glide on LB, stoop through, back kip

up over LB with 1/1 (360°) turn and grip
change to hang on HB
180

Glide on LB, stoop through, back kip-up

with straddle cut backward to hang on
360
LB

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 4

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.105 1.205 1.305 1.405
Reverse kip from: glide forward on LB, OR
swing forward on HB, stoop through to kip
hang, back kip swing or seat (pike) circle
backward to rear support,

- also with grip change to hang on HB

1.106 1.206 1.306 1.406

Jump to brief hang on HB – also with to
Facing HB on
support –Jump
HB with 1/2 (180°) turn– kip Jump with 1/2 (180°) turn over LB – kip to
reverse grip – kip to support, support on HB

180

180

with grip change from HB to hang on LB

with kip to support (or similar) Free jump with 1/2 (180°) turn over LB
to hang on HB

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 5

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.107 1.207 1.307 1.407
Facing HB –Jump with 1/2 (180°) turn Facing HB – salto forward to brief hang
on HB
180

360
or 1/1 (360°) turn to hang on HB Jump to brief hang on HB, salto roll
360 backward tucked or straddled with grip
change to hang on LB

1.108 1.208 1.308 1.408

Squat or straddle vault with hand Free tuck or straddle jump over LB to Jump forward with free straddle over LB
repulsion over LB to hang on HB hang on HB with 1/2 (180) turn to catch HB in L grip
(1/2 turn must be free)

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 6

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.109 1.209 1.309 1.409
Jump to clear support on LB to imme Hecht jump (legs together)`with hand
diate back hip circle repulsion over LB to hang on HB

1.110 1.210 1.310 1.410

Salto brief sit on
LB to forward LB piked or straddled over Salto forward tucked or piked over LB to
tucked,
hang on HB, without touching LB

Salto forward tucked over LB with

-also over LB to hang in L grip on LB 1/2 (180°) turn to grasp LB

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 7

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.111 1.211 1.311 1.411
Round-off in front of LB – flight back ward over in
Round-off LBfront
withof LBtogether
legs or
– flight back- Round-off in front of LB – flight backward over LB with 1/1 (360°) turn to hang
ward (straddled) through momentary on HB
clear straddle support on LB straddled to hang on HB

360

1.112 1.212 1.312 1.412

Round-off in front of LB – salto backward tucked over LB to hang on LB
(Jentsch)

Round-off in front of LB – flic-flac through handstand phase on LB

(Gonzalez)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 8

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.113 1.213 1.313 1.413
Round-off in front of LB – Arabian salto tucked or piked over LB to a momen
tary sit on LB

180

180

1.114 1.214 1.314 1.414

Jump to handstand on LB with hips Jump to handstand on LB with hips Jump to handstand on LB with hips bent, then extended and 1/1 (360°) turn in
bent, then extended bent, then extended with 1/2 (180°) handstand phase
360
turn in handstand phase

180

Jump with extended body to handstand on LB

Jump with 1/2

(180°) turn with extended body to handstand on LB

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 9

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.115 1.215 1.315 1.415
with
Jump
to 1/2
glide
to (180°)
hang on HBand
turn flight over LB
– underswing (with reverse,
Jump to brief clear
mixed, or regular
support on HBgrip) Jump to brief clear support on HB (with reverse, mixed, or regular grip) –
clear hip circle to handstand with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase on HB
– clear hip circle to handstand on HB (McNamara)

180

180

1.116 1.216 1.316 1.416

Jump to brief clear support on LB (with reverse grip) – clear hip circle forward
to handstand with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase (Garner)

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 10

 Group 2 – Casts/Counterswings (limited by Division)
A
2.001
Cast (to 21° from Vertical)
Casts Within 10° of the requirement receives SR/VP credit (Deduct 0.10 for amplitude)

BRONZE SILVER GOLD PLATINUM DIAMOND

Cast Cast to Cast to a minimum Cast
from 89° to 21°
Vertical Cast 45° to 21°
(Hips must leave the bar) minimum of 45° below Horizontal of Horizontal from Vertical

BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY
2.002
Cast Shoot Through
(One “A” VP)

SILVER/GOLD/PLATINUM ONLY [Platinum Only one (1) allowed]

2.003
Tap swing - counterswing or Underswing - counterswing

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 11

 Group 2 – Casts/Counterswings
A B C D
2.101 2.201 2.301
straddled
same
1/2 (180°)
Cast (hips
21°
toside turn bent)
oftobar)
45°
(cast &orturn
from vertical,
together
occurslegs
with
on Cast to
vertical)
bent) with legs(hips
orhandstand
together extended)
(within
straddled20° of
(hips (180°)togrip
Cast
verse turninafter
handstand thewith
hophop
handstand, to
alsotowith
reverse
re- 1/2 Cast to handstand with 1/1 (360°) or 1½ (540°) turn in
2.401
handstand phase
(1/1-Pacheco; 1½ - Miller)
grip (not illustrated)
360

180

Cast to handstand with 1/2 (180°)

180

turn in handstand phase, 180 540

Cast to handstand with hop to L grip in handstand

phase
- also 1/2 (180°) turn to L or mixed-L
grip (Higgins technique) 180

on to arm
technique)
one
Cast toafter
handstand with 1/1grip,
L orhandstand
mixed-L (Healyturn with 1½ (540°) turn to Lor mixed-L grip (Healy tech
also
(360°)
nique)

from cast with hop to reverse grip 180 360

360

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 12

 Group 2 – Casts/Counterswings
A B C D
2.102 2.202 2.302 2.402
Cast to squat, stoop or straddle grip change
stoop,
Front supporttoon
or straddleLB
hang free
-on
over HBsquat,
LB with Hang with
ward
straddle) or
on HB with
– uprise
straddle
rear vault
back-
flight in
(Schier Outer front support on LB – cast with salto roll forward to hang on
on LB, also with jump to grasp HB, also from inner front support – Radochla roll to hang (Brause)
HB
(One “A” VP in all Divisions) flight (Schier Kehre) over HB to
L-hang or hang

Front support on HB – stoop with

flight or free straddle forward
over HB and 1/2 (180°) turn to
180
hang on HB

Handstand on HB- Giant circle backward with 1/2 (180°) turn, uprise
backward with rear vault in flight over HB to hang (Janz-Kehre)

180

180

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 13

 Group 2 – Casts/Counterswings
A B C D
2.103 2.203 2.303 2.403
Hang on HB – uprise backward to clear Hang on HB – uprise backward to hand Hang on HB – uprise backward to handstand on HB with 1/1
support on HB, also from handstand on HB stand on HB, (360°) turn in
handstand phase
* The Back Uprise to clear support followed directly 180360

by a Group 3, 6 or 7 circling element to handstand,

with or without 1/2 (180°) turn, may be counted
as two elements (B+C) or one “C” element, to the
benefit of the gymnast.

Hang on HB – uprise backward with hop to reverse grip in

handstand (McCalla), also followed by 1/1 (360°) turn on one
- also with 1/2 (180°) turn arm after handstand (Healy technique) to Lor
mixed-L grip

180

360 360

or – swing down with 1/2 (180°) turn and

uprise backward to clear support on HB
(turning uprise)
Hang on HB – uprise backward to hand
standhandstand
after ongrip
mixed-L HB with(Healy
1/1 (360°) turn ontoone
technique) Lorarm Hang on HB – uprise backward to handstand on HB with 1½
(540°) turn in handstand phase (Reeder), also with 1½ (540°)
turn to L or mixed-L grip (Healy technique)
180

360

540 540

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 14

 Group 2 – Casts/Counterswings
A B C D
2.104 2.204 2.304 2.404
Hang on HB – swing backward with release HB
From
with(Caslavska
release
front support
andPirouette)
1/1on(360°)
HB - swing
turn tobackward
hang on From a cast on HB, swing down between bars to a turning uprise
and 1/1 (360°) turn to hang on HB and straddle forward over HB with 1/2 (180°) turn to regrasp HB
(Wilson)
360

360

Back uprise, release with 1/2 (180°) turn and straddle flight
backward over HB (Franzella)
180

2.105 2.205 2.405

Hang on or
straddle HBpike
- Counterswing
with flight over
backward in on LB Hang
LB to hang 2.305 on HB - Counterswing backward in Hang on HB - Counterswing backward in straddle or pike with flight
straddle or pike with flight to handstand on to handstand on LB with 1/1 (360°) turn in handstand
LB, also with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand
360

Hang on HB - Counterswing backward in straddle or pike with 1/2

(180°) turn in flight to handstand on LB
180

180
*Receives “C” if it directly follows (without for
ward counterswing) a “D” release element.

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 15

 Group 2 – Casts/Counterswings
A B C D
2.106 2.206 2.306 2.406 180
On HB – Counterswing to salto forward piked/straddled On HB – counterswing to salto forward
with 1/2 (180°) turn to catch LB (Pritchard) stretched with 1/2 (180°) turn to catch LB
(Cox)

On HB – Counterswing to salto forward

180
straddled to catch same bar (Bullock)

Counterswing on HB to salto forward

straddled between bars to catch LB in
reverse grip (Montell)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 16

 Group 3 – Underswings/Clear hips circles
A B C D
3.101 3.201 3.301 3.401
Underswing on LB with 1/2 (180°) in
Clear
and
1/2flight to hang
(180°)
counter onon
turn
movement
underswing
turn HB, also
toLB,
mixed with
grip Inner front support on LB- clear hip
forward
release
turn and grip change to hang on HB circle through handstand with flight
to hang on HB (Shaposhnikova)

(not illustrated)

180

3.102 3.202 3.302 3.402

Underswing on HB with 1/2 arms
Facinginoutward
with 1/2 flight
(180°)toturn
hang onside
and same
– Underswing on HB
barof
flair Underswing with 1½ (540°) turn to
(180°) turn at or above HB hang
height to hang

180

081

Underswing with 1/2 (180°) turn to

raelc support on same bar
540

180

081

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 17

 Group 3 – Underswings/Clear hips circles
A B C D
3.103 3.203 3.303 3.403
hang
(180°)on LBand
Underswing
turn flight with
(toe-on) LB to
over 1/2 swing
From handstand on1/2
(toe-on) with HB,(180°)
under- On HB, underswing (toe-on) with 1/2 (180°) turn
and flight over LB to handstand on LB
turn and flight over LB to hang
on LB

3.104 3.204 3.304 3.404

Clear hip circle to clear support Clear hip circle to handstand Clear hip circle to handstand with hop-grip change
in handstand phase

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 18

 Group 3 – Underswings/Clear hips circles
A B C D
3.105 3.205 3.305
Clear hip circle to handstand with 1/2 (180°) Clear hip circle to handstand with 1/2 (180°)
turn in handstand phase to regular grip 3.405
turn in handstand phase to reverse grip, also
to L grip (Higgins technique) or mixed-L grip
180

180

Clear hip circle to handstand with 1/1 (360°)

turn on one arm after handstand (Healy tech
nique) to Lor mixed-L grip

360

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 19

 Group 3 – Underswings/Clear hips circles
A B C D
3.106 3.206 3.306 3.406
Underswing backward (inverted pike swing) HB -dislocate
with
Underswing to regular
(Schleudern)
hop-change
backward to near
(inverted
grip on handstand
pike
HBswing) on From hang on HB – stoop through, under
-dislocate (Schleudern) to hang on HB swing backward (inverted pike swing) on
HB – dislocate with flight to handstand on LB
(Zuchold-Schleudern)

Hang on HB, back to LB –stoop through,

underswing backward (inverted pike swing) - - also from rear support
dislocate (Schleudern) with flight over LB to
hang, also from rear support on HB

Hang on HB, facing LB – swing forward and

stoop through, dislocate and underswing with
1/2 (180°) turn with flight over LB to hang on
LB (Tai)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 20

 Group 3 – Underswings/Clear hips circles
A B C D
3.107 3.207 3.307 3.407
Clear hip circle forward to Clear hip circle forward to handstand, also with legs straddled (hips bent) on up
clear support (Weiler-kip), also swing (Weiler-kip to handstand)
with legs straddled (hips bent) - also with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase
on upswing - also with 1/1 (360°) turn on one arm after handstand (Healy technique) to Lor
mixed-L grip (McAllister)

180

360

3.108 3.208 3.308 3.408

On LB facing HB – Clear hip circle forward to immediate salto forward piked over
LB to catch HB (Pelaez)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 21

 Group 4 – Giant Swings Backward
A B C D
4.101 4.201 4.301 4.401
Handstand
45°
(180°)
between
from
turn at swing
HB
vertical
bars, - swing
onhorizontal down
(HB
forward with 1/2to Handstand on HB - swing down
height) Handstand on HB - swing down
between bars, swing forward with 1/1 between bars, swing forward with 1½
(360°) turn to L hang at height of HB (540°) turn, circa 45° deviation from
(at horizontal), also swing forward vertical to hang on HB
with 1/2 (180˚) turn at 21˚ to 44˚ from
Horiz - 45° vertical (not illustrated)
540
180
360

4.102 4.202 4.402

From pullover
hang on support
to front
front support HB-cast to long Handstand on HB – giant circle back- Handstand
4.302 on HB – giant circle Giant circle backward on HB -hop from regular grip
joints(Dussier)
ward
grip to
in handstand,
upper or withinbending
vertical regular or
of cross
hip backward to handstand with hop-grip to L grip in handstand phase (Dochney)
change in handstand phase

On LB - giant circle backward to

handstand (either side) (with legs
- also on one arm (Liu)
tucked at bottom of circle)

LB

All LB giants performed with extended body/legs will retain same value as corresponding HB giant.

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 22

 Group 4 – Giant Swings Backward
A B C D
4.103 4.203 4.303 4.403
On LB – backward giant circle Handstand
hop
handstand on HB-
1/2 (180°)
with 1/2 giant
turn to reverse
(180°) turn,grip,
circle backward
alsoalso to
withwith Handstand on HB – giant circle backward to handstand with 1/1
with 1/2 (180°) turn to hand (360°) turn in handstand
stand (either side) 360

1/2 (180°) turn to L or mixed-L grip (Higgins 360

LB technique)

180 180
180

Handstand
handstand
with
(different directions)
on HB
legs straddled
with in handstand
1/2–during
1/2
- giant circle
the 2nd
(180° 1/2 turn
180°)
+backward
phase,turnto
also Handstand on HB – giant circle backward to handstand with 1½
(540°) turn in handstand phase or on one arm after handstand (Healy
technique) to L or mixed-L grip

180
360 360

180

180

Handstand on HB – giant circle backward to

handstand (also with hop to reverse grip) with Backward giant with 1/1 (360°) turn in handstand with hop on first
1/1 (360°) turn on one arm (Healy technique) turn (turns in same direction)
to L or mixed-L grip
360
360

On LB - backward giant circle with 1/1 (360°)

turn in handstand (Borkan) (legs tucked at bot
tom of circle) (Not illustrated)
LB

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 23

 Group 4 – Giant Swings Backward
A B C D
4.104 4.204 4.304 4.404
From hang on HB- long swing forward From over
flight
forward (bail) with
LB to
handstand on1/2
hang HBon- LB
(180°) swing
longturn and From handstand or hang on HB, long swing forward with 1/2 (180°) turn and
with 1/2 (180°) turn and flight over LB flight to handstand on LB
to hang on LB
*Receives ”C” if it immediately follows
a “D” release element.
180 180

180

4.105 4.205 4.305 4.405

Handstand on HB - giant circle backward, counter straddle-reverse hecht
(Tkatchev) over HB to hang

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 24

 Group 4 – Giant Swings Backward
A B C D
4.106 4.206 4.306 4.406
Hang
straddled) to hang
on HB, facingorLB
clear straddle
– swing forward andon
support salto
LB roll
(Peach salto) (legs tucked or
backward Hang on HB, facing LB –swing forward
and salto backward stretched between
bars to clear support with regular or
crossed grip on LB (Pak Salto)

Hang on HB, facing LB –swing forward, salto roll backward tucked with 1/2
(180°) turn between the bars to catch LB in mixed grip (Cullinan)
(not illustrated)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 25

 Group 4 – Giant Swings Backward
A B C D
4.107 4.207 4.307 4.407
On
to catch
(Laumann)
release and
HB, 1/2
LB facing HB,(180°)
3/4 in
finishing in tuck
swing
a hang
giant
turn position with
HB, facing
onbackward with
LBflight From HB - swing down between bars, swing forward with 1/2
(180°) turn to salto forward tucked (not illustrated) or straddled
(Deltchev- Salto)

180

180

From HB - swing down between bars, swing forward and salto

backward piked with 1/2 (180°) turn (Gienger- Salto)

On LB, 3/4 giant swing backward with release and

swing forward and salto backward tucked with 1/2 180

(180°) turn - LB Gienger tucked (Turchin)

From HB - swing down beween bars, swing forward to salto

backward piked with 1/2 (180°) turn to catch HB in mixed grip
with additional 1/2 (180°) turn after catch (Gienger- Salto with
additional 1/2 (180°) turn) (O’Neal)

180

180

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 26

 Group 5 – Giant swings–Circles forward
A B C D
5.101 5.201 5.301 5.401
Handstand on HB - swing down for
ward between bars, swing backward
and 1/1 (360°) turn at height of HB

360

5.102 5.202 5.302 5.402

Handstand on LB – Giant circle swing Handstand
dled
reverse
(180°) gripin
orturn
hips tohandstand
on HB
bent giantphase;
in–upswing
handstand, circle
also with
swing
phase, also
legs with
forward in
1/2
strad- Handstand on HB – giant circle swing
forward in reverse grip with legs forward in regular grip to handstand
LB
tucked at bottom of circle (Slip-grip front giant - Galloway)

180

Handstand on HB – giant circle swing

forward in reverse grip to handstand
also with hop-grip change to regular with 1/1 (360°) turn in handstand phase
also with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand grip (overgrip) - not illustrated
(Portocarrero)
LB
phase (start & finish in HS)
also with 1/1 (360°) turn on one arm after hand 360

stand (Healy technique) to L or mixed-L grip

180 360

Giant circle forward in reverse grip, hop

From Handstand on LB – Giant circle swing for to L grip in handstand phase (hands
ward in reverse grip to handstand with 1/1 (360°) must release simultaneously) (Estella)
turn in handstand phase - legs tucked at bottom 360

of circle 360

LB
All LB Giants performed with extend
ed body/legs will retain same value as
corresponding HB element.

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 27

 Group 5 – Giant swings–Circles forward
A B C D
5.103 5.203 5.303
facing
piked flight
Handstand onregular
HB - swing
LB) inbackward or
over LB togrip
reverse
down hang
forward LB or Handstand
on(back
- straddled down HB - swing
on (back
5.403 forward facing

LB) in regular or reverse grip

– straddled or piked flight back
ward to handstand on LB

Handstand on HB - swing
down forward (back facing
LB) in reverse grip, backward
swing, release and 1/2 (180°)
turn in flight between the bars
to catch LB in hang (Ejova)

5.104 5.204 5.304 5.404

with
in grip of
Handstand
handstand
range change
hang
on to- cross
on HB,
HBposition grip
swingand
downand 1/2
between
swing upward
(180°)to
barsturn Handstand on HB - swing down between bars with 1/2
(180°) turn through brief hang in cross grip or change to
regular grip, swing backward with salto forward straddled
or tucked to hang on HB (Mixed-grip Deltchev)

180

with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase (Shahaf) 180

180

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 28

 Group 5 – Giant swings–Circles forward
AB C D
5.105 5.205 5.305
Facing out on LB, giant circle forward to salto forward to catch HB Handstand on HB - swing down forward between
5.405
bars in reverse grip or L grip, swing backward with
salto forward tucked or straddled to hang on HB
(tucked or straddled Jaeger-Salto)

From a reverse grip handstand on LB, 3/4

giant circle forward to release, front salto
tucked with a 1/1 (360°) turn to catch HB in
regular grip (Grable)
360

1.5

5.106 5.206 5.306 5.406

Handstand on HB - circle swing for Handstand on HB - circle swing forward in reverse grip with 1/2 (180°) turn and
ward in reverse grip with free stoop or straddle flight over HB to hang on HB (Khorkina)
straddle vault and 1/2 (180°) turn over
HB to hang (Wenning/Volpi) 180

180

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 29

 Group 5 – Giant swings–Circles forward
A B C D
5.107 5.207 5.307 5.407
Handstand on HB – Giant circle swing forward in L grip (rearways) to handstand with piked or stretched body (L grip front giant) through
handstand phase, also with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase (Zaytseva)...to regular grip

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 30

 Group 6 – Stalder Circles
A B C D
6.101 6.201 6.401
Clear straddle circle for Stalder forward to clear support Stalder forward to handstand, also with 1/2 (180°)
6.301 Stalder forward to handstand with 1/1
ward on LB or HB to clear turn in handstand phase (360°) turn in handstand phase
straddle “L” support 360

.
.

. 180

Stalder forward with regular (over) grip

(Boniforti)
Stalder forward to handstand with 1/1 (360°) turn
on one arm after handstand phase
(Healy technique) to L or mixed-L grip ..
360

Long kip on HB, passing 180

through clear straddle support

– swing/press to handstand,
also with 1/2 (180°) turn in
handstand phase (Chow)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 31

 Group 6 – Stalder Circles
A B C D
6.102 6.202 6.302 6.402
Clear straddle circle backward on HB Clear straddle circle forward on HB Clear straddle circle forward or backward on HB
with grip change to hang on LB with flight backward over LB to hang with flight to handstand on LB
on LB

Handstand on HB - Clear straddle

circle backward on HB with 1/2 (180°)
turn to hang on HB Facing outward on LB, Stalder circle forward to
salto forward straddled to catch HB
180

6.103 6.203 6.303 6.403

Stalder forward in L grip to clear Stalder forward in L grip to handstand, also with
support 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase (White).

180

. .

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 32

 Group 6 – Stalder Circles
A B C D
6.104 6.204 6.304 6.404
Clear straddle circle back Stalder circle backward to clear Stalder backward to handstand Stalder backward to handstand
ward on LB or HB to clear support with hop-grip change in handstand
straddle “L” support phase
. .

1/2
to
Stalder
regular
(180°) turn in handstand
grip
backward to handstand with Stalder backward to handstand
phase
with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand
phase to reverse, L or mixed-L
grip

. .
. .

. . .. .
.
180 180

Stalder backward to handstand with Stalder backward to handstand

1/1 (360°) turn on one arm after with hop-grip change in handstand
phase and 1/1 (360°) turn on
handstand (Healy technique) to Lor
one arm after handstand (Healy
mixed-L grip
technique) to Lor mixed-L grip

.
.

360
360

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 33

 Group 6 – Stalder Circles
A B C D
6.105 6.205 6.305 6.405
counter movement
LB-facing inward –Stalder in flight towith
forwardbackward hang on HBand
release (Ray) LB-facing outward –Stalder backward through
handstand with flight to hang on HB

LB-facing inward – Stalder backward with release and

hecht to hang on HB

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 34

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts (limited by Division)
A A
BRONZE/SILVER ONLY BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY
7.001 7.002
Single leg swing forward or backward Single leg cut forward or backward

(backward shorthand) (forward shorthand)

BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY
7.003
Single leg basket swing
(bent knee ok)

BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY
7.004
Stride Circle forward or backward

SILVER/GOLD ONLY
7.005
Long Hang Pull-Over (from long swing)
[Eligible for Circling Skill SR at these levels only]
(No Visual Available)

Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts (Open to all Divisions)

7.006 (Open to all Divisions)
Basket Swing

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 35

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.101 7.201 7.301 7.401
Hip circle backward on LB or HB to support Outer front support – clear hip circle backward on Free hip circle backward on LB or HB, hecht
LB with hecht to hang on HB with flight and 1/2 (180°) turn passing over bar to
hang on same bar

180

from clear hip circle backward on HB (free or

Hip circle forward on LB or HB to support clear Hechtkehre)

also with 1/2 (180°) turn (legs together or straddled)

180

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 36

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.102 7.202 7.302 7.402
From cast on LB, free hip circle backward From cast on LB, free hip circle backward – hip
– hip repulsion – flight with regrasp on LB to repulsion – with free straddle forward over LB
glide (“false-Pop”) to rear support (Korbut)

7.103 7.203 7.303 7.403

Sole circle forward or backward (tucked or Sole circle backward piked with flight from HB
piked) on LB or HB to stand, also with grip to stand on LB
change to hang on HB

. .

.
.
.
.
..
UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 37
 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.104 7.204 7.304 7.404
Rear support on LB or HB - seat (pike) Rear support on LB – seat (pike) circle From stoop in or from rear support on
circle forward through clear rear support forward through clear rear support with 1/2 HB – seat (pike) circle forward through
(180°) turn to hang on HB clear extended support in L grip
(greater than 30° from vertical) (Adler)
.
180

Handstand on HB – stoop in to seat (pike)

circle forward through clear support – (with
beat of lower legs on HB) salto forward to
catch in reverse grip in hang on HB
on LB with grip change to hang on HB

. - also with 1/2 (180°) turn

180

Hang or rear support on HB – stoop

through, back kip or seat (pike) circle
forward-through clear rear support with
1/2 (180°) turn to hang on HB

180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 38

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.105 7.205 7.305 7.405
Rear support on LB or HB - seat (pike) circle Outer rear support on HB – fall backward to inverted pike swing or seat (pike)
forward with straddle cut backward to hang on circle forward - straddle cut backward with flight over LB to hang
same bar

Rear support on LB- seat (pike) circle forward with straddle cut backward
and grip change to hang on HB

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 39

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.106 7.206 7.306 7.406
Rear
circle support
backwardonto
LBrear
or HB - seat (pike) change
support Rear support on
to with
backward hang LB(180°)
1/2
on - seatturn
HB andcircle
(pike) grip Clear rear pike support on HB Clear rear pike support on HB (legs together) -
(legs together) – full circle swing full circle swing backward – continuing through
backward to finish in clear rear clear rear pike support backward over HB into
. support on HB hang (Mirgorodskaia)

180 -circle swing backward and continue to salto

backward stretched (or piked) between bars to
clear support on LB (Teza)
on LB with grip change to hang on HB -Inner rear support on HB - seat (pike)
circle backward with release to stand
. on LB

- circle swing backward and 1/2 (180°) turn with

flight to handstand on LB (Teza)
180

-or with grip change to hang on LB

From handstand, clear pike circle backward to

rear inverted pike support

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 40

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.107 7.207 7.307 7.407
Clear rear pike support on HB (legs together) – full circle swing back
ward with counter flight backward straddled or with stoop out backward
to hang on HB (LiLi)

7.108 7.208 7.308 7.408

Pike sole circle forward to handstand, also with 1/2 (180°) Pike sole circle forward in L grip to handstand, also with 1/2 (180°) turn
turn in handstand phase

180 180

Pike sole circle forward with 1/1 (360°) turn on one arm after Pike sole circle forward with 360

handstand (Healy technique) to L or mixed-L grip 1/1 (360°) turn in handstand

360
phase

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 41

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.109 7.209 7.309
Pike sole circle backward Pike sole circle backward to handstand 7.409sole circle backward with hop-grip
Pike
(toe on & off) to clear support change to reverse grip in handstand phase

Pike sole circle backward to handstand

with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase
to regular grip
180

Pike sole circle backward to handstand

with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand phase to
reverse, Lor mixed-L grip

180

Pike sole circle backward to handstand

with 1/1 (360°) turn on one arm after
handstand (Healy technique) to Lor
mixed-L grip

360

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 42

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.110 7.210 7.310 7.410
Underswing (pike Inner front support on LB – pike sole circle backward
sole circle) on LB, through handstand with flight to hang on HB
release and coun (Maloney)
ter movement
forward in flight to
hang on HB

Underswing
(sole circle) on
LB, release and Underswing (pike sole circle backward) on LB,
counter move release and counter-movement forward in flight with
ment forward in 1/1 (360°) turn to hang on HB (Oster)
flight with 1/2
(180°) turn to
360
hang with mixed
grip on HB
(Reinhardt)

7.111 7.211 7.311 7.411

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 43

 Group 7 – Circle Swings/Hechts
A B C D
7.112 7.212 7.312 7.412
also with 1/2 (180°) turn in hand
Clear pike circle
stand phase (Endo-piked)
forward to handstand

180

180
7.113 7.213 7.313 7.413
Clear pike circle back Clear pike circle backward on LB Clear pike circle
ward, arriving in a clear with release and counter flight to backward to handstand
pike support position hang on HB or with hecht flight to
hang on HB (not illustrated)

Clear pike circle backward, disengag

ing legs prior to a clear support at or
also with 1/2 (180°)
above horizontal
turn in handstand 180
phase (Stalder-piked)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 44

 Group 8 – Dismounts (limited by Division)
A A
BRONZE ONLY
8.001
Cast off with release of bar prior to arriving at stand (1 single element, not eligible for
cast SR or cast VP)

BRONZE ONLY SILVER ONLY

8.002 8.003
¾ Fwd. Circle to Stand ¾ back seat circle dismount (pike, straddle, or stretched) from Low Bar
(No Visual Available)

BRONZE/SILVER
8.004
From squat, straddle, or stoop position on low bar - Stretched Jump off forward to a stand

SILVER/GOLD ONLY
8.005
Tap Swing Fwd. with ½ turn

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 45

 Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.101 8.201 8.301 8.401
From HB or LB – underswing (toe-on or clear) to stand From HB - underswing (toe-on From HB – underswing (toe-on From HB – underswing (toe-on
or clear) with 1½ (540°) or 2/1 or clear) or back stalder (not or clear) to salto forward tucked
(720°) twist illustrated) to salto forward or piked with 1/1 (360°) twis
tucked or piked

360

540

Toe-on to stand includes a straddle position (sole circle) 360

From HB - underswing (toe-on or

also with 1/2 (180°) or 1/1 (360°) twist to both sides clear) to salto forward stretched
also with 1/2 (180°) twist (Kennedy)
180

180

360

Back stalder to salto forward

tucked w/ 1/2 twist (Celestine)

180
From HB - clear pike circle
backward to salto forward
stretched with 1/2 (180°) turn
(not illustrated)

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 46

 180

Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.102 8.202 8.302 8.402
Clear front support on HB – underswing (toe-on or Clear front support on HB – underswing (toe-on
180 or
or piked
clear) with 1/2 (180°)twisttosaltobackwardtucked clear) with 1/2 (180°) twist to salto backward stretched
(clear-Okino)
(Comaneci)

180

180

180

Clear front support on HB – underswing

(toe-on or clear) with 1/2 (180°) turn to salto
backward tucked with 1/2 (180°) turn (Haba)

180 180180

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 47

 Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.103 8.203 8.303 8.403
From HB - swing down From HB - swing down between From HB - swing down between From HB - swing down between
between
to
or salto bars(Flyaway)
stretched
backward
– swing forward
tucked, piked bars – swing forward to salto bars – swing forward to salto bars – swing forward to salto
backward tucked, piked or backward stretched with 1½ backward stretched with 2½
stretched with 1/2 (180°) or 1/1 (540°) or 2/1 (720°) twist (900°) twist (Ji)
(360°) twist

180

900

540

180

180

720

360

All flyaway dismounts must be initiated from the High Bar to receive Value-Part credit.

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 48

 Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.104 8.204 8.304 8.404
From HB - swing down between bars – swing forward to double salto From HB - swing down between bars – swing forward to double salto backward
backward tucked or piked tucked with 1/2 (180°) twist in second salto (Elmore)

8.105 8.205 8.305 8.405

From HB - swing down between bars – swing forward to double salto backward
in stretched / piked or piked / stretched

8.106 8.206 8.306 8.406

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 49

 Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.107 8.207 8.307 8.407
From HB - swing down forward between
From
tuckedHB
forward or
-on
– HB
bars
swing
clear downforward
intoreverse
salto
straddlegrip,
forward
circle From HB bars
between – swing down forward
in reverse grip, From HB – swing down forward
between bars in reverse grip, between bars with reverse grip
salto forward tucked, piked or with
salto1½
(Stretched -orPechstein)
1½tucked
forward
(540°) 2/1or
(720°) twist - or clear straddle circle forward
stretched
stretched; also from a counter between bars to a salto forward
swing withtucked,
salto forward
stretched 1/2 (180°)
piked 1/1
or or tucked, piked, or stretched with
2½ (900°) twist
(360°) twist

540

900

180

Giant circle forward, 1/2 (180°)

turn in flight to double salto back
720
ward tucked or piked (Goerlitz)
180

180

From HB - swing down between

bars in regular grip, with grip
change to cross grip and 1/2 360

(180˚) turn in range of hang posi

tion and swing backward-upward
to salto forward tucked, piked or
stretched

360

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 50

 Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.108 8.208 8.408
Hip circle backward on LB or HB – hecht, Hip circle backward (also clear) on LB Hip circle backward (also clear) on
also from clear hip circle backward HB – hecht with 1/1 (360°) twist
8.308
or LB or HB – hecht with salto backward
tucked (Muchina)

360

360

8.109 8.209 8.309 8.409

Outer front support on HB – cast to Outer front support on HB – cast to
near handstand, salto forward tucked near handstand, salto forward piked

also to salto backward tucked or

piked

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 51

 Group 8 – Dismounts
A B C D
8.110 8.210 8.310 8.410
From a cast, uprise or backswing Outer
ward
or tucked
clear
front or piked
hip support
circle through hip circle to
– clearhandstand swing
saltobackward
back- On HB - stalder backward through handstand to salto backward tucked
to straddle cut, salto backward or piked
tucked, piked or stretched
(Whipsalto-Tanac) on LB or HB
.

On HB - giant circle backward (facing LB) to salto From a cast, uprise or backswing, straddle cut to salto backward tucked
backward tucked over HB (Gonzales), also facing or stretched with 2/1 (720°) twist or more on LB or HB (Tanac 2/1+)
HB, giant circle backward with ½ (180°) turn to back (Bronson)
salto tucked

720

From a cast, uprise or backswing, straddle cut to salto On HB - giant circle backward (facing LB) to salto backward tucked over
backward tucked or stretched with 1/1 (360°) or 1½ HB with 1/1 (360°) twist (Harriman)
(540°) twist on LB or HB (Tanac 1/1 -1½)
360
360

UNEVEN BAR ELEMENTS - 52

 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

BALANCE BEAM RULES

Difficulty Timing
Special Requirements (SR) Value Part Restrictions Warm-Up Time
(VP) Restricted Skills Time Limit
Deduct 0.50 for Each Missing SR Required 0.50 deduction - off Per (No min.
SV Gymnast time)

• No “B” or higher
1. Minimum ½ Turn on one (1) Foot or two (2) Feet “A” VP.
2. One (1) Jump or Leap (not mount or dismount) - No split Minimum of 4
• No Salto or 30 45
angle required VP
Aerial seconds seconds
.43 One (1) Acro element – Non-Flight (0.10 each)
Dismount – No Saltos or Aerials Dismounts
• No Walkovers
1. Minimum ½ Turn on one (1) Foot
• No “B” Acro
2. One (1) Jump or Leap with a minimum 90° Cross or Side Minimum of 5
VP. 45 50
Split (not mount or dismount) “A” VP
• No “C” or seconds seconds
3. One (1) Acro element – Non-Flight (0.10 each)
4. Dismount higher VP.
1. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) Foot
2. Two (2) different Group 2 elements – One (1) with a min.
120° cross or side split (isolated or in a series). Minimum of
• No “C” or 1:00 1:00
3. Two (2) Acro elements – with or without Flight (Isolated or 6 “A” VP
higher VP. minute minute
Series) – One (1) must achieve or pass through inverted (0.10 each)
Vertical
4. Dismount
1. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) Foot
2. Dance Series – Two (2) Group 1*, 2, or 3* elements
Minimum of
(same or different) – AND one (1) Jump or Leap with a • No “C” Acro
6 “A”
minimum 120° Cross or Side Split (Isolated or Series) VP. 1:30 1:15
(0.10 each),
3. One (1) Acro Flight element OR Acro Series – with or • No “D” or minutes minutes
1 “B” VP
without Flight – Minimum of one skill must achieve or pass higher VP
(0.30)
through vertical (excluding Mount or Dismount)
4. Dismount
1. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) Foot
2. Dance Series – Two (2) Group 1*, 2, or 3* elements
Minimum of
(same or different) – AND one (1) Jump or Leap with a • Maximum of 1
5 “A”
minimum 150° Cross or Side Split (Isolated or Series) “D” VP
(0.10 each), 2:00 1:15
3. Acro Series – with or without Flight – Minimum of one skill allowed. No
2 “B” VP minutes minutes
must achieve or pass through vertical (excluding mount or bonus.
(0.30 each)
dismount); AND one (1) Acro Flight element (Isolated or • No “E” VP.
Series)
4. Dismount – Salto or Aerial
Clarifications
Clarifications applied to ALL Xcel Divisions
Fall Time: 45
SR#3: All Acro Skills must start and finish on the beam to receive credit for SR#3. Seconds
SR#4: If a restricted element is competed as the dismount, in addition to no SR#4 credit, also deduct 0.30 for No Dismount.
Split Angle (within 20°): SR and VP credit will be awarded for Cross or Side Split Leaps or Jumps that are within 20°of the Division’s specified
Split angle. (See Beam Chapter 2, I Recognition of Value Parts) Deduction of up to 0.20 for Insufficient Split will be applied.
Handstands: A hold is not required for any “A” VP handstand. Any “B” VP or higher handstand requires a 2 second hold if noted within the Table
of Elements.
Value Parts: Any skills listed in the Xcel Code of Points and allowed at the respective Division. (Bronze: Any “A” VP; Silver: Any “A” VP or “B”
Dance VP, Gold: Any “A” or “B”; Platinum: Any “A”, “B” or “C” Dance VP; Diamond: Any “A”, ”B”,”C” VP & 1 “D”)
Platinum/Diamond
Dance Series:
* Group 1 Dance VP – Group 1 Mounts that are considered Dance VP are indicated with a (D) next to the illustration within the Code of Points, are
eligible to be used in the dance series.
* Group 3 Turns on one (1) Foot are eligible to be used in the dance series.

BALANCE BEAM - 1
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

CHAPTER 1: REQUIREMENTS & RESTRICTIONS

I. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Requirements (SR) each worth 0.50.
A. Bronze Division
1. Minimum ½ Turn on One (1) or Two (2) Feet
2. One (1) Jump or Leap (not mount or dismount)
3. One (1) Acro element – Non-Flight
4. Dismount – No Saltos or Aerials

B. Silver Division
1. Minimum ½ Turn on One (1) Foot
2. One (1) Jump or Leap with a minimum 90° Cross or Side Split (not mount or dismount)
3. One (1) Acro element – Non-Flight
4. Dismount

C. Gold Division
1. Minimum 1/1 Turn on One (1) Foot
2. Two (2) Different Group 2 elements – one (1) with a minimum 120° Cross or Side Split (Isolated or Series)
3. Two (2) Acro elements – with or without Flight (Isolated or Series)
a. One (1) must achieve or pass through inverted vertical. Support on hands (through handstand position) is
not required.
4. Dismount

D. Platinum Division
1. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) Foot
2. Dance Series - minimum Two (2) Group 1*, 2 or 3* elements (same or different) – AND one (1) Leap or Jump
with a minimum 120° Cross or Side Split (Isolated or Series)
* Group 1 Dance VP – Group 1 Mounts that are considered Dance VP are indicated with a (D) next to the
illustration within the Code of Points, are eligible to be used in the dance series.
* Group 3 Turns on one (1) Foot are eligible to be used in the dance series.
3. One (1) Acro Flight element OR Acro Series – with or without Flight – Minimum. of one skill must achieve or
pass through vertical (excluding Mount or Dismount)
4. Dismount

E. Diamond Division
1. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) Foot
2. Dance Series – minimum Two (2) Group 1*, 2 or 3* elements (same or different) – AND one (1) Leap or Jump
with a minimum 150° Cross or Side Split (Isolated or Series)
* Group 1 Dance VP – Group 1 Mounts that are considered Dance VP are indicated with a (D) next to the
illustration within the Code of Points, are eligible to be used in the dance series.
* Group 3 Turns on one (1) Foot are eligible to be used in the dance series.
3. Acro Series – with or without Flight - Minimum of one skill must achieve or pass through vertical (excluding
mount or dismount); AND one (1) Acro Flight element (Isolated or Series)
4. Dismount – Salto or Aerial

II. VALUE PART REQUIREMENTS

Value Part requirements for Xcel are provided in the following chart. Refer to the General/Judges Section for further
clarification on value parts and deductions related to missing value parts.

Value Part Requirement

Bronze 4 “A” VP (0.10 each) 6 “A” VP (0.10 each)
(0.10 each) Platinum
Silver 5 “A” VP 1 “B” VP (0.30 each)
Gold 6 “A” VP (0.10 each) 5 “A” VP (0.10 each)
Diamond
2 “B” VP (0.30 each)
BALANCE BEAM - 2
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

III. SPECIAL REQUIREMENT CLARIFICATIONS

A. Clarifications applied to ALL Divisions
1. All Acro Skills must start and finish on the beam to receive credit for SR#3.
a. Handstands:
1) “A” VP Handstands and Headstands do not require a hold for any Division. Any “B” VP or higher
handstand requires a 2-second hold if noted within the Table of Elements.
2) Cross handstands with the same entrance & exit, regardless of angle achieved are considered the
Same skill.
3) Cross handstands and Side handstands are considered different elements for all Divisions.
4) Vertical Handstands: Handstands that are within 10° of Vertical will receive SR credit and a 0.10
deduction applied for amplitude.
2. SR credit will be awarded for Cross and Side split leaps or jumps that are within 20° of the Division’s specified
split angle. A deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split will be applied.
3. Restricted elements receive a deduction of 0.50 each and do not receive VP or SR credit.
a. Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, not based on the
quality/amplitude of the performance.
4. More than one Special Requirement may be fulfilled by one Skill/Value Part, unless otherwise specified.

IV. DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS

A. Restricted Elements: Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points not
based on the quality/amplitude of the performance.
B. If a restricted element is performed: (All Divisions)
1. Deduct 0.50 from SV
2. Do not award Value Part credit
3. The element cannot be used to fulfill Special Requirements
a. If a restricted element is competed as the dismount, also deduct 0.30 for No Dismount.
4. All appropriate execution and amplitude deductions would be applied to all elements, whether or not they
receive Value Part credit.
DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS BY DIVISION
Division Restrictions
Only “A” elements are allowed with the following restrictions.
• Restrictions: The following “A” VPs are NOT Allowed in the Bronze Division:
o Salto or Aerial Dismounts
o Walkovers
Bronze
• “B” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed with the following exceptions:
o Cross Split Jump (any angle) = “A”
o Straddle Jump (any angle) = “A”
o Split leap (any angle) = “A”
Only “A” elements, and “B” Dance elements are allowed.
Silver • “B” Acro elements are NOT allowed.
• “C” or higher elements are NOT allowed.
Only “A” elements, and “B” elements are allowed.
Gold
• “C” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed.
Only “A”, “B” elements, and “C” Dance elements are allowed.
Platinum • “C” or higher Acro elements are NOT allowed.
• “D” or higher elements are NOT allowed.
Only “A”, “B”, “C” and one (1) “D” elements are allowed. No bonus is awarded for a “D” element.
Diamond • More than one “D” element is NOT allowed.
• “E” elements are NOT allowed.

BALANCE BEAM - 3
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

V. ROUTINE EXAMPLES

The following provides sample beam routines for each Division. The Value part (VP) and Special Requirement (SR) is
provided for each routine element as applicable.

• In some instances, there are multiple elements within the routine which may fulfill one special requirement. The first
element to fulfill the special requirement is noted with the special requirement.
• *Other Mounts: Any mount not listed in the Code is considered an “A”
• Elements with a “+” indicates a connection/series.
• Split angle: For leaps and jumps with a split angle the element number is listed and noted that it is considered an “A”
VP for that level. – See Recognition of Value Parts – Leaps and Jumps, and Balance Beam Elements -Group 2 –
Leaps, jumps, and hops (limited by division).

BRONZE – ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Front support mount *Other Mount A
Bridge hold 1 second 5.003 A SR3 • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
1 Straight jump 2.108 A SR2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Pivot turn 3.001 A SR1 • Start Value - 10.0
Straddle jump dismount 9.001 A SR4
Straddle/side split mount 1.104 A
• Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Lever to touch the beam 5.001 A SR3 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
2 2.202 (Considered A SR2 • Start Value - 10.0
Cross straddle jump to 90° an “A” VP)
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1 2.202 Considered an “A” VP
Round off dismount 9.103 A SR4
Jump to squat on mount 1.106 A
Pivot Turn 3.001 A SR1
2.201 (Considered A SR2
Split Leap (60°) an “A” VP) • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
3 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Cartwheel 7.103 A SR3 • Start Value - 10.0
Cartwheel to partial handstand to A SR4
45° from vertical land facing the 9.002
beam
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
to
Jump front support leg swing over • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR3 the
to straddle sit mount *Other Mount A
Handstand Forward roll is a restricted “B” VP and
Pivot turn Restricted
3.001 A SR1 therefore does not receive SR credit
No • Meet Value Parts – Yes -Any mount other than what
1 Handstand forward roll is explicitly listed in Group 1 mounts is considered an
(6.203) VP “A”, therefore, this “A” helps to fulfill the VP credit
Tuck jump 2.110 A SR2 • Start Value – 9.00 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50 for
to squat
Tuck jump
Jump dismount
through mount 9.001 A SR4 Restricted Element)
1.106 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR2 –
Pivot turn 3.001 A SR1 The jump to squat through on the mount nor the
straddle jump dismount count, as the jump must start
2 Headstand with legs
Scale (2 second hold)straddled 5.107 A SR3 and finish on the beam
5.101 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Straddle jump dismount 9.001 A SR4 • Start Value – 9.5 (0.50 for missing SR)
Jump single leg shoot through *Other Mount A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 1 –
Turn must be on one or two feet.
½ turn in prone position 3.107 A
• Meet Value Parts – Yes
3 Backward shoulder roll 6.104 A SR3
• Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for each missing SR)
Straight Jump ¼ turn 2.108 (root skill) A SR2 Note: For the straight jump ¼ turn- the root element is a
Front handspring dismount 9.101 A SR4 straight jump – 2.108

BALANCE BEAM - 4
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

SILVER - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Jump squat on mount 1.106 A
Partial handstand – legs close at 45° 5.002 A SR3 • Meet Special Requirements- Yes, SR2- Elements
from vertical within 20° of the split angle will receive SR and VP
2.201 (Considered credit. Silver requirement is 90° - an up to 0.20 split
1 Split jump (80°) an A SR2 angle deduction may be taken.
“A” VP)
½ turn on one foot 3.003 A SR1 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
• Start Value - 10.0
Cartwheel to handstand (mark), ¼ 9.003 A SR4
turn dismount
Leg swing over beam to straddle sit *Other Mount A
Cartwheel 7.103 A SR3
• Meet Special Requirements – Yes
2.201 (Considered
2. Split leap (90°) an “A” VP) ASR2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
• Start Value - 10.0
Full turn 3.101 A SR1
Front tuck dismount 9.104 A SR4
Front support mount, leg swing to A SR1
*Other Mount
straddle sit
Back walkover 7.201 A SR3
• Meet Special Requirements – Yes
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 3.101 A SR1
3 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Straight jump 2.108 A • Start Value - 10.0
2.201 (Considered
Split jump (90°) an “A” VP) A SR2
Standing back tuck dismount 9.106 A SR4
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Pullover to front support on beam 1.109 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 1 –
Headstand 5.107 A SR3 The pivot turn is not a turn on one foot.
Pivot turn No VP • Meet Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” VP - the pivot
1 turn is not an “A” for Silver
2.201 (Considered
Split jump (90°) an A SR2 • Start Value – 9.4 (0.50 for missing SR, and 0.10 for
“A” VP)
Tuck jump dismount 9.001 A SR4 missing “A”)

Front support mount *Other Mount A

Double stag jump 2.101 A
Cartwheel 7.103 A SR3 • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 2 –
½ turn in coupé (on one foot) 3.003 A SR1 the front leg must be extended in the split position
2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Straight jump 2.108 A
Partial handstand – feet closed at • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
5.002 A
45° from vertical
Straddle jump dismount 9.001 A SR4
Jump to side straddle split mount 1.104 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 3 –
Dive cartwheel 7.203 No The dive cartwheel is a flight element. The SR is non
(Restricted – “B”) VP flight. This element is also restricted.
3 Split leap 90° 2.201 (Considered • Meet Value Parts – No, the dive cartwheel is a “B”
an “A” VP) ASR2 Acro – which is restricted at Silver
Heel snap ½ turn 3.003 A SR1 • Start Value – 8.90 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50 for
9.108 restricted element, 0.10 for missing “A” VP)
Gainer back tuck / side of the beam A SR4

BALANCE BEAM - 5
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

GOLD - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
From side, jump to straddle stand mount 1.104 A
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Straight jump + 2.108 A
Split jump 120° 2.201 (Considered SR2 • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
1 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
an “A” VP)
• Start Value - 10.0
Handstand to vertical 5.106 A
SR3
Cartwheel 7.103 A
Front tuck dismount 9.104 A SR4
Jump to forward roll at end of beam 1.107
A
mount
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Partial handstand – legs close 45° from
5.002 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
vertical SR3
2. • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Back walkover 7.104 A • Start Value - 10.0
Cat leap 2.109 A
2.201 (Considered SR2
Split leap 120° A
an “A” VP)
Back tuck dismount 9.106 A SR4
Leg swing over to straddle sit mount *Other Mount A
1 ½ turn on one leg 3.201 B SR1
Tuck jump + 2.110 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes, SR2
2.201 (Considered SR2 Elements within 20° of the split angle will
Split jump 100° A
3 an “A” VP) receive SR credit. Gold requirement is 120°
Handstand to vertical 5.106 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
SR3 • Start Value - 10.0
Forward roll 7.103 A
Front salto stretched (from 2 feet)
9.204 B SR4
dismount
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
From side, jump to straddle stand mount 1.104 A
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Straight jump + 2.108 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, SR3- Need
two acro elements
1 2.201 (Considered SR2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Split jump 120° A
an “A” VP) • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Round off 7.203 B
Front tuck dismount 9.104 A SR4
Leg swing over to straddle sit *Other Mount A
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Tuck Jump 2.110 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR
2 – Neither jump shows the split requirement of
Wolf Jump 2.111 A 120°
2
Back walkover 7.104 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Partial handstand – legs close 45° from SR3 • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
5.002 A
vertical
Roundoff dismount 9.103 A SR4
Jump to forward roll at end of beam 1.107
A
mount
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR
2.201 (Considered 4 – The dismount is restricted. No SR credit.
Split jump 120° A
an “A” VP) SR2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes, the “B” VP may fulfill
3 the “A” VP requirement
Pike Jump 2.206 B
Handstand to vertical 5.106 A • Start Value – 8.70 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50
1 Arm cartwheel (not in a series) SR3 for restricted element, 0.30 for No Dismount)
7.103 A
Front layout with 360° twist (from 2 feet) 9.304 No
(Restricted - “C”) VP

BALANCE BEAM - 6
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

PLATINUM - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
From side, jump to straddle stand
1.104 A
mount
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Wolf jump + 2.108 A • All Special Requirements- Yes
1 Sissonne to 135° SR2 • All Value Parts – Yes
2.107 A • Start Value - 10.0
Roundoff 7.203 B SR3
Cartwheel + 7.103 A
Back tuck dismount 9.106 A SR4
Jump to stoop through mount 1.106 A
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Straddle (150°) jump + 2.202 B
SR2 • All Special Requirements – Yes
2. Straight Jump 2.108 A All Value Parts – Yes
Handstand forward roll step out + 6.203 B • Start Value - 10.0
SR3
Cartwheel 7.103 A
Front Pike dismount 9.104 A SR4
Front support mount *Other Mount A
Cartwheel – swing through - + 7.103 A
SR3
Cartwheel 7.103 A
Stretch jump with beat of legs + 2.108 A • All Special Requirements – Yes
3 Tuck jump 2.110 A SR2 • All Value Parts – Yes
Switch leg leap (150°) 2.305 C • Start Value - 10.0
Full turn on one foot (sideways) 3.101 A SR1
Salto forward stretched (from 2 feet)
9.204 B SR4
with ½ turn dismount
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
From side, jump to straddle stand
1.104 A
mount
• All Special Requirements – No, missing SR2, no
Full turnLeap
Switch on one foot
to 155° 3.101 A SR1 dance series
1 2.305 C • All Value Parts – No, missing 1 “A” elements
Back extension roll step out + 6.204 B • Start Value – 9.40 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.10 for
SR3 missing “A” VP)
Back walkover 7.104 A
Front pike dismount 9.104 A SR4
Leg swing over beam to straddle sit *Other Mount A
Valdez + 7.206 B SR3 • All Special Requirements – No, Missing SR4 –
Back walkover 7.104 A Dismount completed is restricted.
Full turn in tuck stand on one foot 3.206 B SR1 • All Value Parts – No, missing “A” element
2
Split leap (160°) + 2.201 B • Start Value – 8.60 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50 for
SR2 restricted element, 0.30 for No Dismount, 0.10 for
Straight jump 2.108 A
missing “A” VP)
9.304 (Restricted No
Front tuck with full twist dismount
– “C”) VP
Jump to forward roll at end of beam
1.107 A
mount
Free forward roll step out + 6.202 B • All Special Requirements – No, missing SR3 - one
element in the series must achieve or pass through
Forward roll 6.101 A
3 vertical (excluding Mount or Dismount)
Split leap (160°) + 2.201 B SR2 • All Value Parts – Yes
Straight
1 ½ turnjump
(540°) 2.108 A • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
3.201 B SR1
Front handspring 1/1 twist dismount 9.201 B SR4

BALANCE BEAM - 7
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

DIAMOND - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Free roll at end of beam (mount) 1.207 B
1 ½ turn on one leg 3.201 B SR1
Back walkover + 7.104 A SR3 • All Special Requirements- Yes
Flic-flac step out 7.208 B • All Value Parts – Yes, higher VP may
1 be used to fulfill lower VP
Switch Leap (180°) + 2.305 C
SR2 • Start Value - 10.0
Straight Jump 2.108 A
Roundoff + 7.203 B
Back layout dismount 9.106 A SR4
Leap to cross split sit mount (1 foot take-off) 1.105 A
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
Split Leap (150°) 2.201 B
Beat jump + 2.108 A SR2 • All Special Requirements – Yes
2. Tuck jump ½ turn 2.210 B • All Value Parts – Yes
Back walkover + 7.104 A • Start Value - 10.0
Back walkover 7.104 A SR3
Roundoff + 7.203 B
Back tuck 1/1 twist dismount 9.206 B SR4
Front support mount *Other Mount A
Tuck jump + 2.110 A
Split jump (180°) SR2
2.201 B
• All Special Requirements – Yes
3. Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
• All Value Parts – Yes
Back walkover + 7.104 A • Start Value - 10.0
Back extension roll 6.204 B SR3
Back handspring step out 7.208 B
Back tuck dismount 9.106 A SR4
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Leap to cross split sit mount (1 foot take-off) 1.105 A
Aerial Cartwheel 7.403 D • All Special Requirements – No,
Cartwheel -swing through + 7.103 A missing SR1- The jump 1/1 turn does
SR3 not fulfill the special requirement
Roundoff 7.203 B
because it is not a turn on 1 foot.
2.410 No
1. Tuck jump 1/1 turn • All Value Parts – Yes
(Restricted -“D”) VP • Restricted Element – Yes, A second
leap (150°)
Split jump (135°)+ 2.201 B “D” element is not allowed
SR2
2.201 B • Start Value – 9.00 (0.50 for missing
Free (aerial) walkover forward from 1 foot SR, 0.50 for restricted element)
9.102 A SR4
dismount
From side, jump to straddle on stand mount 1.104 A
Back walkover + 7.104 A
SR3 • All Special Requirements – No,
Flic-Flac step out 7.208 B
Missing SR2 – no dance series
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1
2. Split leap (180°) • All Value Parts – Yes
2.201 B • Start Value – 9.50 SV (Deduct 0.50 for
Cross straddle jump (165°) + 2.202 B missing SR)
Salto backward tucked 8.303 C
Front 1 ½ salto off end of beam from 2 feet 9.304 C SR4
Jump to press handstand – lower to end in clear 1.210 B
• All Special Requirements – No,
straddle support
Missing SR3 – no acro series - The acro
Front handspring 7.202 B series must start and end on the beam.
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR1 Therefore, the dismount may not be part
3. of an acro series.
Switch leap (180°) + 2.305 C
Split jump (160°) SR2 • All Value Parts – Yes
2.201 B
• Start Value – 9.50 SV (Deduct 0.50 for
Flic-flac two feet 7.210 B
missing SR)
Back tuck dismount 9.106 A SR4

BALANCE BEAM - 8
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

I. RECOGNITION (COUNTING) OF VALUE PARTS (VP)
A. Balance Beam Elements
1. Any Balance Beam Element listed in the Xcel Code of Points may receive VP credit two (2) times in an exercise,
provided that the element occurs in a different connection (i.e., preceded or followed by a different element).
a. Any element that is listed in the Xcel Code of Points is given the value that is listed even if it is different than
the value listed in the Development Program Code of Points.
2. If a Dance or Acro is performed that cannot be specifically found in the Xcel Code of Points, the Judge may
award comparable Value Part credit if they can recognize the “root” element. This would include variations of
leg position, as well as landing position of any previously valued leap / jump / hop.
3. Any new element not listed in the Xcel Code of Points:
a. Must be evaluated by the Regional Technical Committee Chair and the Regional Xcel Committee Chair.
b. Element Evaluation Forms can be found on the [Link] website in the Forms section under
Women.
c. A copy of this evaluation must be presented to the Meet Referee or Chief Judge prior to the competition in
order to insure proper awarding of difficulty.
d. Evaluations will be valid for one current Xcel quadrennium (Xcel quadrennium begins August 1 two years
following the Summer Olympics and ends four years later on July 31) and will be posted on Regional
websites.
4. If the same element is performed a third time, or is performed a second time in the exact same connection:
a. The VP credit is not awarded.
1) Exception: VP credit can be awarded for an element that is performed for the third time, IF it was not
previously awarded VP credit because:
• The element lacked completion the first or second time it was performed, OR
• The element was performed in the exact same connection the second time performed.
b. All applicable execution and amplitude deductions are applied.
c. It cannot be used to fulfill SR. An element must receive VP credit in order to fulfill SR.
Examples
Flic-flac step-out
“B” – STOP - flic-flac step-out / straddle jump - flic-flac step-out
1. No VP “B”
Back walkover step-out, STOP, Back walkover step-out, Back walkover step-out connected
2. “A” “A” No VP
(No SR for an Acro Series)
5. In the attempt to perform any element that is required to land on the feet first, the gymnast must land on any
part of the bottom of the foot / feet first to receive VP credit.
a. If the hands and bottom of the feet land simultaneously, award VP credit and deduct 0.50 for the fall.
b. If the gymnast fails to land on the bottom of the feet first, VP credit is not awarded, and a 0.50 deduction is
taken for the fall.
1) Exceptions:
• If gymnast attains vertical in a mount including a vertical handstand and falls off without touching a
foot/body part to the top of the beam, VP credit is still awarded.
• Press handstand to vertical within the exercise that falls off without touching a foot/body part to the
top of the beam will also receive VP credit.
6. When performing a handstand involving more than one position, such as a Planche moving to a Reverse
Planche, only one (1) VP will be awarded, unless the gymnast returns to a sitting or standing support on the
beam in between the different positions.
7. Acro elements such as rolls, cartwheels and walkovers that have an optional ending position not specifically
listed in the Xcel Code of Points are still eligible for Acro VP credit.

BALANCE BEAM - 9
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

B. Elements Considered Different:

In the following instance, elements will be considered different for the counting of VP.
1. If they have a different number in the Xcel Code of Points / Xcel Updates.
2. If they have the same number in the Xcel Code of Points / Xcel Updates, but meet the following criteria:
a. If mount elements are performed as elements within the exercise.
b. If the element is performed with different degrees of turn (1/2, 1/1, 1½).
1) The addition of a ¼ turn does not make an element different, unless specifically listed in the Xcel
Code of Points / Xcel Updates.
c. If the support is on one or both arms.
d. If saltos are performed with different body positions.
e. If the take-off for a leap / jump / hop is from one or both legs.
f. If the Acrobatic elements (with or without flight) take-off or land on one or both legs.
g. An Acro element that lands directly in a kneeling position on the first leg.
h. If the handstand is performed in different direction on the beam (Cross vs Side)
1) Cross handstands and Side handstands are considered a different elements for all Divisions.

Examples of Elements Considered Different for the Counting of VP

Criteria Example
If mount elements are performed as • Press handstand performed as a mount and later in the exercise.
elements within the exercise. Both would receive “B” VP.
If the element is performed with different • #2.108 Straight Jump and Straight jump with ½ turn are different
degrees of turn (½, 1/1, 1½). elements due to the degree of turn.
one
If theortake-off
both legs.
for a leap / jump / hop is from • #2.201 Split leap w/ ¼ turn and Split jump w/ ¼ turn will be
considered different elements.
• #7.202 Front handspring step-out and front handspring to two feet
are considered as different elements and both will receive “B”
If the Acrobatic elements (with or without
credit.
flight) take-off or land on one or both legs.
• #5.106 Cross Handstand step-down to lunge and Side Handstand
straddle down are considered as different elements.
If the Acro element lands directly in a • #7.104 Back walkover and right back walkover that lowers down
kneeling position on the first leg. onto the right knee.
C. Elements Considered the Same: In the following instance, elements listed under the same number will be
considered the same:
1. Elements with the same number but performed with different leg positions will be considered the same element.
2. The partial handstand and vertical handstand are considered the same element.
a. Cross handstands with the same entrance & exit, regardless of the angle achieved, are considered the
same Skill.
3. The following landings (exits) of an Acro element are all considered the same element:
a. Step-out on first foot to stand.
b. Step-out on first foot to a lunge.
c. Step-out on the first foot to kneel on the second (back) leg.
Examples of Elements Considered the Same for the Counting of VP
Criteria Example
Elements with the same number but • #2.108 Stretched jump with or without arch and stretched jump with
performed with different leg positions change / beat of legs are considered the same “A” element.
Exits
stand,
on second
ofstep-out
an leg)
Acrotoelement
lunge, step-out
(Step-outtotokneel • Back Walkover that steps down on the first leg to kneel on the
second leg is considered the same element as a Back Walkover
that steps down on one foot after the other to a stand or lunge.

D. All Acro elements must start and finish on the beam to receive Special Requirement credit.
1. Mounts
a. Acro elements performed as a mount will receive Value Part credit.
b. Acro Mounts cannot be used to fulfill an Acro Special Requirement.

BALANCE BEAM - 10
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

E. Considerations for awarding Value Part credit when a Fall occurs:

1. When the gymnast completes an element by landing, making contact with the bottom of the feet / foot on the top
on the beam, but then falls:
a. Value Part credit is awarded.
b. Special Requirements are fulfilled, if applicable.
c. If the fall occurs on the second element in an Acro or Dance Series, the Special Requirement is fulfilled.
d. Deduct for execution and amplitude errors, in addition to the 0.50 deduction for the fall, but not the balance
errors which resulted in the fall.
2. If the gymnast does not land or make contact with the bottom of the feet / foot on the top of the beam at all:
a. Value Part credit is not awarded.
b. Special Requirement credit is not awarded.
c. If the fall occurs on the second element in an Acro or Dance Series, the Special Requirement is not fulfilled.
d. Deductions for execution and amplitude errors are taken in addition to the 0.50 deduction for the fall.
e. Exception to a, b, and c above are mounts that achieve vertical and a press handstand to vertical within the
routine.
3. If the gymnast fails to land on the bottom of the feet / foot first on the Dismount:
a. Value Part credit is not awarded.
b. Dismount Special Requirement credit is not awarded.
c. If Salto action was initiated, do not deduct 0.30 for No Dismount from the Start Value.
d. If No Salto action was initiated, deduct 0.30 for No Dismount from Start Value.
e. Deductions for execution and amplitude errors are taken, in addition to the 0.50 deduction for the fall.

F. Required Technique for the Recognition of Value Parts

1. Leg positions, posture / body position, and/or amplitude requirements as indicated in the Xcel Code of Points /
Xcel Updates must be fulfilled in order to award the Value Part as listed.
2. In some cases, appropriate execution and amplitude deductions would be taken rather than recognizing it as a
different element.
3. Turns of 360° or more on one(1) foot and leaps / jumps / hops with Turns of 360° or more:
a. Missing degree of turn:

INCOMPLETE TURN - TURNS OF 360° OR MORE

Missing Degree of Turn Deduction VP Credit
If missing 1° to 44° of the turn Deduct 0.05 – 0.10 Award VP
If missing 45° to 89° of the turn Deduct 0.15 – 0.20 Award VP credit
If missing 90° or more of the Award VP credit for the
turn element performed

b. Deductions for balance, execution and amplitude errors are also applied.
c. Clarification regarding completion of turns: Once the heel drops onto the beam during a turn, it is considered
complete. Appropriate Value Part credit is awarded for the degree of turn completed prior to the heel drop.
4. Turns of less than 360° on one (1) or two (2) feet and Jumps/Leaps/Hops with less than 360° Turn
a. Jumps, leaps, and hops that have values based upon less than a 360° Turn (example, tuck jump ¾), the
gymnast must finish a minimum of 1° past the halfway mark between the two Value Parts.
1) Examples:
• A ½ turn on one or two feet must finish at a minimum of 91° to receive VP and SR credit.
2) Since there is a Value Part listed for the tuck jump ½, ¾, and 1/1 on Beam, the degree of Turn
completion, upon landing determines the value awarded.
• If the Turn is completed to within 44° or less of the designated degree of turn, it is awarded the
higher Value Part.
(i) In order to receive the higher value, the turn must be finished closer to the higher degree of
turn.
b. Execution deductions for incomplete turn are applied.

BALANCE BEAM - 11
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

5. Holds
a. “A” VP Handstands and Headstands do not require a hold for any Division. Any “B” VP or higher handstand
requires a 2-second hold if noted within the Table of Elements.
b. If an element requiring a hold is not held for 2 seconds, award the value of the root element.
1) Example: #1.311 Press to Side Handstand – Lower to Planche.
• If the Planche position is not held for 2 seconds, award “B” VP credit for the Press Handstand.
c. Exception: #5.003 Bridge from laying position - A bridge from a lying position requires only a one second
hold.
6. Leaps and Jumps
a. For VP and SR credit each Division has a specific required minimum Degree of Split for leaps and jumps
with a cross or side split. This split angle is specified in the Division’s dance SR (SR #2) and listed in Group
2 Elements.
b. Deficiency of up to 20° from the Division-specific required Split is allowed to still receive VP and SR credit
but a deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split is applied.
c. Lower VP or NO VP credit (as applicable) would be given for the element if the Split is more than 20° from
the required split angle in the Division.
d. To receive “B”, “C” or “D” Value Part as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, a Leap or Jump requiring a 180°
cross or side split must show a minimum of 135°split.
1) A split below 135° and within 20° of the SR requirement for the Division will receive an “A” Value Part.
2) If the Division split angle is not met, award VP or No VP for the skill actually performed.
e. Examples:
1) Split Jump in the Silver Division the split requirement is 90°
• If the gymnast has less than 70° leg separation, the Split Jump will be considered a Stretch Jump
“A” Value Part credit and will not receive Special Requirement credit for a Split Jump.
2) Split Leap in the Platinum Division the split requirement is 120°
• If the gymnast has between 100° - 119° leg separation, the split leap will receive VP credit and
will fulfill the split angle portion of the Special Requirement credit with an up to 0.20 deduction.
3) Cross Straddle Jump (#2.202) in the Platinum Division achieves less than 135° Split, “B” Value Part is
not awarded.
• If the split angle is within the 20°of the Division’s Split angle requirement of 120°, award an “A”
VP credit for the straddle jump.
• If the split angle is less than 100°, award an “A” VP for a Stretched Jump.

7. Flight Elements
a. A flight element that fails to show flight (a moment when both the hands and feet are free of the beam) is
awarded Value Part credit for the actual element performed.
1) Example: Flic-flac performed with no flight is recognized as a back walkover and awarded “A” Value
Part.
BALANCE BEAM - 12
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

8. Salto Dismounts
a. Twisting Saltos (Incomplete long axis (LA) turn / twist):

INCOMPLETE LA TURN - TWISTING SALTO DISMOUNTS

Missing Degree of Twist Deduction VP Credit
If missing 1° to 44° of the twist Deduct 0.05 – 0.10 Award VP credit
If missing 45° to 89° of the twist Deduct 0.15 – 0.20 Award VP credit
If missing 90° or more of the twist Award VP credit for the element performed

b. Example:
1) Gymnast attempts a 1½ twist dismount (“C”) and is missing 90° of the twist.
• Award “B” Value Part credit for a full twist.
• Deductions for any balance, execution and amplitude errors are also applied.
c. Clarification regarding the completion of Twists: The placement of the front foot upon landing is decisive in
determining the amount of twist completed for the awarding of Value Part credit.
d. Incomplete Breadth Axis (BA turn) Salto
1) Any Salto Dismount that does not land with the bottom of the feet first does not receive VP or SR
credit.
• Do not deduct 0.30 for No Dismount from the Start Value, unless no salto action was initiated.
• If the gymnast lands on the feet and hands or the feet and buttocks simultaneously, then give the
benefit of the doubt to the gymnast and award Value Part credit.

G. Specific Element Technique Clarifications

1. Elements must “achieve or pass through inverted vertical” for SR #3 (Gold, Platinum, and Diamond)
a. This element need only reach/achieve vertical (hips over shoulders) as in a handstand or headstand.
b. This element does not need to be held.
c. A partial handstand will not fulfill SR because it does not reach vertical.
d. An element used to fulfill this SR may also “pass through” vertical as in a back walkover or cartwheel.
2. Any Vertical Handstand:
a. The body must be within 10° of vertical, with hips over the shoulders in a balanced position to be recognized
as a Vertical Handstand.
1) Handstands that are within 10° of Vertical will receive SR credit and a 0.10 deduction applied for
amplitude.
2) The legs may be together or in a split, straddle, stag, or double-stag position.
3) “A” VP Handstands do not require a hold for any Division. Any “B” VP or higher handstand requires a
2-second hold if noted within the Table of Elements.
4) If applicable, recognize the actual VP performed (i.e., Partial Handstand)
b. A press handstand and handstand elements with turn performed within the exercise also do not require 2
second hold to receive VP credit.
c. If the gymnast attains vertical in a mount including a vertical handstand and falls off without touching a
foot/body part to the top of the beam, VP credit is still awarded.
1) Press handstand to vertical within the exercise that falls off without touching a foot/body part to the
top of the beam will also receive VP credit.
d. Any handstand within the exercise can be used as the first or second element in an Acro Series for all
Divisions.
e. Handstands as a Mount may not be used as the first element of an Acro Series.
f. Partial handstands must meet requirements as stated in the Table of Elements.
3. #2.110 Tuck Jump (“A”)
a. Both knees should be at horizontal or above, with a 90° angle at the hips and knees.
b. If the knees are lower than horizontal and/or there is greater than 90° angle at the knees, deduct up to 0.20
(up to 0.10 for each error).
c. If there is a greater than 135° angle at the hips and greater than 90° at the knee, then award credit for the
actual VP performed. Consider it an “A” Stretch Jump with abstract leg position.

BALANCE BEAM - 13
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

4. #2.111 Wolf Hop (“A”) or Wolf Jump (“A”)

a. There is no specific angle of closure required. The criteria for VP consideration is that both the extended
leg and the thigh of the bent leg are at or above horizontal and the knees are together.
b. If the extended leg or the thigh of the bent leg is below horizontal, deduct up to 0.10 for each error.
c. If there is a greater than 135° angle at the hips and greater than 90° at the knee, then award credit for the
actual VP performed; consider it an “A” Stretch jump with abstract leg position.
d. The Wolf Jump must have a 2-foot take-off but may land on either 1 foot or 2 feet.
e. A forward lean of the body is acceptable during the jump.
5. Split Jump (#2.201) vs. Sissonne (#2.107)
a. Cross Split Jump has a 2-foot take-off and landing, while the Sissonne has a 2-foot take-off and a 1-foot
landing.
b. Cross Split Jump shows the required split (for the Division) with legs even in the split, parallel to the beam.
c. The Sissonne also must show the required split of the legs (for the Division); however, the legs are in a
diagonal position with the front leg forward downward at a minimum of 45° from the beam and the back leg
backward-upward.
1) The front leg must be a minimum of 45° from the beam; if not, deduct up to 0.10 for insufficient
amplitude of the front leg.
6. #2.202 / #2.302 Straddle Jump or side-Split Jump, also with ¼ (90°) turn
a. Straddle Jump or Side-Split Jump in cross position is awarded “B” Value Part credit (#2.202)
1) Exception: Bronze Division receives “A” Value Part credit.
2) From cross stand, a Straddle Jump or side-Split Jump that shows the straddle position while facing
the end of beam and then ¼ turns, closing the legs to finish in a side stand, facing sideward is valued
at “B”. (#2.202)
3) From cross stand, a Straddle Jump or Side-Split Jump that makes a ¼ turn to finish in a straddle pike
or side-split position facing sideward is valued “C”. (#2.302).
b. Straddle Jump or side-Split Jump in side position is awarded “C” Value Part credit (#2.302).
1) From side position, a Straddle Jump or side-Split Jump that shows the straddle position while facing
sideward, then ¼ turns, closing the legs Straddle Jump or Side-Split Jump is valued at a “C” (2.302)
2) From side position, a Straddle jump or side-Split Jump that makes a ¼ turn to show a straddle or
side-split position while facing the end of beam is valued at “B” (#2.202).
7. #2.206 Pike Jump in Cross (B) or #2.306 Pike Jump in Side position (“C”)
a. In order to receive “B” or “C” VP credit, the only specific requirement is a minimum of 90° closure. The legs
are not required to be at horizontal; however, deductions for lack of height (amplitude) of the jump may be
applied.
8. #2.305 Split Leap forward with leg change (Switch-Leg Leap) (“C”)
a. First leg should swing forward to a minimum of 45° prior to swinging backward to the required degree of
split.
1) If the first leg does not reach 45°, award “C” VP credit and deduct up to 0.10 for insufficient height of
leg swing.
2) If there is insufficient split after the leg change, apply deductions for insufficient split.
3) If the gymnast performs a Stag-Switch Leg Leap – stag indicates that the first (swing) leg is bent a
minimum of 90° with no extension of the leg prior to the leg switch – award “A” VP credit.
9. #3.206 / #3.306 / #3.406 Turns in tuck stand
a. Turn is completed when the support foot and hips have reached 360° rotation and the free leg touches the
beam.
b. If the foot of the free leg lands on the beam prior to the full rotation of the support foot and hips, the turn is
considered as completed when the free foot touches the beam.
c. Deduct accordingly to the degree of rotation of the support foot and hips, at the time when free leg touches
the beam.
10. #3.303 1/1 (360°) Turn with heel of free leg forward At or Above Horizontal throughout the Turn (“C”)
a. The gymnast must have time (up to 45° - 1/8th of the turn) to quickly lift the leg into position without
deduction. The free leg may be bent or extended, but the entire leg must be at a minimum of horizontal to
receive “C” Value Part credit.
b. Once the minimum of horizontal position of the free leg is established, it must be maintained throughout the
turn in order to receive Value Part credit as listed.
c. The free leg may not be supported with the hand in order to maintain the minimum of horizontal position.
See element #3.209 and 3.309 for a variation of the full turn holding the leg with the hand.
d. If the correct leg position is missing for more than 45° of the turn or is not maintained throughout the
BALANCE BEAM - 14
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

remaining 7/8th (315°) of the turn, recognize it as another element, dependent upon the height of the leg
(#3.203) “B” or (#3.101) “A” Value Part credit.
11. #5.306 Reverse Planche (“C”)
a. Legs must be in the same plane, either together or straddled.
b. A handstand with a split position used for counterbalance or any other handstand with overarch and legs
separated receives “B” Value Part credit (#5.206)
12. #7.310 Flic-Flac with ¼ (90°) turn to Side Handstand (“C”)
a. Must show flight to the handstand position, with the body stretched in vertical, leg position optional. 2
second hold is not required.
b. If there is insufficient flight, recognize the element as a back walkover with turn and award appropriate
Value Part credit.
13. #7.312 Tucked Chen Flic (“C”)
a. Must show a 90° angle in both the hips and the knees; then open the legs and body to a stretched position
prior to the swing down.
14. Beam Dismounts #9.209, #9.309 – Gainer Back Saltos off the end of the Beam
a. The required technique is a take-off from one foot, facing outward off the end of the beam, with the salto
performed similar to a reverse dive. The salto rotates backward toward the end of the beam (not along the
side of the beam). If there is a directional error, an up to 0.30 deduction is applied.

II. CLARIFICATIONS REGARDING SERIES

A. Continuous Connection Between Elements: In an Acrobatic, Dance Series, or Mixed Series, the connection
between the elements must be continuous. The landing leg or the free leg of the first element must be the take-off
leg for the next element. If both feet land at the same time, the next element must take off from two feet.
1. Broken Acro Series:
a. Backward Acro Series and Sideward to Backward Acro series with one (1) or more Flight elements is
considered broken whenever there is a delay in the immediate take-off of the second element. Deduct 0.50
for missing the SR, if applicable. This delay could be caused by:
1) Arms moving to thighs or further back after the landing of the first element in the connection.
2) If the second element in the connection is a gainer flic-flac or gainer back layout, the arms are allowed
to continue circling forward-upward and backward-downward without automatically breaking the
connection. The circling action is an inherent arm pattern for the gainer type elements.
3) A cautious slow-moving attempt to connect one or more backward flight elements, or a sideward
element with or without flight to a backward flight element. In this case, the Acro Series would be
considered broken. A rhythm / tempo deduction is not applied.
4) Examples of series that fall under this series connection principle of either connected or not
connected:
• Back walkover to Flic-flac
• Flic-flac to Back Walkover
• Cartwheel to flic-flac
• Round-off to Flic-flac
• Side Aerial to Flic-flac
• Flic-flac to Flic-flac

B. Non-Flight Acro Series (any direction), Acro Flight Series with ONLY Forward and/or Sideward Elements
(minimum of one (1) flight), and Counter Acro Flight Series (minimum of one (1) flight):
1. If there is a lack of tempo / poor rhythm between the elements performed in a Series, apply up to 0.20 for the
lack of tempo between elements.
a. This refers to a continuous, but slow connection in line with the beam.
2. Examples of series that fall under this series connection principle of using a tempo deduction for a continuous,
but slow connection:
a. Non-flight: Back Walkover-Back Walkover, Cartwheel step through - Cartwheel, Front Walkover - Cartwheel
b. Only Forward and/or Sideward (minimum One (1) flight): Front Handspring - Front Walkover, Front
Walkover-Dive Cartwheel, Front Aerial-Cartwheel
c. Counter (minimum One (1) flight): Front Walkover - Flic-flac, Front Handspring - Back Tuck Salto, Flic-flac
step-out step through - Cartwheel or Round- off, Front Tuck Salto - Flic-flac.

BALANCE BEAM - 15
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

C. Dance or Mixed Series:

1. Lack of tempo / poor rhythm between the elements performed in a dance or mixed Series; apply up to 0.20
deduction. This refers to continuous, but slow connection.
2. When evaluating the continuity of a dance connection or a mixed connection of dance to acro, the height of the
free leg at the finish of the first element (such as a cat leap or hitch kick) will not be the sole cause for breaking
the dance or mixed series; however, if the free leg position drops and lifts again or if the trunk stops forward
movement, the series would be considered broken.
3. If the body continues its movement, an arm circle does not necessarily break the connection.

D. All Series are considered broken if any of the following occurs:

1. A stop between the elements.
2. Loss of balance
3. Any deviation of body movement which is NOT in line with the beam.
4. Repositioning of a support leg.
5. Extra step, hop / jump between the elements.
6. If the gymnast lands the first element in plié on two feet, then completely straightens her legs, and pliés again to
initiate the jump into the next element (the straightening of the legs will break the Series).
7. Performing a kick above 45° leading into the second element will break the series.
a. Example: When a cartwheel lands on one leg and the free leg lifts above 45° before stepping into the
second cartwheel, the series is broken.

Note: In any type of Series in which the two elements are exactly the same and the connection is broken, the
second element will not receive VP credit.

E. Some Acro Elements are Inherently “Non-Connectable”

1. The following is an example of an Acro Series that is considered non-connectable, regardless of how quickly the
elements are performed:
2. Example: Back walkover (or flic-flac step-out) to a lunge, then round-off (or cartwheel)
a. In this example, the first element lands in a lunge on two feet. It cannot be connected to the 2nd forward
element for Acro Series credit.
b. The only way these two elements could legitimately connect is by landing the first element on one leg and
stepping through with the second leg into the round-off (or cartwheel).
1) Performing a kick above 45° leading into the second element will break the Series.

F. Repetition of a Failed Series:

1. Examples:
a. Gymnast performs a Flic-flac step-out and stops (or falls), then does a series of two flic-flac step-outs. The
Acro Series SR is not fulfilled because the third flic-flac does not receive VP credit.
b. At Platinum and Diamond: Gymnast attempts two back walkovers, but the second back walkover never
lands on the beam (no VP credit awarded) (A + “0”).
1) If the gymnast then kicks up to a handstand, reaching vertical, then steps down to a back walkover (A
+ A), the series part of the Acro SR has been met.
2) Any handstand (no hold required) that reaches vertical will receive VP and SR credit and may be
used as either the 1st or 2nd skill in the acro series (not if it is the 3rd time performed).

III. APPARATUS SPECIFICATIONS

Refer to the current USA Gymnastics Women’s Rules and Policies book. Requirements are subject to change every
competitive year, beginning August 1.

A. Manufactured Beams:
1. Manufactured Padded Beams required at all USA Gymnastics sanctioned competitions.
2. See Women’s Rules and Policies for Height requirement.
a. Deduct 0.30 for competing on apparatus using incorrect specifications.
b. Chief Judge must take deduction from Average Score before next Gymnast begins.

B. Balance Beam must be placed on floor / stable surface.

BALANCE BEAM - 16
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

C. Small Chalk Marking: Small chalk markings allowed to be place on the Beam / Tape markings are not allowed.

D. Combinations of *Skill Cushions (maximum of 9 inches):

1. *Sting mats / *4-inch Throw mats / *8-inch Skill Cushions may be placed on top of allowable competition landing
mats (9 inches).
2. 8-inch thick Skill Cushion must be minimum of 5’ x 10’.
3. Unauthorized type of matting will receive a deduction of 0.30 from Average Score by Chief Judge.
4. Conversions – Inches to Centimeters: Approx. ¾ inch = 2 cm.

Conversion of Inches to Centimeters

(1 in. = 2.54 cm.)
Inches Centimeters
Approx. ¾ inch 2 cm.
4 inches 10 cm.
8 inches 20 cm.
9 inches 24 cm.
E. Matting Regulations for Mounts
1. Mounts without use of board / other mounting apparatus:
a. May stand on one (1) 12 cm / 20 cm mat or two (2) 12 cm Competition Landing Mats, with / without 1½ inch
base mat (unfolded panel mat).
b. May stand on additional up to 8-inch of mats (Sting mats / 4-inch Throw mats / 8-inch Skill Cushions) placed
on Competition Landing Mat(s).
2. Mounting Apparatus:
a. May be placed on one (1) 12 cm / 20 cm mat or two (2) 12 cm Competition Landing Mats, with / without 1½
inch base mat (unfolded panel mat). Panel mat be placed under / on top of competition landing mat.
b. May be placed on top of Sting mat / 4-inch Throw mat that is placed on Competition Landing Mats.
c. Plywood not permitted underneath mounting apparatus.
d. For all Divisions, a mount trainer/mount mat MAY be placed on an 8-inch skill cushion.
1) A springboard may NOT be placed on an 8-inch skill cushion.
e. Must be removed as soon as possible after mount is completed.
1) Chief Judge deducts 0.30 from Average Score, if mounting apparatus placed on unauthorized surface
(e.g., 8-inch Skill Cushion / floor / plywood).
3. Mounting Apparatus – Exception for Bronze / Silver / Gold Divisions:
a. Any combination of competition landing mats, skill cushions and panel mats may be used to facilitate the
mount.
b. A mount trainer/mount mat, folded panel mat or padded spotting/skill block may be placed on top of the
competition landing mats (CLMs) and skill cushions used for the purpose of mounting.
1) A springboard MAY be used on any combination of Competition Landing Mats, sting mats or 4-inch
skill cushions (throw mat), but a springboard is NOT allowed directly on an 8-inch skill cushion.
2) An Inflatable rebounding device cannot be used for mounting purposes.

IV. ATTIRE REGULATIONS

No attire regulations specific to Balance Beam.

V. TIMING REGULATIONS
A. Touch Warm-Up (When required by meet format)
1. The gymnast is allowed a 30-second touch warm-up time.
a. Marking of the beam, setting of the mounting apparatus, and raising / lowering of the beam are not included
in the 30-second touch warm-up time.
b. A warning will be called with 10 seconds remaining. Time will be called at 30 seconds.
c. If the gymnast continues to warm-up after a warning is issued, the Chief Judge deducts 0.20 from the
average score.
1) Note: If the gymnast is preparing for an element, allow her to complete the element / series /
dismount.
2. Immediately prior to performing the exercise, the gymnast may run and jump onto the mounting apparatus, or

BALANCE BEAM - 17
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

briefly touch the apparatus without penalty.

a. If the gymnast practices an actual element on the mat after the signal from the Chief Judge, it is considered
exceeding the warm-up time and the Chief Judge applies a deduction of 0.20 from the Average Score.
b. Example: Chief Judge signals gymnast to begin; gymnast does a flic-flac on the mat and then mounts.
Chief Judge deducts 0.20 from the Average for exceeding the warm-up time. No warning is issued. All
elements, including the dismount, performed after the final time signal will be evaluated.

B. Timing of the Exercise

1. The evaluation and timing of Beam begins with the take-off from the board or mat.
a. This refers to running mounts, such as saltos, as well as mounts from stand.
b. Time is stopped when the gymnast arrives on the mat at the completion of her dismount.
c. If the gymnast falls from the beam, the routine watch is stopped.
d. Following a fall, the evaluation and timing of the routine resumes with the first movement to continue the
routine (choreography or movement).
1) Exception: Additional fall while remounting the beam will receive an additional 0.50 deduction.
2. If the gymnast is on the Beam or in the air at the final time signal, the Judges continue to evaluate the exercise.
All elements performed after the final time signal will be evaluated.
a. The Chief Judge deducts 0.10 for Over Time from the Average Score. This deduction MUST be indicated to
the Coach either verbally or by visual means.
b. No Over Time deduction is taken if the time is within a fraction of a second over the time allotment.
1) Example: Routine is clocked at 1:15.01 to 1:15.99 (less than 1:16) for Platinum or Diamond. Do not
take the Over Time deduction.
c. Value Parts and Special Requirements are awarded.
3. The warning and final time signal should be a special device such as a bell, whistle, or gong.
a. If this is unavailable, a verbal “Warning” and “Time” must be audible to the gymnast.
b. It is the responsibility of the Chief Judge to review the timing procedures with the Timers.
4. Courtesy Score of 4.00 may be awarded for an extremely Short Routine due to injury or unusual circumstances.
a. No routine will be awarded less than 4.00.
b. Common sense should prevail.

TIMING OF THE EXERCISE

Division Maximum Time Limit Warning Signal @
Bronze 45 seconds 35 seconds
Silver 50 seconds 40 seconds
Gold 1 minute 50 seconds
Platinum 1 minute 15 seconds 1 minute 5 seconds
Diamond 1 minute 15 seconds 1 minute 5 seconds

VI. BEAM FALL REGULATIONS

A. During the fall, the coach may speak to the gymnast without penalty. Once the gymnast remounts, the coach
may not give verbal assistance without penalty.

B. The gymnast is allowed 45 seconds to re-mount the beam once she is standing up on her feet after a fall.
The Fall Time must be timed separately; therefore, two watches are necessary.
C. If the gymnast does not re-mount within 45 seconds, the exercise is terminated.
1. The fall time begins when the gymnast is standing on her feet after the fall to the mat.
2. The 45-second fall period stops when the gymnast leaves the floor to re-mount in preparation to resume her
routine.

D. While the gymnast is off the apparatus following a fall:

1. The Fall Timer gives notification of “20 seconds remaining” and “10 seconds remaining” in the Fall Time. “Time”
is called at 45 seconds.
2. If the 45-second Fall Time is exceeded, the exercise is Terminated.
BALANCE BEAM - 18
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

3. If the gymnast leaves the apparatus (Terminates the Exercise early, intentionally or due to a Fall):
a. Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the Dismount Special Requirement.
b. Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for No Dismount.
c. Deduct 0.50 for the Fall from the apparatus, if applicable.
d. Courtesy Score of 4.00 may be awarded for an extremely Short routine due to injury or unusual
circumstances. No routine will be awarded less than 4.00. Common sense should prevail.

E. If after a fall off the beam, the gymnast attempts to re-mount the beam and falls again (prior to the timing of
the routine resuming), the deduction will be an additional 0.50 for the second fall.

F. Warm-up during a fall: If, after a fall, the gymnast performs an element on the mat prior to re-mounting, the Chief
Judge takes a deduction of 0.20 from the Average Score for additional warm-up. No warning is required.

VII. SPOTTING REGULATIONS

A. If the coach assists/spots the gymnast during an element:
1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. If the gymnast falls after the spot, an additional 0.50 deduction is taken for the fall.
3. No VP credit awarded.
4. No SR credit awarded.
5. If the spot occurs on the dismount element, even though it receives no VP credit, do not deduct 0.30 from the
Start Value for no dismount.

B. If the coach spots the gymnast upon landing of the dismount:

1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. If the gymnast falls after the spot, an additional 0.50 is taken for the fall.
3. VP credit is awarded.
4. SR credit is awarded.

C. If the coach inadvertently touches the gymnast without assisting:

1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. VP credit is awarded.
3. SR credit is awarded.

D. If the coach catches a falling gymnast, do not deduct for the spot; deduct 0.50 for the fall ONLY.

E. There is no penalty if the gymnast inadvertently touches the coach.

F. When a raised surface is necessary for spotting release moves: It is recommended that a spotting block or
folded mat be used; however, there is no penalty for the coach standing on the mounting apparatus, provided that
the mounting apparatus (or spotting device) is removed immediately after the element is performed.
1. If the spotting device is not removed, the Chief Judge takes a deduction of 0.30 from the Average Score.
2. The coach may not use chairs or other items that are not produced by a gymnastics supply company to stand
on for spotting purposes.
a. A warning should be given. If the coach continues to use an inappropriate item to stand on, then a 0.30
deduction for use of unauthorized equipment should be taken.

G. The Coach may stand by the Beam during the entire exercise without penalty.

VIII. MOUNT AND DISMOUNT REGULATIONS

A. Mounts
1. See Beam Chapter 3, III. Apparatus Specifications for specific information on allowable matting for mounts.
a. The gymnast may use a springboard to mount or may mount from the mat(s) as described in the Apparatus
Specifications section.
2. The mounting apparatus or spotting block / mat must be removed as soon as possible after the gymnast has
mounted. If not removed, the Chief Judge takes a 0.30 deduction from the Average Score.

BALANCE BEAM - 19
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

3. Mounts that are preceded by one (1) element prior to take-off from the mounting apparatus will be allowed.
Only the movement done after the feet leave the mounting apparatus will be evaluated.
4. Mount Attempts
a. The gymnast may have two (2) Attempts to mount the Beam without penalty, provided that she has not
touched the mounting apparatus and/or Beam or run underneath the Beam on either attempt. Such an
Attempt without mounting is considered a “Balk.”
b. If the gymnast balks two times, she may take one more approach; however, on the third attempt, each judge
takes a 0.50 deduction.
c. A Fourth Approach is not permitted

Examples
Mount Attempts Deduction
a. Attempt #1: Runs, balks, no mount performed
No Deduction
Attempt #2: Run, mount performed
b. Attempt #1: Run, balk, no mount performed
Attempt #2: Run, balk, no mount performed Each judge deducts 0.50 for third approach.
Attempt #3: Runs, performs a mount
c. Attempt #1: Run, balk, no mount performed
Attempt #2: Run, balk, no mount performed
Each judge deducts 0.50 for third approach.
Attempt #3: Run, balk, no mount performed
A fourth attempt is not allowed.

d. If the gymnast runs and touches the mounting apparatus and/or Beam or runs underneath the Beam without
mounting, a 0.50 deduction is applied (considered a Fall).
e. If the gymnast is attempting a Round-off entry mount, and performs only the Round-off, she may repeat the
mount and receive appropriate VP credit. A 0.50 deduction for a Fall will be applied, since she made
contact with the board, which is considered part of the apparatus.

B. Dismounts
1. All elements, including the Dismount, performed after the final time signal will be evaluated.
2. If a gymnast performs a Dismount that does not meet her Division criteria from the Xcel Code of Points:
a. Deduct 0.50 for missing the Dismount Special Requirement.
b. Do not deduct 0.30 for No Dismount.
3. If a gymnast performs a Dismount of NO VALUE – one that is not listed in the Xcel Code of Points or performs a
Restricted element for the Division:
a. Deduct 0.50 for missing the Dismount Special Requirement.
b. Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for No Dismount.
c. Deduct an additional 0.50 from the Start Value if the Dismount performed is a Restricted element for the
Division.
4. Falls on a Salto Dismount (Silver/Gold/Platinum/Diamond Divisions):
a. If the gymnast never initiates the Salto action, and falls without landing on the bottom of the feet first,
1) Value Part credit is not awarded for the Dismount.
2) Deduct from the Start Value for any missing difficulty requirements, if appropriate.
3) Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the Dismount Special Requirement.
4) Deduct 0.30 from the Start Value for No Dismount.
5) Deduct 0.50 for the Fall.
6) Deduct for any other execution / amplitude errors.
b. If the gymnast initiates the Salto action and falls without landing on the bottom of the feet first,
1) Value Part credit is not awarded.
2) Deduct from the Start Value for any missing difficulty requirements, if appropriate.
3) Deduct 0.50 from the Start Value for missing the Dismount Special Requirement.
4) Deduct 0.50 for the Fall.
5) Deduct for any other execution / amplitude errors.

BALANCE BEAM - 20
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

CHAPTER 3: EXECUTION & ARTISTRY DEDUCTIONS

I. EXECUTION AND ARTISTRY FAULTS
A. Composition deductions are not applied in the Xcel Program.
1. Emphasis is on the performance of allowable skills, not the routine construction.

BALANCE BEAM FAULTS

• Execution deductions CANNOT exceed 4.00. This does not include Artistry or Spotting deductions.
• Courtesy Score of 4.0 may be awarded for an extremely short routine due to injury or unusual
circumstances.
• No routine will be awarded less than 4.0. Common sense should prevail.
each time 0.05 Flexed/sickled feet on Value Part elements
Up to 0.10 Hesitation during jump, swing, or press to handstand
Up to 0.10 Incorrect body posture/alignment during Dance element VP
Lands with Feet Apart
0.05 Failure to join (slide) heels together on controlled extension of dismount landing when feet
are a maximum of hip-width apart
0.10 Lands dismount with feet further than hip-width apart
Clarification: If upon landing with the feet apart / staggered the gymnast takes a step(s), deduct only
for the step(s).
Up to 0.10 Slight hop, small adjustments of feet or staggered feet (one in front of the other) on landing of
elements or dismount
Up to 0.10 Entire foot/feet slide or lift off floor to join on controlled extension of dismount landing when
feet are a maximum of hip-width apart (small step)
each 0.10 Step(s) on landing
Max. 0.40
Up to 0.10 Landing
Deviation from straight direction on landing
Arm swings to maintain balance on landing
Up to 0.10 Dismounts
Legs crossed during salto dismounts with a twist
0.10 Lands too close to the beam on dismount

each up to 0.20 Leg or knee separations

Insufficient Height
up to 0.20 Insufficient Height on leaps, jumps and hops
up to 0.20 Insufficient Height of Aerials, Saltos, & Acro flight with hand support
Insufficient Split Position (see page 10)
Deviation from split degree required for the Division
uportoNo
Award Lesser VP
0.20 • 1° – 20° missing
• 21° or more missing
M each up to 0.20 Legs not parallel to beam in Split or Straddle pike leap/ jump
(U aults
ediumF
.20)
0
pto each up to 0.20 Insufficient exactness of body shape: tuck or pike position in element/VP
each time up to 0.20 Insufficient exactness of stretched position
up to 0.20 • Arch
up to 0.20 • Hip angle (136°-179°)
Dance: Incomplete Turn – Group 2 & 3 elements with 360° or more turn
0.15-0.20
0.05-0.10 • 1° – 44° missing
Award Lesser or No VP • 45° – 89° missing
• 90° or more missing
Dismount: Incomplete Twist on Dismounts with 360° or more turn
0.15-0.20
0.05-0.10 • 1° – 44° missing
• 45° – 89° missing
Award Lesser or No VP • 90° or more missing
up to 0.20 Insufficient Variation in Rhythm and Tempo throughout the exercise
(Medium Faults Continued)

BALANCE BEAM - 21
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM

up to 0.20 Incorrect body posture on landing of elements and dismount

up to 0.20 Additional trunk movements to maintain balance/control upon landing dismount
0.20 (Max. 0.40) Large step or jump on landing (approximately 3 feet or more)
up to 0.20 Insufficient Dynamics throughout exercise
• Energy maintained throughout exercise
• Makes difficult look effortless
up to 0.20 Insufficient Sureness of performance throughout exercise
each up to 0.30 Bent arms in support or bent legs on any one element (90° bend or greater receives 0.30)
Maximum on any one element = 0.30 bent arms & 0.30 bent legs
0.30 Use of Supplemental Support (Examples)
• Foot / Feet remain on mat or board as mount is completed;
• Foot / Feet contact the mat in cross straddle sit during exercise
• Foot / feet using Base of Beam for support on Mount
up to 0.30 Insufficient extension (open) of the body prior to landing of Acro or dismount elements
up to 0.30 Insufficient height (amplitude) of salto dismounts
up to 0.30 Squat on landing (hips even with or lower than the knees)
up to 0.30 Brush/touch of one or both hands on the landing mat (no support)
0.50 Third run approach on mount
0.50 Support on mat with 1 or 2 hands upon landing dismount
0.50 Fall on mat to knee(s) or hips
0.50 Fall onto or off the Beam, or upon landing dismount, Fall against the beam/ or onto mat to
Knee(s) or Hips
0.50 Spotting assistance during an element or dismount - Do not award VP or SR credit
0.50 Spotting assistance upon landing an element or dismount Award VP and SR credit
0.50 Fall after spot on element or on landing of dismount
No VP/No0.50
SR Fall/Failure to land on the bottom of the feet first on
• Aerials, Saltos or Dismounts dismount - Note: if the gymnast lands on the bottoms of feet and
hands or knees simultaneously, award VP credit and SR credit, if appropriate.
• Salto never initiated on dismount - Take the deduction 0.30 for No Dismount
Insufficient Artistry throughout the exercise. * 0.10 is the maximum that can be taken in each category.
*0.05 –0.10 Lack of variety in choreography (poses, phrases, connections)
Examples: unnecessary adjustments and/or steps without choreography
*0.05 – 0.10 Quality of gymnast’s movements to reflect her Personal Style
*0.05 – 0.10 Quality of Expression (i.e., projection, focus)
each up to 0.10 Lack of Precision in Dance Elements or VP Elements
Examples:
• Lack of definite arm or leg position on turns / leaps
• Degree of turn not exact
each up to 0.10 Failure to land with feet/legs together on jumps/leaps that land on 2 feet in SIDE position
each up to 0.10 Failure to perform turns in high relevé
Concentration Pauses
Each 0.20
0.10 • Two (2) seconds
• More than 2 seconds
Up to 0.30 Relaxed/incorrect footwork on non-value parts throughout exercise
Up to 0.30 Incorrect body alignment, position, or posture in non-VPs throughout exercise
0.05-0.10 Lack of Tempo / Poor Rhythm between elements
• Body continues moving in line with the beam, but arms swing between elements, AND/OR
EXCEPTION
0.15-0.20 Legs slightly extend but do not completely straighten, and slightly bend again to initiate take-off
• Torso/trunk deviation in line with the beam with/without arm swing between elements
Backward Acro Series OR Sideward to Backward Acro series with one (1) or more Flight Elements is
either connected or not connected: tempo deduction does not apply.
Each 0.20 Support of one leg against side surface of the beam to maintain balance
Up to 0.30 Directional error on Gainer Salto Dismount off the end of the Beam
0.30 Grasp of the Beam to Avoid a Fall

BALANCE BEAM - 22
 Xcel Code of Points
BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS

BEAM
Elements Limited by Division - Receiving "A" VP.
Group 1 - Mounts

Element Name

All Beam mounts for all Divisions are valued as “A” unless listed as another value in the Xcel Code

✓
✓ ✓ ✓
of Points.

Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops

Each Division has a specific required minimum Degree of Split for Leaps and Jumps with a cross
or side split. This split angle is specified in the Division’s Dance SR (SR #2). Deficiency of up to
20° from the Division-specific required Split is allowed to still receive VP and SR credit but a
deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split will be applied.
Any Split Angle - Stag or Stride Leap; Cross Split Jump; Cross Straddle Jump ✓
Minimum 90° - Stag or Stride Leap; Split Jump; Cross Straddle Jump ✓
Minimum 120° - Leaps & Jumps with Cross or Side Split* ✓ ✓
Minimum 150° - Leaps & Jumps with Cross or Side Split* ✓
For a deficiency resulting in a split between 130° - 134° the element would receive "A" VP ✓
Leaps & Jumps with a 135°-150° or more split the element will receive Value-Part credit as listed in
the Xcel Code of Points.
*Leaps & Jumps with a 135° or more Split angle will receive Value-Part credit as listed in the Xcel Code of Points. Refer
to Xcel Code for appropriate application of insufficient Split deductions and awarding of Value-Part credit. If the athlete
achieves the angle required in her Division, no further split deductions are taken. Example: A Diamond performs a switch
leg leap to 150. “B” VP is awarded with no angle deduction.

Group 3 - Turns

# Element Name
3.001 Pivot Turn (180°) ✓
3.002 Squat Turn (180°) ✓
3.004
3.003 Forward
½ Turn onorone
Backward
Foot (180°)
Swing- Turn
Leg position
(180°) optional (including a heel snap 1/2 turn) ✓ ✓
✓ ✓

Group 5 - Holds - Stands

# Element Name
Lever to touch Beam (No angle requirements, Body shape deductions may apply, Lever
5.001 ✓
back foot need not return to beam to receive VP credit)
Partial Handstands
Partial Handstands: Both feet off the Beam while at least one leg reaches a minimum of
✓
5.002 45º from Vertical.
Partial Handstands: Feet must close together and be a minimum of 45º from Vertical – both
✓ ✓
criteria must be met simultaneously to receive VP credit.
5.003 Bridge from lying position, push up to hold 1sec. ✓ ✓

Group 9 - Dismounts

# Element Name
9.001 Any Jump from feet, also with up to 360º Turn ✓ ✓
Cartwheel (or any entrance) to Partial Handstand - 45º from Vertical, No Hold required,
9.002 ✓ ✓
land facing the Beam
9.003 Cartwheel (or any entrance) to Handstand, ¼ Turn ✓ ✓ ✓

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 1

 Group 1 – Mounts
All Beam mounts for all Divisions are valued as “A” unless listed as another value in the Xcel Code of Points.
A B C D
end or (D)
1.101 diagonal to beam – take-off from one or both legs phasejump
1.201
Free to withor1/2
(D)tuck straight turn In
(180°)stand –approach
flight legs (minimum
1.301
Free (D)jump of
Split 30°change
with leg separa-
of 1.401 (D)
Free leap or jump to stand on one or both legs at middle, Free jump with 1/1 (360°) turn in flight
phase to a tuck or straight stand –
at end or diagonal to beam prior at
approach
tion) to end
split of
position
beam - take-off from both legs – approach at
end or diagonal to beam
(Whipple)

180 360

Free leap to stand on one or both legs at end or diagonal Also, straddle jump onto end of beam
to beam with lowering to scale-take off from one leg (D)
(180° leg separation)
180° Split leap forward with leg change
(180° leg separation) at end of beam

180°180°

1.102 1.202 (D) 1.302 1.402

Scissors leap to cross sit on Lor R thigh - diagonal ap Thief vault – take-off from one leg – free
proach to beam (D) leap over beam, one leg after another to
rear support - 90° approach to beam (D) indicates element is considered
a Dance Value Part
.

.
One foot take-off, leg swing with 1/4-1/4 turn (total 180°) to
front support – 90° approach to beam (NA)
.

Scissors leg swing with 1/2 (180°) turn to cross straddle

sit (Not illustrated)
(D)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 2

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.103 (NA) 1.203 (NA) 1.303 (NA) 1.403 (NA)
From side stand frontways – flank From side stand frontways – double Two flank circles followed by leg “flair” Three flying flairs (Homma)
over or straddle cut forward to rear leg swing (Kehre-in) with 1/2 (180°) (Baitova)
support turn to rear support
.
.

2 X 360 360 3 X 360

180

1.104 (D) 1.204 (D) 1.304 (D) 1.404

From side stand facing beam – jump Jump with 1/2 (180°) turn to clear Round-off, straddle pike jump back
(with or without hand support) to side straddle support – 90° approach to ward over the beam into immediate
straddle stand or split sit beam hip circle backward – 90° approach to
. beam

. (D) indicates element is considered a

. 180
. Dance Value Part
360

also with hand support to 1/4 (90°)

turn to cross split sit
90

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 3

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.105 (D) 1.205 1.305 (D) 1.405 (D)
Leap to cross split sit from one foot take Free jump to cross split sit from two Split leap forward with leg change
off – diagonal approach to beam (support foot take-off – diagonal approach to (180° split) to cross split sit (no hand
of one hand permitted) beam support) –diagonal approach to beam
. (Whitney)

Free jump with 1/2 (180°)180 turn to cross

Split leap forward with leg change to
split sit from two foot take-off – diagonal
straddle split sit sideways with support
on one hand approach to beam
180
90
.

1.106 (NA) 1.206 (NA) 1.306 1.406

From side
stand, standorfrontways
or squat
support. – jump
stoop through toto tuck From side stand - squat or stoop through
rear
to clear pike support (hold 2 seconds)

.
. .
(D) indicates element is considered
a Dance Value Part

.. .

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 4

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.107 1.207 1.307 1.407
Jump to roll forward at end or middle of Free forward roll at end of beam Hecht roll (extended hip angle in flight phase)
beam, also from clear straddle support – approach at end or diagonal to beam
on end of beam – swing backward to roll
forward

1.108 1.208 1.308

. 1.408
Chest or head stand Jump to chest stand, 1/2 (180°) turn over Jump to chest stand, 1/1 (360°) turn From rear stand (back towards
shoulder to shoulder stand (over shoulder to chest stand (Silivas) beam), flic-flac over beam to candle
position, ending in front support with
or without bwd hip circle
.
180
K. K.

From a rear stand (back toward beam), jump

with a 1/2 (180°) turn to chest stand (candle
position), ending in front support with or
180
without backward hip circle or other optional
exit. 180

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 5

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.109 1.209 1.309 1.409
From side stand front From cross stand facing end of beam beam
From
hip – jump
angle
forward to to
stand
(pike)
with
cross handstand
facing
step-out end
handspringof
with Handspring/flyspring forward with hecht
ways with take-off from – head kip phase (extended hip angle) before and .
one or two feet - back after hand support on beam – approach
hip pullover to front at end or diagonal to beam
support
Jump to handspring forward with
hip angle (pike) to land on two feet
.
(Flyspring)
(McCool)

1/2 (180°) at
Round-off end
turn of walkover
and beam - flic-flac
forward with.
180

(Dunn)
1.110 1.210 1.310
Jump, press or swing to side or cross Jump, press or swing to side or .
handstand – lower to end position cross handstand with 1/1 - 2/1
touching beam or clear straddle sup (360°-720°) turn – lower to end
port position touching beam or clear 1.410
. straddle support
.
. .

. .
also with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand
. .

360

180
.
also from clear straddle or clear pike .
support .

. . .
720

. .

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 6

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.111 1.211 1.311 1.411
Jump to side
horizontal) (2 planche
sec.) (clear front support above Jump to side planche (Schuschunova), also Jump, press or swing to cross or side handstand
jump, press or swing to cross or side handstand – with 1/1 - 2/1 (360°- 720°) turn in handstand -
.. lower to planche (clear front support at horizon lower to planche or clear pike support (2 sec.)
tal) or clear pike support (2 sec.)
. 360

. .
.
.
.
.

360

. .
. . .
.
. .. .
. . .

. . .

Jump, press or swing to cross or side handstand . .

– 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand - lower to planche
. [Link] pike. support (2 sec.)
. . .
180
. .

180

. . .
. . .

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 7

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.112 1.212 1.312 1.412
ing to side
handstand
of legs
Press handstand,
with 1/4 with
–(Lori-hop)
hop (90°)bending
turn to cross
– stretch- Jump or press to handstand, shift weight to one Jump or press on one arm to handstand (2 sec.)
arm handstand (2 sec.), lower to optional end (Rankin)
position

. .
.
90 .
..
.
.

Jump, press or swing to cross or side hand

stand, shift weight to one arm (2 sec.), lower
to clear straddle support on one arm (Rankin,
Lowing)
.

. .

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 8

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.113 1.213 1.313 1.413
with
hands
board on Jump with extended hips (hecht phase)
to
Cartwheel
spring- momentary
tended
immediate
90° approachhandstand
hips1/4to
and beam,
(90°) on onewith
jump
1/4 turn
(90°)and
turn with
armex-
through
support on
a 90° approach to beam, jump with ex
cross
position
to
end touching
cartwheel
beam –beam
on one
ofhandstand –to
or both
lower arms orat
approach
stand to
end tended hips and 1/2 (180°) turn in flight
phase to side handstand

second arm to side handstand .

finish in a
front sup . . 180˚
port on 180
beam (not .
illustrated) . .

90° approach to beam, round-off – jump

with 1/2 (180°) turn to near side hand
.
stand (Gurova)
. .
.
Jump with hecht phase to round-off, ap
. .
proach at end of beam
180

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 9

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
114 1.214 1.314
Front walkover with hands with 1/4
thigh
from – 90°
Handspring
springboard
(90°)
approach
forward with
turntotorear hand
sit Rrepulsion
to beam
cross
support or
–Lor Salto
both
ing legs
on onetoleg
forward tucked
cross sit with
in extended-tuck
R or take-off from
L – or cross
land- Salto
1.414 forward tucked to rear support – 90° approach
on springboard to rear to beam (salto must be completed before simultane
support (sit) on beam (not ously landing
. with grasp of hands and rear support)
illustrated) sit with support of hands behind hips
(Poulin) – approach at end or diagonal
to beam
.
. .
. .

Free (aerial) walkover forward to rear

support – or with 1/4 (90°) turn to cross
sit on R or L thigh – 90° approach to
beam . . Salto forward piked to rear support –90° approach
to beam (salto must be completed before simultane
. . ously landing with grasp of hands and rear support)

.
90

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 10

 Group 1 – Mounts
A B C D
1.115 1.215 1.315 1.415
Round-off, flic-flac through handstand – support on one or both arms to a cross stand on the beam

- also swing down to cross straddle sit

also with tucking and stretching of legs with support of both arms, swing down to cross straddle sit

1.116 1.216 1.316 1.416

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 11

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops (Limited by Division)
The following receive “A” Value part based on the applicable angle for each Division.
A A A A A
BRONZE SILVER GOLD PLATINUM DIAMOND
(Any Split Angle) (min. 90°) (minimum 120°) (minimum 120°) (min.150°)*
• Stag or Split Leap • Stag or Split Leap (min. 90°) • Leaps & Jumps with Cross or • Leaps & Jumps with Cross or
(any split angle) • Split Jump Side Split (minimum 120°).* Side Split (minimum 120°).*
• Cross Split Jump (min. 90°)
(any split angle) • Cross Straddle Jump (min. 90°)
• Cross Straddle Jump (any
split angle)
*Leaps & Jumps with a 135° or more Split angle will receive Value-Part credit as listed in the Xcel Code of Points. If the athlete achieves the angle required in her Division, no further
split deductions are taken. Example: A Diamond performs a switch leg leap to 150°. “B” VP is awarded with no angle deduction

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 12

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.101 2.201 2.301 2.401
Stag
off leap
from or leg)
one stag-split leap forward (take- Split leap forward (straight-leg entry-no Split or stag-split leap or split jump forward with 1/2 (180°) Split jump with 3/4 (279°) turn
stag; take-off from one leg) turn – landing alternately or on both legs beginning in cross or side
position
180

270

Split or stag-split leap forward (take-off

from one leg) with 1/4 (90°) turn
90
Split jump in side position with both legs straight or the rear
Stag leap forward (take-off from one leg) leg upward, backward (Heinrich),
with 1/4 (90°) turn . From side position, split jump
. with 1/2 (180°) turn to finish in
side position (Not illustrated)
From cross position, take-off from both
legs, Split jump in place, (180° leg
90 separation) to land on two feet

Split jump with change of legs (minimum of 30° leg separa

Stag or double stag jump in place (take tion) prior to split position (Sweetin)
off from both legs in cross position, also From cross position, take-off from both
with 1/4 (90°) turn (Not illustrated) legs, split jump with 1/4 (90°) turn after
split to land in side stand on two feet
90

From cross position - jump with 1/4 (90°) turn to split jump
in side position (not illustrated)
.
From side position, take-off from both
legs, jump with 1/4 (90°) turn to Split
jump in cross position (not illustrated)
Leap forward (minimum 135° leg separation) to land on one
leg with grasp of rear leg prior to landing, free leg held in verti
Note: Stag or double stag jump are Stag leap or stag jump in place (take-off cal split (180°) with hand above head, free hand optional -
considered the same element. from both legs in cross position) with 1/2 not illustrated (Dillman)
(180°) turn (Not illustrated)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 13

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.102 2.202 2.302
split
(180°)jump
leg from in cross
separation
Straddle-pike jump (Hill)position
or side-– from side position
Straddle-pike jump–or
(180°) leg separatio-
side-split jump 2.402
Straddle-pike jump or side-split jump
with 1/2 (180°) turn (Borden) or
3/4 (270°) turn from a cross or side
. position (180°) leg separation (not
illustrated)

Straddle pike-jump or side-split Straddle-pike jump or side-split jump in 180

jump in cross position – (180°) side position – (180°) leg separation,

leg separation, with a 1/4 (90˚) with a 1/4 (90˚) turn to finish in cross
turn to finish in side position position
.

. . .
.
90
90

From turn
sidein position
toposition, – (180°)
jump with
jump 1/4
a or
(90˚)
side-split cross
straddle-pike From cross position, jump with a 1/4 180

(90˚) turn to straddle-pike jump or side

split in side position – (180°) leg
leg separation separation
. .

90
90

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 14

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.103 2.203 2.303 2.403
Straddle jump to hand sup Straddle jump with 1/4 (90°) turn Straddle jump with 1/2 - 3/4 (180° - 270°)
port with swing down to cross to hand support with swing down to turn to hand support with swing down to
straddle sit cross straddle sit or to land in front side cross straddle sit
support . 180

90
.

. .
270

90

90 .
Straddle jump with 1/2 - 3/4 (180° - 270°)
turn to front side support (Companioni) or
with hip circle backward

. .
From a side stand, straddle jump to land
in side front support, or with a hip circle
. .
backward (Furnon) (no illustration) 180

. . . .

270

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 15

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.104 2.204 2.304 2.404
Hop with free leg extended above Hop with
tended 1/2 (180°)
above turn, free leg ex-
horizontal Tour jeté, also with an additional 1/4 (90˚)
horizontal turn (leg separation 180°) to land on one
or both feet
180

180

180

Fouetté hop with 1/2 (180°) turn to land

in scale (free leg above horizontal)

180

270

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 16

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.105 2.205 2.305 2.405
Stag leap forward with leg change Split leap forward with change of legs (180° separation after Split leap forward with leg change (180°
leg change), also to scale forward (2 sec.) separation after leg change) and 1/4
(90°) turn to side-split or straddle-pike
position (Johnson), also with additional
1/4 (90°) turn ..
90

Stride leap forward with change of

legs to wolf position

90

Split leap forward with leg change and 1/4 (90°) turn to front 90 90

support, also with hip circle backward

90

From a side stand, take off on one foot–

90
swing free leg forward to a minimum of
45˚, then swing leg backward to show
180˚ leg separation in the air (switch-leg)
land on one or two feet (Concannon)

Split leap with leg change to straddle - take off and finish in .
cross position (Clauson)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 17

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.106 2.206 2.306 2.406
90°)jump from cross position (hip
Pike
< Pike jump from side position (hip Pike jump from side position
< 90˚) (hip < 90°) with 1/2 (180°) or 3/4 (270˚)
. turn (not illustrated)
. 180

Pike jump (Sekerova) from cross

position (hip < 90°) with 1/2 (180°)
turn Pike jump from cross position (hip < 90°)
180
with 3/4 (270˚) turn
270

2.107 2.207 2.307 2.407

Sissonne, take off from both Ring or stag-ring leap or jump Tuck jump with arch (Sheep jump), feet
legs, land on one leg (legs (rear leg at head height) at head height
in a diagonal position with
180° leg separation; front
leg a minimum of 45°)

Split leap forward with leg change to

stag-ring leap (180° separation < after
leg change)
Switch-leg stag ring leap

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 18

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.108 2.208 2.308 2.408
Stretched (straight) or arch jump Stretched jump forward with ¾ (270°) Stretched jump forward with 1/1-1¼ Stretched jump forward with 1½ (540°)
turn, from cross or side position (360°– 450˚) turn turn, landing optional

360˚–450˚ 540

270

180 (180˚) turn

Stretched jump with 1/2

180

Stretched jump with change/beat of

legs

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 19

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.109 2.209 2.309 2.409
Scissors leap forward or back Cat leap with 1/2 (180°) turn Cat leap with 1/1 (360°) turn Cat leap with 1½ (540°) turn
ward with bent (Cat leap) or
extended (Hitch-kick) legs 180
360
540

Cabriole (front or back)

2.110 2.210 2.310 2.410

Tuck hop or jump Tuck hop or jump with 1/2 (180°) Tuckhop or jump with 3/4 (270˚) Tuck hop or jump with 1/1 (360°)
turn 180
turn turn and also with 1¼ (450°)
270 turn
360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 20

 Group 2 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
A B C D
2.111 2.211 2.311
ward
of
Wolf - both
tucked,
bent
hop leg
one leg
jump (oneleg
oratextended
or extended
above leg&for-
horizon
thigh turn,
Wolf hop
cross landing
or jump
position
also in1/2
withfrom side
front or
(180°)
support or jump
position
Wolf hop
cross withfrom
3/4 side or
(270°) Wolf hop or jump from side or
cross position with 1/1 (360°)
turn, also landing in front support 2.411
turn

tal) from side or cross position

.. 360

180

.
270

. 360

180
.
270
.
.
270

. 180

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 21

 Group 3 – Turns (LIMITED BY DIVISION)
A A
BRONZE ONLY BRONZE ONLY
3.001 3.002
Pivot Turn (180°) Squat Turn (180°)

BRONZE/SILVER ONLY
3.003
1/2 Turn on one foot (180°) leg position optional Heel Snap ½ Turn (180°)

BRONZE/SILVER ONLY
3.004
Forward or Backward Swing turn (180°)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 22

 Group 3 – Turns
A B C D
3.101 3.201 3.301 3.401
1/1 (360°) turn on one leg 1½ (540°) turn on one leg 2/1 (720°) turn on one leg

360 720

540

3.102 3.202 3.302 3.402

1/1free
but
of
backat aleg
attitude
(360°) on of
below
minimum
turn one45°leg,
backward-upward
horizontalin
through-
thigh 1/1 (360°) turn on one leg, thigh 1½ (540°) turn on one leg, thigh
of free leg backward-upward in of free leg backward-upward in
back attitude at or above hori back attitude at or above hori
zontal throughout the turn, with zontal throughout the turn, with
holding leg with or without hand or without hand holding leg
out the turn, or without hand holding leg

360
540
360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 23

 Group 3 – Turns
A B C D
3.103 3.203 3.303 3.403
1/1 (360°) turn with heel of free leg for 1/1 (360°) turn with heel of free leg forward, at or above 1½ (540°) turn with heel of free leg forward, at or
ward below horizontal but at a minimum horizontal throughout the turn, forward leg extended or above horizontal throughout the turn, forward leg
of 45° throughout the turn, forward leg bent, without hand holding leg extended or bent, without hand holding leg
extended or bent, without hand holding 360

leg

540

360 360

540540

3.104 3.204 3.304 3.404

1/1 (360°) turn in arabesque, free leg at or above hori 1½ (540°) turn in arabesque, free leg at or above.
zontal throughout the turn above horizontal throughout the turn
360

540

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 24

 Group 3 – Turns
A B C D
3.105 3.205 3.305 3.405
1/2 (180°) Illusion turn through
standing split without touch
ing beam with free leg (brief
touching of beam with one hand
permitted

180

3.106 3.206 3.306 3.406

1/1 (360°) turn in tuck stand on 1½ (540°) turn in tuck stand on 2/1–2½ (720°– 900˚) turn in tuck
one leg, free leg in forward or one leg, free leg in forward or stand on one leg, free leg in
sideward horizontal sideward horizontal forward or sideward horizontal
(Humphrey), also rising to finish
turn in stand (Swartzentruber)
(not illustrated)

540

360

720˚

13/4 (630°) turn in tuck stand on

one leg, free leg in forward or
sideward horizontal, to fin
ish in tuck/kneeling position
(Ferguson)
630

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 25

 Group 3 – Turns
A B C D
3.107 3.207 3.407
1/2 (180°)
hand turnalternate
support in prone position – 1/1 to 1½ (360° - 540°) turn in 1¼ (450°) turn on back in kip posi
3.307
prone position
support –alternate hand
permitted tion (hip-leg angle closed) (LiLi)

360

180

450

540

3.108 3.208 3.308 3.408

1/1 (360°) turn flank circle, legs One leg circle with “flair” (legs
together separated) (Talavera)

360
063

3.109 3.209 3.309 3.409

1/1 turn (360°)
leg upward
throughout turnwith split
in 180° hand(s) holding 1½ (540°) turn with hand(s)
position
holding leg upward in 180° split
position throughout turn

360 540

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 26

 Group 4 – Waves All Wave elements are considered Dance Value Parts
A B C D
4.101 (D) 4.201 (D) 4.303 4.403
Body wave forward to balance stand (2 sec.) on both legs Body wave forward to balance stand (2 sec.) on one leg

Balance stand indicates a stand

on the ball of the foot in high relevé.

4.102 (D) 4.202 (D) 4.304 4.404

Body wave backward to balance stand (2 sec.) on both legs Body wave backward to balance stand (2 sec.) on one leg

4.103 (D) 4.203 (D)

Body wave sideward to Body wave sideward to balance stand (2 sec.) on one leg
balance stand (2 sec.)
on both legs
. .

4.204 (D)
From kneeling sit position, rise upward
with body wave through toe-balance stand (Toe rise)
(No hold required)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 27

 Group 5 – Holds - Stands (LIMITED BY DIVISION)
A A
BRONZE ONLY 5.002
5.001 BRONZE ONLY
Lever to touch Beam: Partial Handstands: Both feet off the Beam while at least one leg reaches a mini
- No angle requirements mum of 45º from Vertical.
- Body shape deductions may apply Minimum of
- Lever back foot need not return to beam to receive VP credit 45º from Vertical

or

SILVER/GOLD
Feet must close together and be a min. of 45º from Vertical – both criteria must be
met simultaneously to receive VP credit.

BRONZE/SILVER ONLY
5.003
Bridge from lying position, push up to hold 1 sec.

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 28

 Group 5 – Holds–Stands
A B C D
5.101 (D) 5.201 (D) 5.301 5.401
Scale forward, support leg extended Scale forward in balance stand,
or bent and free leg above horizontal support leg extended or bent and free
(2 sec.), also with hand holding free leg above horizontal (2 sec.), also with
leg hand holding free leg Balance stand indicates a stand on the ball of the
foot in high relevé.

(D) indicates element is considered

a Dance Value Part

5.102 (D) 5.202 5.302 (D) 5.402 (D)

Standing split forward with hand Standing split backward, in stand on Scale backward in balance stand
support (on top, side or under beam) whole foot (2 sec.) (2 sec.)
in front of leg (separation <180°) –
Needle scale (2 sec.)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 29

 Group 5 – Holds–Stands
A B C D
5.103 (D) 5.203 (D) 5.303 5.403
Stand on one leg (whole foot), free leg in forward or sideward Balance stand on one foot, free leg in sideward upward hold
hold above 90° (2 sec.); also with hand holding free leg. above 140° (2 sec.); also with hand holding free leg.

Balance stand indicates a stand

on the ball of the foot in high relevé.

(D) indicates element is consid

ered a Dance Value Part

5.104 (Not Acro) 5.204 (Not Acro) 5.304 5.404

of beam
Free (2with
lying large leg amplitude – torso position at end or side Clear pike or straddle “V”- support (2 sec.)
sec.)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 30

 Group 5 – Holds–Stands
A B C D
5.105 (Not Acro) 5.205 5.305 5.405
Planche with support on one or both arms (2 sec.) Jump, press or swing to cross or side handstand – or walkover
backward or cartwheel to cross or side handstand – lower to
cross or side planche (2 sec.)
..

...

..

..

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 31

 Group 5 – Holds–Stands
A B C D
5.106a 5.206 5.306 5.406
Kick to cross handstand with various leg posi from
in
From or
side
vertical,
cross side
other
kick-up toleg
front position with
bent (2also
handstand
support, piked
sec.)
cast with
tolarge arch
one
handstand span
orleg Cross or side handstand with horizontal leg
tions; also with 1/2 turn (180˚) hold – reverse planche in different variations
(No Hold Required, Any leg position) (2 sec.)

(Cross & Side Handstands are considered dif

ferent elements in all divisions)

5.106b
Kick to side handstand with various leg
positions; also with 1/2 turn (180˚)
(No Hold Required, Any leg position)

Kick to cross handstand with various leg posi

. tions with 1/1 turn (360˚) (No hold required on
turning handstands), ending position optional
.

180

360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 32

 Group 5 – Holds–Stands
A B C D
5.107 5.207 5.307 5.407
Headstand - Back walkover in cross position to
. Walkover backward in side
All Xcel Divisions handstand on one arm (2 sec.) position to handstand – shift
(Any position - No hold weight to handstand on one
required) arm (2 sec.), also with planche
. .. on one arm (2 sec.) (Shaposh
nikova)
.
Side handstand (2 sec.) – release
.
. one hand with swing down sideward
.
(flank) to side sit back lying or other
. end position (Hand-Li)
.
.
Cross or side handstand on one arm (2 sec.)
.
. .
5.108 5.208 5.308 5.408
Jump to cross or side handstand from From a side stand, jump with ½ (180°) turn to arrive in a chest stand
one foot (dive) or 2 feet (jump) (with legs straddled) in side position (Kmieciak)

.
180
.
.

. .

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 33

 Group 6 – Rolls
A B C D
6.101 6.201 6.301 6.401
Roll forward with hand support: start and end position as well Dive roll forward
as hand position is optional

Rolls forward: It is permissable to

grasp beam on top, side or under
neath during roll, unless specified
or described as “free”.

Roll forward from backward swing (Whip forward roll)

Shoulder roll forward with hand support and extension of body

through vertical to arrive in a tuck stand or stand (Garrison roll with
hand support)

Shoulder roll forward with hand support

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 34

 Group 6 – Rolls
A B C D
6.102 6.202 6.302 6.402
Roll forward without hand support (Free for Free shoulder roll forward with straightening
ward roll) to tuck stand or stand without hand support
(Garrison)

6.103 6.203 6.303 6.403

Kick, swing to cross handstand – roll forward
with or without hand support on top, side or
under beam)

.
.

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 35

 Group 6 – Rolls
A B C D
6.104 6.204 6.304 6.404
Roll backward; start and end position, as well Roll backward to handstand Free backward shoulder roll
as hand position is optional. (backward Garrison roll)(Kreifels)

Shoulder roll backward

6.105 6.205 6.305 6.405

Roll sideward, body tucked or stretched Neck roll stretched with 1/1 (360°) turn or 1½
(540°) turn

360

– or roll sideward stretched through neckstand,

also with 1/2 (180°) turn over shoulder

Roll sideward stretched 360˚ with legs together

or separated – end position optional
540

360

360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 36

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.101 7.201 7.301 7.401
Walkover forward to bridge, 1/1 (360˚) turn on to clear straddle
handstand
From – walkover
support – swing backward
forward Walkover forward in side position to side stand
one foot (one hand support to sit) .

. .
.
360

.
Walkover forward

.
.
Walkover forward with support of one arm

.
.
.
.
(Tinsica) forward with alternate hand support
Walkover

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 37

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.102 7.202 7.302 7.402
or after support
altenate
Handspringhand of hands,
support
forward with also before
(Tinsica
flight with
spring) phase forward with leg change in
Handspring
flight Free (aerial) walkover forward

. .
.

. From a stand on one leg, swing free

leg through to aerial walkover forward
Handspring forward with support on
one arm (Swing through front aerial) (George),
also to land in kneel/sit (Stevens) -
. not illustrated
..
.
.
.

Note: The aerial walkover and

swing-through aerial walkover are
considered different elements for
Value-Part credit; however, the
swing-through variations are con
sidered the same element.

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 38

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.103 7.203 7.303 7.403
Cartwheel, also with support of Cartwheel with flight phase Aerial cartwheel, also from stand on one leg-swing free leg
one arm or bending of both arms before or after hand support through backward
or on forearms through chest
stand

Aerial cartwheel landing in a side position

Round-off
.

Aerial cartwheel with additional 1/4 (90°) turn out (Perry)

90 90

Free (aerial) cartwheel from a kneeling position (Clore)

Note: All of these variations Note: considered different

are considered different ele elements for Value-Part
ments for Value-Part credit. credit.

Aerial cartwheel, swing back (free) leg forward-upward to

stand on one foot with leg held above 140° with the hand
(Marinez) Not illustrated.

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 39

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.104 7.204 7.304 7.404
Walkover one arm oralso
support ofbackward, withwith to
Scale
walkover
forward, 1/2 (180°)
backward (Turning
turn tion
Walkover stand in side posi-
to sidebackward Press to side handstand –
walkover forward to side stand
alternate hand support (Tinsica) bridge) on both legs (Phillips)
or with swing down to cross sit .
.. ..
180
....

..

...
.
.
.

...
Back walkover to bridge 1/1
(360°) turn on one foot (one
hand support) to sit

.
360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 40

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.105 7.205 7.305 7.405
Walkover forward, backward (Tic-toc) Walkover backward – lower to clear straddle
.
Walkover backward with stoop through of one
support leg to cross split-sit
.. .
.
.

7.106 7.206 7.306 7.406

From back lying position, push up to bridge From extended tuck sit – walkover backward From extended tuck sit – walkover backward
(support on head and/or hands), kickover back (Valdez) with 1/1 (360°) turn – 1/2 (180°) turn in hand
ward stand on one arm, second 1/2 (180°) turn with
late support of second arm (Diamidov)
K.

..
180 180

also with support on one arm

..
From extended tuck sit –”Valdez” swing over
backward through horizontal plane with sup
port on one arm (Garrison)
.
180

Valdez with 1/2 (180°)

turn in handstand

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 41

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.107 7.207 7.407
(180°)
end turnbackward
Walkover
positionintouching
tobeam
handstandhandstand,
– lower to1/2 1/2
Walkover turn in handstand
(180°)forward and
or backward with All Walkovers forward, backward or
7.307
cartwheels with 1/1 – 2/1 (360°- 720°)
forward or forward
continuation of movement
roll to walkover turn in handstand
. .
.
. .
.
.
180

.. 360 540 720

. .
.
360 540 720

180
.
.
. 180 .
7.108 7.208 7.308 7.408
Flic-flac with step-out Flic-flac with step-out, with support
on one arm or flic-flac with 1/2 (180°)
turn after hand support

180

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 42

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.109 7.209 7.309 7.409
with hip circle
Flic-flac from side position to front support or
backward Flic-flac with step-out from side position (Tousek)

.
.

180
Jump from side position with 1/2 (180°) twist
to side handstand (Kolesnikova)

.
180
.

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 43

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...

A B C D
7.110 7.210 7.410
Flic-flac landing on both legs in stand Flic-flac
7.310 with support on one arm with legs
together, landing on both legs in stand

Flic-flac with
1/4 (90°) twist
to side handstand 90

(No hold required)

..
7.111 7.211 7.311 7.411
Gainer flic-flac Gainer flic-flac with support on one arm

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 44

 Group 7 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
7.112 7.212 7.312 7.412
All downvariations
flic-flac
swing to cross straddle
with highsit
flight phase,
(Korbut flic-flac)
and Flic-flac with tucking and stretching of hips in
flight phase with swing down to cross straddle-sit
(Chen Flic)

Flic-flac with piking and stretching of hips in

flight phase with swing down to cross straddle
sit (Rueda)

also gainer flic-flac with piking and stretching of

hips

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 45

 Group 8 – Saltos
A B C D
8.101 8.201 8.301 8.401
From a one or a two-foot (Puolin) take-off, salto Salto forward tucked, take-off from one leg to
forward tucked to an extended tuck sit with hand stand or to land on one knee and one foot simul
support taneously (Hawthorne);
-also from a stand on one leg, swing free leg
through backward to front salto tucked (Rowe

also, without hand support (Portocarrero)

From a straddle-sit, cast and whip to front salto

in straddle position to land on the hands in a
cross straddle sit (Kivisto)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 46

 Group 8 – Saltos
A B C D
8.102 8.202 8.302 8.402
Salto sideward tucked or piked, take off forward
or sideward from one leg to side stand

also from stand on one leg, swing free leg through

to salto sideward tucked or piked (George)

All of the above are considered different elements.

8.103 8.203 8.303 8.403

Salto backward tucked to stand or to scale for From a cross stand, salto backward tucked with
ward (2 sec.) 1/4 (90°) turn to land sideways on beam (Rosette)

90

Salto backward
tucked with step-out
and 1/4 (90˚) turn to
land in side stand
(DeVries)

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 47

 Group 8 – Saltos
A B C D
8.104 8.204 8.304 8.404
Salto back From a stand on two feet, salto backward
ward piked, stretched with step-out to finish in a scale (leg
also stretched held at horizontal or above for 2 seconds (Edlin)
with step-out

Back salto stretched to swing down to cross

straddle sit (Pearce) (Arms swing up above
head to set for back salto, then pull down to the
front of the thighs & return to high position to
reach for the
beam for
swing-down
phase

8.105 8.205 8.305 8.405

Gainer salto backward tucked or piked Gainer salto backward stretched with step-out

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 48

 Group 9 – Dismounts (LIMITED BY DIVISION)
A A
BRONZE/SILVER ONLY
9.001
Any Jump from feet, also with up to 360º Turn
(No visual available)

BRONZE/SILVER ONLY BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY

9.002 9.003
Cartwheel (or any entrance) to Partial Handstand - 45º from Vertical, No Cartwheel (or any entrance) to Handstand, ¼ Turn
Hold required, land facing the Beam

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 49

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.101 9.201 9.301 9.401
Handspring forward, also with 1/2 (180°) hand supportforward with 1/1 (360°) twist after
Handspring Handspring forward with 1½ (540°) twist
twist after hand support after hand support

. .
.

540
360

180

9.102 9.202 9.302 9.402

Aerial walkover forward, also with Aerial walkover forward with 1/1 (360°) twist Aerial walkover forward with 1½ (540°) twist off the Aerial walkover forward with 2/1
1/2 (180°) twist from side or end off end of beam, also from swing through side or end (720°) twist off the side or end
of beam (Muhr)

540
360

720
also, from stand on one leg, swing free leg back
From to salto forward
a stand on one leg withfree
1/1leg back- ward to salto forward
ward tucked
–swing (360°) a tucked with 1½ (540˚) twist
off the side or end of the beam (Jawarowicz)
twist off side or end of beam (Mabrey) Aaerial walkover forward with 1/1 (360°)
twist off side of beam, also from swing
through

180

Aerial round-off (not illustrated) 360

540

360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 50

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.103 9.203 9.303 9.403
Cartwheel with 1/4 (90°) twist after Cartwheel with 1¼ (450°) twist after hand Cartwheel with 1/4 (90°) turn on hands and repulsion to salto
hand support (or round-off) to cross support to cross stand at end of beam backward tucked (Lawson) or piked (Keck-not illustrated) at
stand at end of beam the end of the beam (Tsukahara tucked/piked)

450
90

Cartwheel
beam withto3/4
hand support stand
(270°)
cross at end
twist afterof Cartwheel with 1 3/4 (630°) twist after hand
support to cross stand at end of beam

036

072

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 51

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.104 9.204 9.304
Salto forward tucked or piked Salto forward stretched, also with
Salto1/1
forward (360°- 540°)
-1½ tucked twist, Salto forward stretched with 2/1
or stretched
from 1 foot (and swing-through) with 1/2 (180°) twist off the side (720°) twist, take-off only from
or from 2 feet, also with 1/2 or end of beam take-off only from both legs 9.404legs (Araujo)
both
(180°) turn

360

720

360

180

540
-a lso from a stand on one leg,
swing free leg through backward
to salto forward stretched with
1/2 (180°) twist off the side of the
beam (not illustrated)

180
540

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 52

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.105 9.205 9.305 9.405
Arabian salto tucked or piked (jump backward, Stretched jump forward with 1/1 (360°)
1/2 (180°) twist, salto forward) twist and salto forward tucked, piked or
stretched

360

180

360

180

360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 53

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.106 9.206 9.306 9.406
From one
tucked,
two-foot foot or
piked,
take-off, saltothrough)
stretched
(swing backward Salto backward
or (360°)
stretched with 1/2
twist (180°)piked
tucked, or 1/1or Salto backward tucked, piked
or stretched with 1½ - 2/1
(540°-720°) twist

180

540

180

540

360 720

720

360

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 54

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.107 9.207 9.307 9.407

9.108 9.208 9.308 9.408

From stand on one leg, swing Gainer salto stretched with 1/2 Gainer salto stretched with
ofbeam Gainer salto backward stretched
free leg through to gainer salto (180°) twist to side of beam 1/1 – 1½ (360° - 540°) twist to with 2/1 (720°) twist to side of
tucked, piked, or stretched to side beam
side of beam

360

720

180

Gainer salto backward stretched

Gainer salto tucked with 1/1 with 2½ (900°) twist to side of
(360°) twist to side of beam beam (Khorkina)

540

360

Gainer salto tucked 1½ (540°) 900

twist to side of beam

- also tucked or piked with 1/2

(180°) twist (not illustrated) 540

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 55

 Group 9 – Dismounts
A B C D
9.109 9.209 9.309 9.409
Gainer salto tucked, at end of beam Gainer salto piked, at end of beam Gainer salto stretched with legs together at
or gainer salto tucked with 1/1 (360°) end of beam
twist at end of beam

- also gainer piked with 1/1 (360°) twist at

end of beam –facing out (Rinaldo)

360

360

9.110 9.210 9.310 9.410

Stretched jump forward with 1/2 (180°) Stretched jump forward with 1/2 (180°)
twist and salto backward tucked or
piked twist and salto backward stretched
-take-off from both legs

180 180

BALANCE BEAM ELEMENTS - 56

 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE

FLOOR EXERCISE RULES

Timing
Special Requirements (SR) Value Difficulty Restrictions
Part (VP) Restricted Skills Timed
Time
Deduct 0.50 for Each Missing SR Required 0.50 deduction - off SV Warm
Limit
Ups^

• No “B” or higher VP.

1. *Minimum 2 directly connected Acro elements (with or without Flight). Exceptions: Straddle
2. *2nd Acro Pass – Minimum one (1) Acro element (with/without Flight). jump & Side leap 60°–
Minimum of
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 180° receive “A” VP 30 45
4 “A” VP
(Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly connected), one (1) of which • No Saltos or Aerials sec. sec.
is a Leap with a minimum 60°Cross or Side Split. (0.10 each)
• Max of two (2) Acro
4. Minimum 1/2 Turn on one (1) foot.
flight elements per
routine
1.*Minimum 2 directly connected Acro elements, 1 must have Flight.
2. *2nd Acro Pass – either: A 2nd Minimum two (2) directly connected • No “B” Acro VP.
elements (with or without Flight), OR One (1) Acro Flight element Minimum of • No “C” or higher VP. 45 1:00
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 5 “A” VP • Maximum one (1) sec. min.
(Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly connected), one of which is (0.10 each) Salto or Aerial per
a Leap with a minimum 90° Cross or Side Split. routine.
4. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) foot.
1.*Minimum 2 directly connected Acro Flight elements.
2.*2nd Acro Pass – either: A 2nd connection with minimum two (2)
directly connected Acro Flight elements OR One (1) Aerial or Salto Minimum of • No “B” VP Twisting
1:00 1:00
[Link] Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 6 “A” VP Saltos.
(Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly connected), one of which is (0.10 each) min. min.
• No “C” or higher VP.
a Leap with a minimum 120°
[Link] 1/1 Turn on one (1) foot.
1.*Minimum 2 directly connected Acro Flight elements with “A” or “B”
Salto. Minimum of
2.*2nd Acro Pass – either: A 2nd connection with minimum two (2) 6 “A”
directly connected Acro Flight elements OR One (1) “B” Salto • No “C” Acro VP. 1:30 1:30
(0.10 each)
[Link] Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 • No “D” or higher VP. min. min.
(Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly connected), one (1) of which 1 “B” VP
is a Leap with a minimum 150° Cross or Side Split. (0.30)
[Link] 1/1 Turn on one (1) foot.
[Link] (2) separate Acro Flight Passes, each with a Minimum of 2
directly connected Acro Flight elements. Minimum of
[Link] (2) Different Saltos (Isolated or in connection) One (1) must be a 5 “A” • Maximum of 1 “D”
Minimum “B” (May be included in SR#1) (0.10 each) VP allowed. No 2:00 1:30
[Link] Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 2 “B” VP bonus. min. min.
(Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly connected), one (1) of which (0.30 each) • No “E” VP.
is a Leap with a minimum 150° Cross or Side Split.
[Link] “B” Turn on one (1) foot.
Clarifications
*SR#1/SR#2: SR#1/SR#2 may not be combined in the same pass.(Bronze, Silver, Gold, Platinum)
^Timed Warm-Ups: Based on the number of athletes in the largest squad in the session.
No Minimum Time: Floor routines within Xcel do NOT have a minimum time limit.
Flight Skills/Elements: Acro flight skills/elements with hand support are eligible to receive Value Part credit, regardless of the number of
times performed and may also fulfill Special Requirements, provided that the Acro Pass in which they are performed is different.
Split Angle (within 20°): SR/VP credit will be awarded for Cross or Side Split Leaps and Jumps that are within 20°of the Division’s specified
Split angle as listed under the special requirement (See Floor, Chapter 2, Recognition of Value Parts). For splits within 1°-20° of the specified
split angle a deduction of up to 0.20 for Insufficient Split may be applied.
Dive Roll: A dive roll does NOT fulfill Flight Special Requirement.
Bronze/Silver: Round off Rebound – Backward Roll is an Acro Connection.
Value Parts: Any skills listed in the Xcel Code of Points and allowed at the respective Division. (Bronze: Any “A” VP; Silver: Any “A” VP or
“B” Dance, Gold: Any “A” or “B” (excluding “B” Twisting Saltos); Platinum: Any “A”, “B” VP, and any “C” Dance VP; Diamond: Any “A”,”B”,”C”
VP & 1 “D”)

FLOOR EXERCISE - 1
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
CHAPTER 1: REQUIREMENTS & RESTRICTIONS
I. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special Requirements (SR) each worth 0.50.

A. Bronze Division
1. Minimum two (2) directly connected Acro elements (with or without Flight).
2. 2nd Acro Pass – Minimum one (1) Acro element (with/without Flight).
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 (Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly
connected), one of which is a Leap with a minimum 60°Cross or Side Split.
4. Minimum 1/2 Turn on one (1) foot.

B. Silver Division
1. Minimum two (2) directly connected Acro elements, one (1) must have Flight.
2. 2nd Acro Pass – either: A 2nd Minimum two (2) directly connected elements (with or without Flight), OR One (1)
Acro Flight element
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 (Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly
connected), one of which is a Leap with a minimum 90° Cross or Side Split.
4. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) foot.

C. Gold Division
1. *Minimum two (2) directly connected Acro Flight elements.
2. *2nd Acro Pass – either: A 2nd connection with minimum two (2) directly connected Acro Flight elements OR
One (1) Aerial or Salto
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 (Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly
connected), one of which is a Leap with a minimum 120°
4. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) foot.

D. Platinum Division
1. *Minimum two (2) directly connected Acro Flight elements with “A” or “B” Salto.
2. *2nd Acro Pass – either: A 2nd connection with minimum two (2) directly connected Acro Flight elements OR
One (1) “B” Salto
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 (Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly
connected), one (1) of which is a Leap with a minimum 150° Cross or Side Split.
4. Minimum 1/1 Turn on one (1) foot.

E. Diamond Division
1. Two (2) separate Acro Flight Passes, each with a Minimum of two (2) directly connected Acro Flight elements.
2. Two (2) Different Saltos (Isolated or in Connection) One (1) must be a Minimum “B” (May be included in SR#1)
3. Dance Passage – Minimum two (2) Different elements from Group 1 (Leap / Jump / Hop) (directly or indirectly
connected), one (1) of which is a Leap with a minimum 150° Cross or Side Split.
4. Minimum “B” Turn on one (1) foot.

II. VALUE PART REQUIREMENTS

A. Value part requirements for Xcel are provided in the following chart. Refer to the General/Judges Section for further
clarification on value parts and deductions related to missing value parts.

Value Part Requirement

Bronze 4 “A” VP (0.10 each) 6 “A” VP (0.10 each)
(0.10 each) Platinum
Silver 5 “A” VP 1 “B” VP (0.30 each)
Gold 6 “A” VP (0.10 each) 5 “A” VP (0.10 each)
Diamond
2 “B” VP (0.30 each)

FLOOR EXERCISE - 2
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
III. SPECIAL REQUIREMENT CLARIFICATIONS
A. Clarifications applied to ALL Divisions
1. SR credit will be awarded for Cross and Side split leaps or jumps that are within 20° of the Division’s specified
split angle. A deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split will be applied.
2. Dive Roll does not fulfill a flight requirement since it ultimately has support on the shoulders and back.
3. Restricted elements receive a deduction of 0.50 each and do not receive VP or SR credit.
a. Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, not based on the
quality/amplitude of the performance.
B. Clarifications applied to Specific Xcel Divisions
CLARIFICATION BY DIVISION
Br Si Go Pl Di Clarification
X X X X • SR#1/SR#2 may not be combined in the same pass.
X • Maximum of two (2) Acro flight elements are allowed in the routine. (No saltos allowed)
X • Maximum of one (1) salto or aerial allowed in the routine.
• Round off rebound – backward roll is an Acro connection. This is the ONLY rebound-type series
allowed to fulfill SR.
X X o Placing hands on floor next to legs/buttocks prior to backward roll is allowed and will NOT
receive a deduction.
o A deduction may be taken for any rhythm errors.
• Straddle jump (60°-180°) = “A” VP
X
• Side Leap (60°-180°) = “A” VP

IV. DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS

A. Restricted Elements: Elements are Restricted based upon their Value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points not
based on the quality/amplitude of the performance.
B. If a restricted element is performed: (All Divisions)
1. Deduct 0.50 from SV
2. Do not award Value Part credit
3. The element cannot be used to fulfill Special Requirements
4. All appropriate execution and amplitude deductions would be applied to all elements, whether or not they
receive Value Part credit.
DIFFICULTY RESTRICTIONS BY DIVISION
Division Restrictions
Only allowable “A” VP are permitted.
• The following “A” VPs are NOT Allowed in the Bronze Division:
o Saltos / Aerials
Bronze o Salto-like elements that land in a sitting, prone, or split-sit position
• “B” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed with the following exceptions:
o Straddle Jump and Side Leap (60° – 180°) = “A” VP.
• Maximum of two (2) Acro Flight elements allowed in the routine.
Only “A” VP, and “B” Dance VP are permitted.
• “B” Acro VP elements are NOT allowed.
Silver • “C” or higher elements are NOT allowed.
• Maximum of One (1) Salto or Aerial in the routine.
Only “A” VP, and allowable “B” VP are permitted.
Gold • “B” Twisting Saltos are NOT allowed. (Front pike and Front layouts are allowed)
• “C” or higher VP elements are NOT allowed.
Only, “A” VP, “B” VP, and “C” Dance VP are permitted.
Platinum • “C” or higher Acro elements are NOT allowed.
• “D” or higher elements are NOT allowed.
Only “A” VP, “B” VP, “C” VP, and one (1) “D” VP elements are permitted. No bonus is awarded for a “D”
element.
Diamond • More than one “D” element is NOT allowed.
• “E” elements are NOT allowed.

FLOOR EXERCISE - 3
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
V. ROUTINE EXAMPLES
The following provides sample floor routines for each Division. The Value part (VP) and Special Requirement (SR) is
provided for each routine element as applicable.

• In some instances, there are multiple elements within the routine which may fulfill one special requirement. The first
element to fulfill the special requirement is noted with the special requirement.
• Elements with a “+” between them within the chart indicate a connection/series.
• Split angle: For leaps and jumps with a split angle the element number is listed and noted that it is considered an “A”
VP for that level. – See Recognition of Value Parts – Leaps and Jumps and Balance Beam Elements -Group 2 –
Leaps, jumps, and hops (limited by division).

BRONZE – ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Handstand forward roll + 4.101 A
SR1 • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
Forward Roll 4.101 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Split leap (60°) -run– 1.101 A • Start Value - 10.0
1 leg swing hop (free leg within 20°of 1.001 A SR3 Note: The leg swing hop within 20° of horizontal
horizontal) would receive an amplitude deduction (up to 0.20)
Heel snap ½ turn 2.001 A SR4 if the free leg is below horizontal (using 20˚
Cartwheel 5.104 A SR2 variance).
Roundoff rebound + 5.105 A
SR1
Backward roll (end position optional) 4.102 A
• Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Backward swing turn° 2.002 A SR4
2 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Roundoff 5.105 A SR2
• Start Value - 10.0
Hitch kick- chasse 1.109 A SR3
Split leap 60 ° 1.001
From lying position – bridge, kickover 5.001 A SR2
Split leap 60° - chasse – assemble – 1.101 A SR3
• Meet Special Requirements – Yes
straight jump ½ turn 1.112 A
3 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
1/1 turn 2.101 A SR4
• Start Value - 10.0
Front walkover + 5.101 A SR1
Cartwheel (connected) 5.104 A
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Roundoff 5.105 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR2
SR1 the front handspring is the 3rd flight element
Flic-Flac 5.106 A
Split leap 60° -skips – 1.101 A (limited to 2). No SR credit.
SR3
Split jump 60° 1.101 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
1 Full (1/1) turn 2.101 A SR4 • Restricted Element –The 3rd flight element
receives a 0.50 deduction and cannot be used for
Restricted (3rd VP or SR.
Front Handspring Flight) • Start Value – 9.00 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50 for
Restricted Element)
Sissonne 60° - chasse - 1.110 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR3 –
Straight jump Not an Element Neither chasse or straight jump are dance skills on
Front walkover + 5.101 A Floor and Sissonne is not a Leap with 1 foot take
2 SR1
Roundoff 5.105 A off
Handstand
½ turn on toeforward roll
in passe 2.001 A SR4 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Forward roll + 4.101 A SR2 • Start Value – 9.5 (0.50 for missing SR)
4.101 A
SR1
Forward roll 4.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR 4 –
Pivot ½ turn (on 2 feet) Not an element Turn must be on one foot.
3
Split leap 60° -chasse – 1.101 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
SR3 • Start Value –9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Tuck jump 1.115 A
Backward roll 4.102 A SR2

FLOOR EXERCISE - 4
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
SILVER - ROUTINE EXAMPLES
MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Roundoff rebound + 5.105 AASR1
Back Extension Roll 4.102
1 ½ toe turn 2.201 B SR4 • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
1 Split leap 90° - chasse – 1.101 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Side leap 90° 1.202 (“A” A SR3 • Start Value - 10.0
VP in Silver)
Roundoff 5.105 A SR2
Roundoff 5.105 A
SR1
Flic-Flac (Back handspring) 5.106 A
Split leap 90° - assemble – 1.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
2. straddle jump 90° 1.207 (“A” VP A SR3 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
in Silver) • Start Value - 10.0
Full turn (1/1) turn on toe 2.101 A SR4
Front handspring 5.102 A SR2
Front handspring step out + 5.102 A
SR1
Roundoff 5.105 A
Split leap 90° - run – Assemble - 1.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
SR3
3 Schuschunova 1.208 B • Meet Value Parts – Yes
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 3.101 A SR4 • Start Value - 10.0
Cartwheel (swing through allowed) + 5.104 A
SR2
Back walkover (connected) 5.101 A
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Front handspring step out + 5.102 A
SR1
Roundoff 5.105 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 2.101 A SR4 SR2 – Back Walkover is not a flight skill
1
Split leap 90° - chasse – 1.101 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
SR3
Cabriole 1.109 A • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Back walkover 5.101 A
Split leap 90° - run – 1.101 A
Side leap 90° 1.202
in Silver)
(“A” VP A SR3
• Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR
2 – Maximum of One (1) Salto or Aerial in the
Roundoff + 5.105 A SR1 routine. The aerial is the 2nd salto/aerial
Back Tuck 8.101 A
2 element. No SR credit.
Full turn (1/1) turn in tuck stand 2.206 B SR4
• Meet Value Parts – Yes
5.104 • Start Value – 9.00 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50
(Restricted - No
Aerial Cartwheel 2nd for restricted element)
VP
Salto/Aerial)
Roundoff 5.105 A
SR1
Flic-Flac (Back handspring) 5.106 A
• Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR
Back walkover 5.101 A
2 – 3rd back walkover does not receive VP
Split leap 90° -chasse - 1.101 A
3 SR3 credit. No SR credit for non-flight acro series.
Leg swing hop (horizontal) 1.001 A
• Meet Value Parts – Yes
Back walkover + 5.101 A
• Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Back walkover No VP
Full turn (1/1) turn on toe 2.101 A SR4

FLOOR EXERCISE - 5
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE

GOLD - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Roundoff 5.105 A
SR1
Flic-Flac 5.106 A
1.204
Switch leap (120°) - 1.207 A • Meet Special Requirements- Yes
SR3
1 Straddle jump (120°) (“A” VP in A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Gold) • Start Value - 10.0
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 2.101 A SR4
Front handspring step out + 5.102 A
SR2
Roundoff 5.105 A
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 2.101 A SR4
Roundoff + 5.105 A
SR1 • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
Back Tuck 8.101 A
2. • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Aerial Cartwheel 5.104 A SR2
• Start Value - 10.0
Split leap 120°-assemble – 1.101 A SR3
Tuck jump 1/1 (360°) 1.215 B
Roundoff + 5.105 A
SR1
Flic flac + 5.106 A
Back Tuck 8.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – Yes
1 ½ turn on one leg (540°) 3.201 B SR4 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
3
Sissonne (135°) - chasse - 1.110 A • Start Value - 10.0
Side leap (120°) 1.202 (“A” VP A SR3
in Gold)
Front salto piked 6.201 B SR2
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Roundoff 5.105 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, Missing
SR1
Flic-Flac (step out) 5.106 A SR2- Flic flac step out versus 2 feet are not
Full turn (1/1) turn in tuck stand 2.206 B SR4 different therefore the passes are the same –
Roundoff Same Pass performed a second time in the exact same
1
Flic-Flac (two feet) No VP/No SR connection the VP credit is not awarded.
• Meet Value Parts – No, Missing 1 “A”
Split Leap (120°) + 1.101 A •
SR3 Start Value – 9.40 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.10
Split jump (120°) 1.101 A for Missing “A”)
2/1 turn (720°) on one foot 2.301 No
(Restricted
“C”) – VP
• Meet Special Requirements – No, missing SR
1.204 (“A” VP 4. The turn is a “C” element which is restricted
Switch leap (120°) + in Gold) A
SR3 at Gold. May not be used for SR.
2 Split Jump (120°) A
1.101 • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Roundoff + 5.105 A • Start Value – 9.00 (0.50 for missing SR, 0.50
SR1
Flic flac + 5.106 A for restricted element)
Back Tuck 8.101 A
Front Layout 6.201 B SR2
Aerial Walkover 5.103 A SR2
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 2.101 A SR4
Split leap (120°) - chasse – 1.101 A • Meet Special Requirements – No, missing
SR3
cat leap 1/1 1.213 B SR1 – Straddle jump breaks the 2nd acro pass.
3
Roundoff + 5.105 A • Meet Value Parts – Yes
Straddle jump (120°) + 1.207 (“A” VP A • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
in Gold)
Flic-Flac (Back handspring) 5.106 A

FLOOR EXERCISE - 6
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE

PLATINUM - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Switch leap 150° - assemble – 1.204 B
SR3
Wolf jump 1.116 A
2/1 turn (720°) on one foot 2.301 C SR4 • All Special Requirements- Yes
1 Roundoff + 5.105 A • All Value Parts – Yes
Flic flac + 5.106 A SR1 • Start Value - 10.0
Back layout 8.101 A
Front salto piked 6.201 B SR2
Front handspring step out + 5.102 A
Roundoff + 5.105 A SR1
Back tuck 8.101 A
1 ½ turn (540°) on one foot 2.201 B SR4 • All Special Requirements – Yes
2. All Value Parts – Yes
Side leap (150°) - 1.202 B
SR3 • Start Value - 10.0
Straddle jump (150°) with ½ turn 1.207 B
Roundoff + 5.105 A
SR2
Flic flac 5.106 A
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 2.101 A SR4
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Flic flac + 5.106 A SR1
Back Tuck 8.101 A • All Special Requirements – Yes
3 Wolf hop – chasse – 1.116 A • All Value Parts – Yes
SR3
Switch leg leap (180°) 1.204 B • Start Value - 10.0
Roundoff + 5.105
A
Flic flac + 5.106 SR2
A
Flic flac 5.106
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Split leap 150° -run 1.104 A
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Schuschunova 1.208 B • All Special Requirements – No, missing SR3 -
Roundoff + 5.105 A Roundoff breaks the Dance passage
1 SR1 • All Value Parts – Yes
Back layout 8.101 A
• Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
1/1 turn (360°) on one foot 2.101 A SR4
Front salto piked 6.201 B SR2
Front tuck (step out) + 6.101 A
Roundoff + 5.105 A
SR1 • All Special Requirements – No, Missing SR2–
Flic flac+ 5.106 A
Cannot combine SR1 & SR2 in the same pass.
2 Back layout 1/1 twist (360°) 8.201 B
• All Value Parts – Yes
Cat leap 1/1 – chasse – 1.213 B
SR3 • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Split leap (150°) 1.101 A
1 ½ turn (540°) on one foot 2.201 B SR4
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Flic Flac + 5.106 A SR1
Back layout 8.101 A • All Special Requirements – No, missing SR4 -
Switch leg leap (150°) – 1.204 B The tuck jump 1 1/2 is not a turn on 1 foot
3 SR3
Straddle jump (150°) 1.207 B • All Value Parts – Yes
Tuck jump 1 ½ (540°) 1.315 C • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Front handspring + 5.102 A
SR2
Front Tuck 6.101 A

FLOOR EXERCISE - 7
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE

DIAMOND - ROUTINE EXAMPLES

MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Part SR1/
Flic flac+ 5.106 A
Part SR2
Back layout 1 ½ twist (540°) 8.3101 C • All Special Requirements- Yes
2/1 turn (720°) on one foot 2.301 C SR4 • All Value Parts – Yes, higher VP may be
1
Switch leap (150°) - 1.204 B used to fulfill lower VP
SR3
Side Leap (150°) 1.202 B • Start Value - 10.0
Front handspring + 5.102 A Part SR1/
Front Layout 1/1 twist (360°) 6.301 C Part SR2
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Part SR1
Flic flac 5.106 A
Full turn on one foot 3.101 A SR4 • All Special Requirements – Yes
2. Split Leap (150°) – chasse 1.101 A • All Value Parts – Yes
SR3
cat leap 1½ 1.313 C • Start Value - 10.0
Front tuck+ 6.101 A Part SR1/
Front layout 6.201 B SR2
Front Tuck + 6.101 A Part SR1/
Front Pike 6.201 B Part SR2
Full turn (1/1) turn on one foot in tuck
2.206 B SR4
stand
• All Special Requirements – Yes
Split leap 150 ° -run – 1.101 AC
3. • All Value Parts – Yes
Wolf hop 1/1 – 1.316 SR3
• Start Value - 10.0
Split jump 1/1 1.302 C
Part
Roundoff + 5.105 A
SR1/Part
Back layout 8.101 A
SR2 (No”B”)
DO NOT MEET SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS (SR) AND/OR VALUE PART (VP)
Routine Elements Element # VP SR Start Value
Front Handspring + 5.102 A
Part SR1
Front Tuck 6.101 A
Switch leap (150°) - 1.204 B
SR3 • All Special Requirements – No, missing
Wolf hop 1.116 A
SR2- No “B” Salto
1. 1 ½ toe turn 2.201 B SR4
• All Value Parts –Yes
Front handspring + 5.102 A • Start Value – 9.50 (0.50 for missing SR)
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Part SR1
Flic flac + 5.106 A
Back tuck 8.101 A
Roundoff + 5.105 A
Part SR1/
Flic flac+ 5.106 A • All Special Requirements – No, Missing
Part SR2 SR3 – no dance pass because the 2nd
Double back salto 8.403 D
2/1 turn (720°) on one foot 2.301 C SR4 element is a “D” which is the 2nd “D” in the
2. Switch leap (180°) - 1.204 B routine and therefore restricted.
Straddle jump (180°) with 1 ½ (540°) Restricted No • All Value Parts – Yes
turn – 2nd “D” VP • Start Value – 9.00 SV (Deduct 0.50 for
Front handspring + 5.102 A Part SR1/ missing SR, 0.50 for restricted element)
Front Layout 1/1 twist (360°) 6.301 C Part SR2
1 ½ turn (540°) on one foot 2.201 B SR4
• All Special Requirements –No, Missing
Front handspring + 5.102 A Part SR1/
SR2 - 2 different saltos
Front Pike 6.201 B Part SR2
• All Value Parts – Yes (Note: Pass 1 and 3
Roundoff 5.105 A
Part SR1 are the same -No VP for pass 3, however
3. Flic-Flac 5.106 A
there are still enough VP within the routine
Front handspring + No VP/No to meet the VP requirement)
Front Pike SR
• Start Value – 9.50 SV (Deduct 0.50 for
Switch Leap (180°) + 1.204 B missing SR)
SR3
Straddle Jump with 1/1 (360°) turn 1.307 C

FLOOR EXERCISE - 8
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION

I. RECOGNITION (COUNTING) OF VALUE PARTS (VP)

A. Floor Exercise Skills

1. Any floor exercise skill / element listed in the Xcel Code of Points may receive Value Part credit two (2) times in
an exercise, provided that the element occurs in a different connection (i.e., preceded or followed by different
VP element).
2. Any element listed in the Xcel Code of Points is given the value that is listed, even if it is different than the value
listed in the JO Code of Points.
3. If a Dance or Acro element is performed that cannot be specifically found in the Xcel Code of Points, the Judge
may award comparable Value Part credit if they can recognize the “root” element. This would include variations
of leg position, as well as landing position of any previously valued leap / jump / hop.
4. Any new element not listed in the Xcel Code of Points:
a. Must be evaluated by the Regional Technical Committee Chair and the Regional Xcel Committee Chair.
b. Element Evaluation Forms can be found on the [Link] website in the Forms section under
Women.
c. A copy of this evaluation must be presented to the Meet Referee or Chief Judge prior to the competition in
order to insure proper awarding of difficulty.
d. Evaluations will be valid for one current Xcel quadrennium (Xcel quadrennium begins August 1 two years
following the Summer Olympics and ends four years later on July 31) and will be posted on Regional
websites.
5. If the same element is performed a third time, or is performed a second time in the exact same connection:
a. The VP credit is not awarded.
1) Exceptions:
• VP credit can be awarded for an element that is performed for the third time, IF it was not
previously awarded VP credit because:
(i) The element lacked completion the first (1st) or second (2nd) time it was performed, OR
(ii) The element was performed in the exact same connection.
• Acro flight skills/elements with hand support (see item number 7)
b. All applicable execution and amplitude deductions are applied.
c. It cannot be used to fulfill SR. An element must receive VP credit in order to fulfill SR.
6. All Saltos and Aerials must land on any part of bottom of feet first to receive VP credit. If the hands and bottom
of the feet land simultaneously, award VP credit and deduct 0.50 for the fall.
a. Simultaneously landing bottoms of feet and hands,
1) Deduct 0.50 for Fall.
2) Award VP/SR credit.
b. Bottoms of feet do not land first,
1) Deduct 0.50 for Fall.
2) Do not award VP or SR.
7. Acro Flight elements with hand support are eligible:
a. To receive Value Part credit regardless of the number of times performed (provided the Pass/connection is
different).
b. May fulfill Special Requirements.
8. Acro elements such as rolls, cartwheels and walkovers that have an optional ending position not specifically
listed in the Xcel Code of Points are still eligible for Acro VP credit.

B. Elements Considered Different:

In the following instance, elements will be considered different for the counting of VP.
1. If they have a different number in the Xcel Code of Points / Xcel Updates.
2. If they have the same number in the Xcel Code of Points / Xcel Updates, but meet the following criteria:
a. If the element is performed with different degrees of turn (½, 1/1, 1½).
1) The addition of a ¼ turn does not make an element different, unless specifically listed in the Xcel
Code of Points
b. If saltos are performed with different body positions.

FLOOR EXERCISE - 9
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
1) Tuck / Pike / Stretched Saltos considered different elements.
2) Body shape maintained during majority of Salto determines recognized element body position.
c. If the take-off for a leap / jump / hop is from one or both legs.
d. Xcel Acro Passes will receive credit as Different Passes when at least one of the following occurs:
1) Different number of Acro VP elements receiving credit in 2nd pass, OR
2) Acro VP elements in the second 2nd pass in a Different order, OR
3) Different Acro VP element in first 1st or second 2nd pass.
e. Addition / deletion of a Dance Value Part element following and directly connected to the last element in an
Acro Pass will make the Acro Pass different.

Examples of Elements Considered Different for the Counting of VP

Criteria Example
If the element is performed • 1.206 A pike jump, and a pike jump half turn have the same skill number in the Xcel CoP,
with (½,
turn different
1/1, 1½).
degrees of but are considered different because of the additional half turn.

If the take-off for a leap / • #1.101 Split Leap / Split Jump considered Different elements.
jump / hop is from one or
both legs.
a.) First Pass: Front Salto Tucked step-out, Front Handspring, Front Salto Stretched
Second Pass: Front Salto Tucked step-out, Front Handspring, Flyspring, Front Salto
stretched.
• Considered Two Different Acro Passes due to addition of Flyspring.
• VP credit awarded to all elements.
b) First Pass: Front Salto Tucked step-out, Round-off, Flic-Flac, Salto Backward 1/1
twist.
Second Pass: Round-off, Flic-Flac, Salto Backward 1/1 twist.
• Considered Two Different Passes due to deletion of Front Salto Tucked.
• VP credit awarded to all elements.
c) First Pass: Front Aerial, Round-off, Flic-Flac, Back Salto Tucked
Second Pass: Round-off, Flic-Flac, Back Salto Tucked
• Considered Two Different Passes due to deletion of Front Aerial.
Xcel Acro Passes • VP credit awarded to all elements.
d) First Pass: Front Handspring step-out, Round-off, Flic-Flac, Back Salto Tucked
Second Pass: Round-off, Flic-Flac, Back Salto Tucked
• Considered Two Different Passes because of addition of Front Handspring
• VP credit awarded to all elements.
e) First Pass: Round-off, Flic-Flac
Second Pass: Round-off, Flic-Flac, Flic-Flac
• Considered Two Different Passes with addition of Flic-Flac in second pass.
• VP credit will be awarded to all elements.
• In reverse order, they would also be considered Two Different Passes due to
different number of elements in the pass
Note: Acro Flight elements with hand support are eligible to receive Value Part credit
regardless of the number of times performed (provided the Pass/connection is
different).[See Recognition (Counting of Value Parts – Letter A, #7]
a) First Pass: Round-off, flic-flac, back salto stretched
Second Pass: Round-off, flic-flac, Back salto stretched, sissonne
Addition/deletion of a • Considered Two Different Passes due to addition of Sissonne
Dance VP following and
• VP credit awarded to all elements.
directly connected to the
last element in an Acro b) First Pass: Round-off, flic-flac, Straddle jump
Pass Second Pass: Round-off, flic-flac
• Considered Two Different Passes due to the deletion of the Dance element
• VP credit is awarded to all elements.

FLOOR EXERCISE - 10
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
C. Elements/Pass Considered the Same:
In the following instance, elements listed under the same number will be considered the same:
1. Salto/flight with 2-foot landing or step-out:

Examples of Elements Considered the Same for the Counting of VP

Criteria Example
Salto with 2-foot landing or step-out • Front Salto Tucked step-out “A” / Front Salto with 2-foot landing
considered same element.

D. Considerations for awarding Value Part credit when a Fall occurs:

1. Salto Element: Fail to land on any part of bottom of feet first when performing Salto element:
a. No VP credit awarded.
b. No SR awarded.
c. Deduct 0.50 for fall.
d. Deduct for execution and amplitude errors in addition to the fall.

E. Required Technique for the Recognition of Value Parts

1. Leg positions, posture / body position, and/or amplitude requirements as indicated in the Xcel Code of Points
must be fulfilled in order to award the Value Part as listed.
2. Required technique must be fulfilled in order to award the VP as listed.
3. In some cases, appropriate execution and amplitude deductions would be taken rather than recognizing it as a
different element.
4. Turns of 360° or more on one(1) foot and leaps / jumps / hops with Turns of 360° or more:
a. If missing:

INCOMPLETE TURN - TURNS OF 360° OR MORE

Missing Degree of Turn Deduction VP Credit
If missing 1° to 44° of the turn Deduct 0.05 – 0.10 Award VP
If missing 45° to 89° of the turn Deduct 0.15 – 0.20 Award VP credit
If missing 90° or more of the turn Award VP credit for the
element performed

b. Deductions for balance, execution and amplitude errors are also

applied.
c. Clarification regarding completion of turns:
1) Once the heel drops onto the floor during a turn, it is considered complete.
2) Appropriate Value Part credit is awarded for the degree of turn completed prior to the heel drop.
5. Jumps / Leaps / Hops with ½ (180°) Turn and ½ (180°) Turns on one (1) foot:
a. Jumps / Leaps / Hops: values based upon completion of the ½ (180°) Turn. Must finish minimum of 1° past
half-way mark between the two (2) VP to receive the higher value. Wolf Jump = “A” and Wolf Jump ½ = “B”
1) Degree of Turn completion determines value awarded.
2) Evaluate how much of Turn was completed to determine value to award.
3) Turn completed to within 89° or less of designated Degree of Turn, award higher VP.
4) Turn must finish closer to higher Degree of Turn.
5) Execution deductions applied for Incomplete Turn.
b. ½ Turns on One (1) foot must finish at minimum of 91°
1) To receive VP credit and SR credit.
2) Use deductions listed in Chapter 3 for Full Turns.
6. Split Leaps and Jumps
a. Each Division has a specific required minimum Degree of Split for Leaps and Jumps with a cross or side
split. This split angle is specified in the Division’s Dance SR (SR #2).
b. Deficiency of up to 20° from the Division-specific required Split is allowed to still receive VP and SR credit
but a deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split will be applied. Example:
1) Split Leap: Platinum Division, Split requirement 150°.
• A Split at 130° leg separation, Split Leap (#1.101) will receive “A” VP credit and Special

FLOOR EXERCISE - 11
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
Requirement credit with “up to 0.20” deduction.
c. Lower VP or NO VP credit (as applicable) would be given for the element if the Split is more than 20° from
the required split angle in the Division. Example:
1) Straddle Jump 1/1 Turn: Platinum Division, Split at 120°.
• “A” VP credit for Jump 1/1 Turn.
d. To receive “B”, “C” or “D” Value Part as listed in the Xcel Code of Points, a Leap or Jump requiring a 180°
split must show a minimum of 135°split.
e. Elements are designated as Restricted elements based on their value as listed in the Xcel Code of Points,
NOT on the quality/amplitude of the performance.
f. Examples:
1) NOTE: Where applicable deductions for Insufficient Amplitude (Height) and Execution may be taken,
in addition to Insufficient Split deduction.
2) Split Leaps: Platinum Division, Split requirement 150°.
• 130° – 149° leg separation, Split Leap will receive “A” VP credit and Special Requirement credit
with “up to 0.20” deduction.
3) Straddle Jump 1/1 Turn: Platinum Division, Split at 120°.
• “A” VP credit for Jump 1/1 Turn.
4) Leg swing Hop with free leg horizontal or above:
• Deduct up to 0.20 for Insufficient Amplitude if free leg is below horizontal (using 20˚ variance).
• No “A” Value Part credit awarded if free leg lifted less than 70˚ from floor.

7. Flight Elements:
a. Flight element that fails to show Flight (moment when both hands and feet are free of floor), award VP credit
for actual element performed.
1) Acro skill / element without Flight, may not fulfill Acro Special Requirement requiring Flight.
b. Dive Forward Roll does not fulfill Flight requirement, (due to support on shoulders and back).

FLOOR EXERCISE - 12
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
8. Twisting Saltos
a. Twisting Saltos (Incomplete long axis (LA) turn / twist):

INCOMPLETE LA TURN - TWISTING SALTO DISMOUNTS

Missing Degree of Twist Deduction VP Credit
If missing 1° to 44° of the twist Deduct 0.05–0.10 Award “A” VP/SR
If missing 45° to 89° of the twist Deduct 0.15 – 0.20 Award VP credit
If missing 90° or more of the twist Award VP credit for the element performed

b. Example: 1½ Twist “C” missing 90° of Twist.

1) Award “B” VP credit for 1/1 Twist.
2) Deductions for any Balance, Execution and Amplitude errors are also applied.
c. Clarification regarding the completion of Twists:
1) At the moment the feet land on floor at finish of Salto, twist is considered complete.
2) Appropriate VP credit awarded for Degree of Twist completed, when feet land on floor, with front foot
being decisive.

F. Specific Element Technique Clarifications

1. #1.101 “A” Split Jump vs. #1.110 “A” Sissonne
a. Cross Split Jump has 2-foot take-off and landing, Sissonne has 2-foot take-off and 1-foot landing.
b. Cross Split Jump shows required degree of Split (for each Division) with legs even.
c. Sissonne requires a certain degree of Split (for each Division); legs are in diagonal position with Front leg
forward-downward at minimum of 45° and Back leg backward-upward.
d. Deduct up to 0.10 for Insufficient Amplitude if Front leg of Sissonne is less than 45°.
2. #1.204 “B” Split Leap forward with leg change (Switch Leap)
a. First Leg should swing forward to minimum of 45° prior to swinging backward to the required degree of Split
(for each Division).
b. First Leg does not reach 45°, award “B” credit and deduct up to 0.10 for insufficient height of leg swing.
c. Deduct up to 0.20 for Insufficient Split after leg change, or credit the actual VP performed.
d. Stag-Switch Leap (Stags, never extends First Leg, prior to Switch) award #1.101 “A” Split Leap.
3. #1.208 “B” Schuschunova
a. Must show 180° Side Split position and then rotate legs rearward to attain horizontal stretched body position
in the air before landing.
b. Slight forward lean of body in the initial jump phase, rather than strict vertical torso, is acceptable.
4. Jump, landing in front lying support (prone)
a. Two Variations of Schuschunova 1/1 – both “C” VP:
1) Straddle Pike Jump ½ (180°) Turn – ½ (180°) Turn over, to land in front lying position.
2) Jump 1/1 Turn to Side-Split position, legs rotate backward finishing in horizontal plane, to land in front
lying position.
5. #1.210 “B” Ring or #1.210 “B” Stag-Ring Leap / Jump
a. A release of Head backward past the vertical line is considered “Ring” position.
b. Expected Amplitude of Rear Foot is to top of Head.
1) Insufficient Arch, deduct up to 0.10.
2) Rear Foot at shoulder or upper back height, deduct up to 0.10.
3) Rear Foot at hip height or no backward Head Release, (regardless of the height of the leg),
considered Split Leap with bent back leg #1.101 “A” or Sissonne #1.110 “A”.
c. Ring Jump expectations are:
1) Front Leg must be minimum of 45° from floor, forward-downward diagonal position;
2) Deduct up to 0.10 for Insufficient Amplitude of Front Leg.
d. Ring Leap expectations are:
1) Front Leg should first brush / extend close to horizontal.
2) Front Leg is not a minimum of 45° from floor when Ring shape is executed, deduct up to 0.10 for
Insufficient Amplitude of Front Leg.
e. Stag-Ring Jump or Stag-Ring Leap, expectations are:
1) Front Leg bent minimum of 90° with no extension of leg.
2) Division required leg separation, from Front Knee to Back Knee.

FLOOR EXERCISE - 13
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
6. #1.311 “C” Switch-Ring Leap
a. First Leg should swing forward to minimum of 45° prior to swinging backward to 180° Split, with rear foot at
head height, upper body arched, and head released backward past vertical line.
b. Rear Foot at shoulder or upper back height, deduct up to 0.10.
c. Rear Foot at hip height or if no backward head release (regardless of the height of leg), award Switch Leap
“B” VP credit.
7. #1.305 “C” Switch Leap ¼ (90°) Turn (Switch-Side Leap)
a. First Leg should swing forward to minimum of 45°, prior to swinging backward.
1) Fail to swing first leg forward to minimum of 45° but completes ¼ (90°) Turn, award “C” VP credit.
Deduct up to 0.10 for insufficient height of leg swing.
2) Fail to swing first leg forward to minimum of 45° and shows an incomplete ¼ (90°) Turn, award “B” VP
credit (Switch Leg Leap). Deduct up to 0.10 for insufficient height of leg swing.
b. ¼ (90°) Turn must occur in air; not prior to leg swinging backward.
1) Leg swings to Minimum of 45°: ¼ (90°) turn occurs early – before leg begins Backward swing, award
“C” VP. Deduct up to 0.10 Lack of Precision in Dance elements.
2) Leg swing to Minimum of 45°, ¼ (90°) turn is incomplete, award “B” VP (Switch leg leap). Deduct up
to 0.10 Lack of Precision in Dance elements.
c. Side-Split position must show 180°.
d. Rond de Jambe technique is acceptable
1) Front leg swings forward to minimum of 45° prior to ¼ (90°) Turn,
2) Then moves across horizontal plane to Side-Split position).
e. First Leg in Stag position, award “A” VP credit.
1) First (swing) leg is bent minimum of 90°,
2) No extension of leg prior to leg switch.
8. #1.309 “C” Tour Jeté with ½ (180°) Turn: / #1.404 “D” Switch-leg leap 1/1 (360°) Turn:
a. These elements are often identified incorrectly.
b. Both show Cross Split position and finish facing same direction as take-off.
1) Tour Jeté ½ (180°) turns away from initial swing leg.
2) Switch-leg leap 1/1 turns toward initial swing leg
9. #1.307 “C” Straddle Pike Jump 1/1 (360°) Turn (Popa) OR #1.307 “C” Side-Split Jump 1/1 (360°) Turn
a. Must show Straddle Pike Jump, cross split or side split position in ANY phase of 1/1 (360°) Turn
10. #2.202 “B” 1/1 (360°) Turn with free leg at or above horizontal from start to end of Turn
a. Must have time (up to 45° – 1/8th of Turn) to quickly lift leg into position without deduction.
b. Free Leg may be bent or extended, but entire leg must be at minimum of horizontal to receive “B” VP credit.
c. Once minimum of horizontal position of Free Leg is established, must maintain throughout Turn to receive
VP credit.
d. Free Leg may not be supported with hand to maintain minimum of horizontal position.
e. If correct leg position is missing for more than 45° of Turn or is not maintained throughout remaining 7/8th
(315°) of Turn, recognize as “A” 1/1 (360°) Turn.
11. #2.208 “B” 1/1 (360°) Turn – Free Leg held upward at 180° Split position
a. Leg held at less than 180° Split position, but at least 135°,
1) Award “B” Value Part.
2) Deduct up to 0.20 for Insufficient Split.
b. Leg position is less than 135°, award “A” for 360° Turn.
12. Front Saltos in Direct Connection
a. Forward Salto used as accelerating element in directly connected Forward Salto Series is not subject to up
to 0.30 deduction for Insufficient Amplitude.
b. Last Salto is expected to have the greater amplitude.
c. Example: Front Handspring + Front Salto Stretched + Front Salto Piked

FLOOR EXERCISE - 14
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
II. APPARATUS SPECIFICATIONS

Refer to the current USA Gymnastics Women’s Rules and Policies book. Requirements are subject to change every
competitive year, beginning August 1.

A. Clarifications for Additional Matting:

1. Up to two (2) manufactured mats (maximum thickness of 8 inches / 20cm) may be placed separately on Floor
Exercise area.
2. 8-inch thick Skill Cushion must be minimum of 5’ x 10’.
3. Only one (1) Skill Cushion / 4” Throw mat per tumbling pass:
a. No more than two (2) mats on floor exercise area at any one point in time.
b. Sting mat may be placed on top of skill cushion / throw mat() or may be used in place of Skill Cushion or
Throw mat. s
c. Additional matting may be used as take-off / landing surface.
4. Additional matting covering any portion of Boundary Line(s),
a. Must be clearly marked with tape / chalk to indicate actual Boundary Line(s).
b. Failure to mark mat results in 0.10 neutral deduction taken from Average Score by Chief Judge.
5. No requirement to remove mats from floor area during the exercise.
6. Unauthorized type of matting will receive a deduction of 0.30 from Average Score by Chief Judge.

B. Conversions – Inches to Centimeters:

1. Conversions – Inches to Centimeters: Approx. ¾ inch = 2 cm.

Conversion of Inches to Centimeters

(1 in. = 2.54 cm.)
Inches Centimeters
Approx. ¾ inch 2 cm.
4 inches 10 cm.
8 inches 20 cm.
9 inches 24 cm.

III. ATTIRE REGULATIONS

No attire regulations specific to Floor Exercise.

IV. TIMING REGULATIONS

A. Touch Warm-Up (When required by meet format)
1. The gymnast is allowed a 30-second touch warm-up time unless timed warm-up immediately precedes
competition, as in modified traditional and non-traditional formats.
a. Squad members warm up at same time, unless number in squad is 9 or more,
1) Squad MAY be Split into two (2) groups for touch warm-up.
2) First half would touch and compete; then second half would touch and compete.
3) Option to alternate competition with touch warm-ups (staggered touch) may also be used, at
discretion of Meet Director.
b. Touch warm-up period for Floor Exercise determined by multiplying number of athletes in the largest squad
by 30 seconds.
c. No Block Time by team / club is allowed.
d. A warning will be given at “10 seconds remaining.” When the touch warm-up time is exceeded, time is
called.
e. If athlete continues to exceed Warm-up Time, Chief Judge deducts 0.20 from Average Score.
1) Note: If gymnast is preparing for an element / skill, allow to complete element / series.

FLOOR EXERCISE - 15
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
B. Timing of the Exercise
1. Timing:
a. Timing begins with first movement and stops with final
movement.
1) Entire exercise is evaluated, regardless of Overtime.
2) No warning signal for time is given on Floor Exercise.
b. If Overtime:
1) Chief Judge takes Overtime Deduction of 0.10 from
Average Score.
2) Deduction must be indicated to Coach (verbal or visual
means).
c. If within a Fraction of a Second: No Overtime Deduction taken if time is within fraction of second over the
time allotment. Do not take Overtime Deduction.
1) Example: 1:30.01 – 1:30.99 (less than 1:31.00).
d. No Undertime: No Deduction for Undertime.
2. Courtesy Score of 4.00 may be awarded for an extremely Short Routine due to injury or unusual circumstances.
a. No routine will be awarded less than 4.00.
b. Common sense should prevail.

V. SPOTTING REGULATIONS

A. Coach is allowed on floor exercise mat without deduction.

B. If the coach assists/spots the gymnast during an element:

1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. If the gymnast falls after the spot, an additional 0.50 deduction is taken for the fall.
3. No VP credit awarded.
4. No SR credit awarded.

C. If the coach spots the gymnast upon landing of an element:

1. Each judge deducts 0.50 for the spot.
2. If the gymnast falls after the spot, an additional 0.50 is taken for the fall.
3. VP credit is awarded.
4. SR credit is awarded.

D. If the coach touches (or pushes) the gymnast to stop momentum on or after the landing:
1. Only one 0.50 deduction (for the spot) would be applied.
2. If gymnast falls, do not deduct an additional 0.50 for the fall.
3. Gymnast steps over boundary line, Chief Judge deducts 0.10 from Average Score.

E. If the coach catches a falling gymnast, do not deduct for the spot; deduct 0.50 for the fall ONLY.

F. There is no penalty if the gymnast inadvertently touches the coach.

VI. OBSTRUCTING VIEW

A. Gymnasts and Coaches are permitted to stand around Floor Exercise area (and cheer), provided they do not
obstruct the view of Judges and / or spectators.
1. Chief Judge would first warn Teammates / Coaches if there is obstruction.
a. If obstruction continues, deduct 0.20 for “unsportsmanlike conduct” to either:
1) All- Around score of individual Gymnast creating obstruction OR
2) Team score of Team in violation.

FLOOR EXERCISE - 16
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
VII. MUSIC REGULATIONS
A. Musical accompaniment
1. Must be recorded with orchestra, piano or other instruments (without singing / voice). Human sounds are
allowed, provided there are no words spoken or sung.
a. Deduct 1.00 for absence of music or music with words / song, Chief Judge deducts from Average Score.
b. No deduction for music with whistles / animal sounds.
c. Questions about music containing words should be sent to Regional Technical Committee Chairman
(RTCC), who will forward the form and music to the Women’s Development Program Director (WDPD). The
WDPD will forward to the National Technical Committee Chairman, and Women’s Development Program
Technical Director (WDPTD). The WDPD will send final decision on the official Music Approval Form to the
RTCC for forward to the requesting coach.
1) Music approval forms can be obtained through the Regional Technical Committee Chairman.
2) Coach should carry Music Approval Form to all competitions.
3) Verification that music has been approved and should not receive a deduction.
B. Procedures for music failure due to technical failure:
1. Gymnast may continue routine.
a. Upon completion of the routine, Gymnast and Coach must decide whether to repeat or accept score given.
b. Judges will post no score until decision is made.
c. No deduction would be taken for absence of music.
2. Gymnast may stop her performance immediately:
a. Request permission from Chief Judge to repeat routine or to continue from the point of interruption.
b. Once permission is given, Gymnast would perform again (either from the point of interruption or the entire
exercise) after a reasonable amount of rest time.
c. No score would be given for the partial routine.
3. Floor Exercise music must be recorded digitally.
a. Meet Directors of all sanctioned events must provide options to play only digital copies of music (MP3
players, computers, tablets, etc.)
b. No longer required to provide compact disc players.
c. Floor music must be downloaded onto a mobile device for competitions to avoid interruptions/failure to
play/errors. Accessing music via cellular, internet, or Bluetooth at competitions is not allowed.

VIII. LINE VIOLATIONS (Out of Bounds)

A. Gymnast touches any part of body outside of prescribed area, deduct 0.10 each time.
1. Floor area with two different colors, any part of body that touches the outside color, considered out of bounds.
a. Permissible to place small pieces of tape (same color as floor area carpet) at the inside corners of the
boundary to assist Gymnast’s awareness of actual boundary.
2. Gymnast steps on (but not over) the line, Gymnast is not out of bounds.

B. Chief Judge deducts 0.10 for line violation from Average Score.
C. Gymnast falls, while out of bounds:
1. Each Judge must deduct 0.50 for the fall.
2. Chief Judge deducts 0.10 for line violation from Average Score.
D. Elements or Connections completed out of bounds are recognized.
1. Take-off for element performed while inside boundary line, VP credit awarded.
2. Take-off for element performed while outside boundary line, No VP credit awarded, No SR awarded.

E. Auxiliary Line Judges:

1. Seated at opposite corners on the diagonal
2. View of two (2) lines each.
F. If No Auxiliary Line Judges, Chief Judge and Panel Judge(s):
1. Must watch for line violations, and
2. Indicate violations by raising a hand.
G. Line Violations should be indicated in writing:
1. By Line Judge (or Panel Judge) and submitted to Chief Judge.
2. Deduction must be communicated to the Coach (verbally / visually).

FLOOR EXERCISE - 17
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
CHAPTER 3: EXECUTION & ARTISTRY DEDUCTIONS
I. EXECUTION AND ARTISTRY FAULTS
A. Composition deductions are not applied in the Xcel Program.
1. Emphasis is on the performance of allowable skills, not the routine construction.

FLOOR EXERCISE FAULTS

• Execution deductions CANNOT exceed 4.00 including Falls. This does not include Artistry or Spotting
deductions.
• Courtesy Score of 4.00 may be awarded for an extremely short routine due to injury or unusual
circumstances.
• No routine will be awarded less than 4.0. Common sense should prevail.
each time 0.05 Flexed/sickled feet on Value Part or Skill elements
Up to 0.10 Legs Crossed during Saltos with Twist
each up to 0.10 Incorrect Body Posture / Alignment during Dance Skills / VP
Up to 0.10 Slight hop, small adjustments of feet or staggered feet (one in front of the other) on landing of
elements or dismount
each 0.10 Step(s) on landing Clarification on Landing Acro elements: Small step after landing continuing in the
Max. 0.40 direction of the skill to finish in lunge or on one (1) knee is acceptable. Do not deduct unless landing
appears to be out of control.
Landing
Up to 0.10 Deviation from straight direction on landing
Up to 0.10 Arm swings to maintain balance on landing
each up to 0.20 Leg or knee separations
Insufficient Height
up to 0.20 Insufficient Height on leaps, jumps and hops
up to 0.20 Insufficient Height of Aerials & Acro flight elements with hand support
Insufficient Split Position (see Floor Chapter 2, I. Recognition of Value Parts ,E. Required
Technique for the Recognition of Value Parts, #6 )
Deviation from split degree required for the Division
uportoNo
Award Lesser VP
0.20 • 1° – 20° missing
• 21° or more missing
each up to 0.20 Legs not parallel to floor in Split or Straddle pike leap/ jump
each up to 0.20 Insufficient exactness of body shape: tuck or pike position in element/VP
M
(U aults
ediumF each time up to 0.20 Insufficient exactness of stretched position
.20)
0
pto up to 0.20 • Arch
up to 0.20 • Hip angle (136°-179°)
Dance: Incomplete Turn – Group 1 & 2 elements with 360° or more turn, and 180° turn on one
(1) foot
0.15-0.20
0.05-0.10 • 1° – 44° missing
• 45° – 89° missing
Award Lesser or No VP • 90° or more missing
Acrobatics: Incomplete Twist
0.15-0.20
0.05-0.10 • 1° – 44° missing
• 45° – 89° missing
Award Lesser or No VP • 90° or more missing
Insufficient Variation in Rhythm and Tempo throughout the exercise
Consider:
up to 0.20 • Insufficient variation in rhythm / tempo in non-VP movements
• Lack of fluid connection / series of disconnected elements or movements
up to 0.20 Incorrect body posture on landing of elements/VP
up to 0.20 Additional Trunk Movements to maintain balance / control upon landing of an Acro element

FLOOR EXERCISE - 18
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE
(Medium Faults Continued)
0.20 (Max. 0.40) Large step or jump on landing (approximately 3 feet or more) Clarification on Landing Acro
elements: Small step after landing continuing in the direction of the skill to finish in lunge or on one
(1) knee is acceptable. Do not deduct unless landing appears to be out of control.
up to 0.20 Insufficient Dynamics throughout exercise – Consider:
• Energy maintained throughout exercise / Makes difficult look effortless
each up to 0.30 Bent arms in support
Max 0.60
0.30 Bent legs
• (90° bend or greater receives 0.30)
• Maximum on any one element = 0.30 bent arms & 0.30 bent legs
up to 0.30 Insufficient extension (open) of the body prior to landing an Acro element
up to 0.30 Insufficient height of salto elements
• Does not apply to accelerating element in directly connected Forward Acro series.
• Example: Front Handspring – Front Layout – Front Tuck.
◦ Front Layout is accelerating element, do not deduct for Insufficient Height.
up 0.30 Squat on landing (hips even with or lower than the knees)
to
up to 0.30 Brush/touch landing surface with one (1) or two (2) hands (no support)
0.50 Support on mat with one (1) or two (2) hands
0.50 Fall on mat to knee(s) or hips
0.50 Fall + 0.50 Spot Fall after spotting assistance during or upon landing an element
No VP/No0.50
SR Fall/Failure to land on the bottom of the feet first on Aerials/Saltos:
• No VP / No SR / Deduct for Fall
0.50 Simultaneously landing on bottoms of feet and hands or knees:
Award VP / Award SR / Deduct for Fall.
0.50 Spotting assistance during an element - Do not award VP or SR credit
0.50 Spotting assistance upon landing an element Award VP and SR credit

Insufficient Artistry throughout the exercise. * 0.10 is the maximum that can be taken in each category.
*0.05 –0.10 Lack of variety in choreography (poses, phrases, connections)
Examples: unnecessary adjustments and/or steps without choreography
*0.05 – 0.10 Quality of gymnast’s movements to reflect her Personal Style
*0.05 – 0.10 Quality of Expression (i.e., projection, focus)
0.05 Failure to hold ending pose for 1 second.
0.10 Failure to show synchronization of music with ending pose.
each up to 0.10 Incorrect Rhythm during execution of Direct Connections
each up to 0.10 Lack of Precision in Dance Elements or VP Elements
Examples:
• Lack of definite arm or leg position on turns / leaps
• Degree of turn not exact
to
each up 0.10 Failure to land with feet/legs together on jumps/leaps that land on 2 feet
each up to 0.10 Failure to perform turns in high relevé
Each 0.10 Concentration Pauses (2 seconds or more)
up to 0.20 Poor relationship of Music and Movement throughout
Up to 0.30 Relaxed/incorrect footwork on non-value parts throughout exercise
Up to 0.30 Incorrect body alignment, position or posture on non-VP’s (throughout exercise)
up to 0.30 Missing Synchronization of Movement with Musical Beat throughout the exercise
0.05 • each time
0.10 • at the end of the music
Absence of Music or Music with Words / Song (whistles, animal or human sounds are allowed)
CJ deducts off1.00
Ave.
No Deduction Coach on the Floor Exercise mat

FLOOR EXERCISE - 19
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

FLOOR EXERCISE - 20
 Xcel Code of Points
FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS

FLOOR
Elements Limited by Division - Receiving "A" VP.
Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops
Each Division has a specific required minimum Degree of Split for Leaps and Jumps with a cross
or side split. This split angle is specified in the Division’s Dance SR (SR #2).
Deficiency of up to 20° from the Division-specific required Split is allowed to still receive VP and
SR credit but a deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split will be applied.
Minimum 60° - Split Jump; Stride Leap; Side Leap (60° - 180°); Straddle Jump (60° - 180°) ✓
Minimum 90° - Split Jump; Stride Leap; Side Leap; Straddle Jump ✓
Minimum 120° - Split Jump; Stride Leap; Side Leap; Straddle Jump; Switch Leg Leap ✓
Minimum 150° - All Leaps / Jumps Cross / Side Split ✓ ✓
in
For a deficiency resulting a split between 130° - 134° the element would receive "A" VP ✓ ✓
Leaps & Jumps with a 135°-150° or more split the element will receive Value-Part credit as listed in
the Xcel Code of Points.
All Leaps & Jumps with cross/side split of 135° or more Split angle will receive Value-Part credit as listed in the Xcel
Code of Points. If the athlete achieves the angle required in her Division, no further split deductions are taken. Example:
A Diamond performs a switch leg leap to 150°. “B” VP is awarded with no angle deduction.
# Element Name
Leg Swing Hop with free leg horizontal or above (Deduct up to 0.20 for Insufficient

✓
1.001 Amplitude, if free leg is below horizontal (using 20˚ variance). No “A” Value Part credit ✓ ✓
awarded, if free leg lifted less than 70˚ from floor.)

Group 2 - Turns

# Element Name
2.001 Forward
2.002 ½ Turn on
orone
Backward
(1) Foot
Swing
(any Turn
leg position) ✓
✓
Group 3 - Handstands P D
B latinum iamond
ronze S G
ilver
# Element Name old

3.001 Headstand ✓ ✓ ✓
3.002 Partial Handstand: minimum. 45°, legs together ✓
3.003 Handstand (Vertical – Mark) ✓ ✓ ✓

Group 5 - Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc…

# Element Name
5.001 Bridge, Kick-over (from Stand or Lying position) ✓ ✓ ✓

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 1

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps, and Hops (Limited by Division)
The following receive “A” Value part based on the applicable angle for each Division.
A A A A A
BRONZE SILVER GOLD PLATINUM* DIAMOND*
(minimum 60°) (minimum 90°) (minimum 120°) (minimum 150°) (minimum 150°)
• Split Jump (min. 60°) • Split Jump (min. 90°) • Split Jump (min. 120°)
• Split Leap (min. 60°) • Split Leap (min. 90°) • Split Leap (min. 120°)
• Side Leap (60° - 180° or • Side Leap (min. 90°) • Side Leap (min. 120°)
more) • Straddle Jump (min. 90°) • Straddle Jump (min. 120°)
• Straddle Jump (60° - 180° or • Switch Leg Leap (min. 120°)
more)

*Leaps & Jumps with a 135° or more Split angle will receive Value-Part credit as listed in the Xcel Code of Points. Refer to Xcel Code for appropriate application of insufficient Split
deductions and awarding of Value-Part credit.

Deficiency of up to 20° from the Division-specific required Split is allowed to still receive VP and SR credit but a deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient split will be applied.
BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY
1.001
Leg Swing Hop with free leg horizontal or above
(If free leg is within 20˚ of horizontal an “A” VP is awarded
but a deduction of up to 0.20 for insufficient amplitude is applied)

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 2

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.101 1.301 1.401
Split leap forward or split jump in place, Tuck jump with separation of legs to cross
also with
and/or bending
back leg (stag or forward
of the leg
double-stag split (180°) during flight phase.
An additional 1/4 turn in a leap or jump will be awarded the same value
position in flight phase) *See Box 1.201
part as the root leap or jump unless listed under a different number.

Leaps, jumps and hops with the same number and different degrees of
turn (1/2, 1/1, 1½ or more) are considered different elements.

* Leaps and jumps with the same number are considered different ele
ments. Stag and split variations of leaps and of jumps with the same
Double stag jump or leap with 1/1 (360° turn
number are considered the same element.

Any leap not listed in the Xcel Code of Points that has a 180° split and
360° turn is valued at “C”.

360

1.102 1.202 1.302 1.402

Split leap forward with 1/4 (90°) turn or 1/2 Split jump with 1/1 (360°) turn Split jump with a 1½ (540°) turn
(180°) turn, also split jump with 1/2 (180°) turn
(not illustrated)

90

540

360

180

These two elements are considered

different.

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 3

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.103 1.203 1.303 1.403
Jeté en tournant - 1/4 to 1/2 (90°–180°)
turn with take-off from one leg into split
leap

1.104 1.204 1.304 1.404

Stride
to wolfleap forward with change of legs
position. Split leap forward with leg change Split leap forward with leg change and Split leap forward with leg change and
(180° separation < after leg change) 1/2 (180°) turn in flight phase (180° 1/1 (360°) turn in flight phase (180°
separation < after leg change) separation < after leg change)
(Frolova)

180
360˚

Stag leap forward with leg change Split leap forward with leg change
through forward, sideward, to backward
horizontal (Rond-de-Jambe) (Plataroti)
also with 1/2 (180˚) turn (No illustration)

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 4

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.105 1.205 1.305 1.405
leap
Split forward with 90
leg change (180°
separation < after leg
change) and 1/4 (90˚)
turn to side-split leap
(180°) or
straddle-pike
position (180°), also to
land in front lying
support 180

90

Switch-side leap with

with 1/2 (180˚) or 3/4
(270˚) turn to a stand

Switch-side leap with

90 a 1/2 (180°) turn in
horizontal plane to
land in front lying
support (Kosowski)

1.106 1.206 1.306 1.406

Pike jump – Pike Jump with 1/1 (360°) turn (minimum 90° hip angle)
(minimum 90° hip
angle), also with
1/2 (180°) turn 360
to stand or front
lying support -
take-off from one
or both legs

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 5

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.107 1.207 1.307 1.407
Straddle-pike or Side-split jump Straddle-pike jump with 1/1 (360°) turn (Popa) , Straddle-pike jump with 1½ (540°) turn
also Side-split jump with 1/1 (360°) turn (Not illus
trated)

360
540

Straddle-pike with 1/2 (180°) turn or 180

side-split jump with 1/2 (180°) turn
(not illustrated)

1.108 1.208 1.308 1.408

Side-split jump also
(Shushunova); (180°jump
separation <) with
with a 1/2 landing
(180°) toafront
turn to side-split jump (180°
lying support Jump with a 1/1 360 Leap with 2½ (900°) turn in horizontal
plane,
(360°) turn to a legs
– together, landing in front lying
separation <) with landing to front lying support (Shushunova) side- split jump support take-offfrom one leg (Tous
(180° separation saint)
<) with landing to
front lying support
(Shushunova)

Leap with 1½ (540°) turn in horizontal plane, legs

together, landing in front lying support – take-off from
one leg (Khorkina)
180
900

540

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 6

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.109 1.209 1.309 1.409
stretchedleap
Scissors legsforward or backward with legs
(Hitch-kick) – 1/4,
Scissors 1/4forward
leap withturn
(90° - 90°) stretched Tour jeté with additional 1/2 (180°) turn Tour Jeté with additional 1/1 (360°) turn
– landing on one or both feet (Strug), to land on both feet (Gogean)
or in split-sit position (Produnova)

90 90

180
180

180
360

Fouetté hop with leg change to cross

split (leg separation 180°) to land on
one or both feet (Tour Jeté)
Backward or forward cabriole

180
180
180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 7

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.110 1.210 1.310 1.410
Sissonne, take-off from both legs, at head
Ring height) – leap
or stag-ring or jump
take-off one or
from (rear leg Tour jeté to ring leap (Boucher) Tour jeté to ring leap with 1/2
land on one
of 45°)
position withfoot
front(legs
leg ainminimum
a diagonal (180°) turn (Jackson)
two feet
180

180 180

Stag-ring jump with 1/1 (360˚) turn Ring jump with 1/1 (360˚) turn
(Johnson)
360˚ 360˚

1.111 1.211 1.311 1.411

Tuck jump backward with arch (sheep Split leap forward with leg change to ring Split leap forward with leg
jump, feet to head height leap (180° separation < after leg change) change and 1/2 (180°) turn to
ring leap (180° separation <after
leg change) (Trevor)

180
Switch-leg stag-ring leap Tuck jump backward with arch (sheep jump,
feet to head height) with 1/1 (360°) turn
(Dunn)
360

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 8

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.112 1.212 1.312 1.412
Stretched/arch jump with 1/2 (180°) turn or Stretched jump with 1½ (540°) turn – Stretched jump with 2/1 (720°) turn – Stretched jump with 3/1 (1080°)
1/1 (360°) turn – take-off from both legs, take-off from both legs take-off from both legs, also with 2½ turn
also chassé with 1/1 (360°) turn (900°) turn
540
1080
180

720

360

360

1.113 1.213 1.313 1.413

Scissors leap forward with bent legs (cat Cat
(360°)
leap
turn,
forward with
also to bent
land legs and
in split-sit 1/1 Cat
(Not leap
(540°) turn
forward with bent legs and 1½ Cat leap forward with bent legs
(Garrison)
leap), also with 1/2 (180°) turn and 2/1 (720°) turn (Benton)
illustrated)

360
540

720

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 9

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.114 1.214 1.314 1.414
Hop with 1/2 turn (180°), free leg Fouetté-hop to land in scale Hop with 1½ turn (540°), free leg Hop with 2/1 turn (720°), free leg
extended above horizontal – take-off extended above horizontal – take-off extended above horizontal – take-off
from one leg 180 from one leg from one leg

180

720
540

Hopwith1/1turn(360°),free leg
extended above horizontal – take-off
from one leg
360

1.115 1.215 1.315 1.415

Tuck hop or jump (legs together), also Tuck hop or jump (legs together) with Tuck hop or jump (legs together) with Tuck hop or jump (legs together) with
with 1/2 (180°) turn 1/1 (360°) turn 1½ (540°) turn 2/1 (720°) turn, also landing in front
lying support (Ziganshiva)
(Not illustrated)
360

540 720

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 10

 Group 1 – Leaps, Jumps and Hops
A B C D
1.116 1.216 1.316
both of one
hop
tucked,
Wolf legs- or
horizontal)
thigh
forward bent–jump
bothleg
leg at(one
extended
extended
take-off leg
orfromleg
aboveone
& or thigh
Wolf of one
horizontal)
hop
tucked,
forward - or
bent jump
with
bothleg
leg at(one
1/2 leg
legturn
(180°)
or
extended above
extended & – Wolf hop
tucked,
thigh - or
of one
horizontal)
forward bent jump
leg
with
bothlegaextended
extended
at1/1 leg
leg &
or (360°)
(oneabove turn 1.416hop or jump (one leg
Wolf
tucked, one leg extended
forward - both extended leg &
thigh of bent leg at or above
horizontal) with a 1½ (540°) turn
take-off from one or both legs – take-off from one or both legs – take-off from one or both legs

360
540
180

also with landing in front sup

port

360

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 11

 Group 2 – Turns (LIMITED BY DIVISION)
A A
BRONZE ONLY BRONZE ONLY
2.001 2.002
½ (180°) Turn on one (1) Foot (any leg position) Forward or Backward Swing Turn (180°)
180 (No visual available)

Group 2 – Turns
A B C D
2.101 2.201 2.301 2.401
1/1 (360°) turn on one leg (free 1½ (540°) turn on one leg (free 2/1 (720°) turn on one leg (free 3/1 (1080°) turn on one leg (free leg optional)
leg optional) leg optional) leg optional)

360 540 1080˚

720

2.102 2.202 2.302 2.402

1/1 (360°) turn with heel of free 1½ (540°) turn with heel of free 2/1 or 2½ (720° - 900°) turn with heel of free leg extended or bent forward at
leg extended or bent forward at leg extended or bent forward at or above horizontal throughout the turn, without holding free leg with hand(s)
or above horizontal throughout or above horizontal throughout
the turn, without holding free leg the turn, without holding free leg
with hand(s) with hand(s)

720
900

360˚
540˚

720

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 12

 Group 2 – Turns
A B C D
2.103 2.203 2.303 2.403
1/1 (360°) turn on one leg to scale 1½ (540°) turn on one leg to scale 2/1 (720°) turn on one leg to scale forward
forward (2 sec.) forward (2 sec.) (2 sec)

720
360 540

2.104 2.204 2.304 2.404

1/1 (360°) turn in scale forward with 1½ (540°) turn in scale forward with 2/1 (720°) turn in scale forward with free leg
free leg above horizontal from start to free leg above horizontal from start to above horizontal from start to end of the turn
end of the turn end of the turn

360 720
540

2.105 2.205 2.305 2.405

1/1
of with
standing
floor
floor
(360°) split
with
free without
illusion turntouching
leghand
one (brief touching 1/1 (360°) illusion turn through
through 2/1 (720°) illusion turn without touching floor with
standing split without touching floor free leg or hand
with free leg or hand

permitted)

360

720
360

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 13

 Group 2 – Turns
A B C D
2.106 2.206 2.306 2.406
1/1 (360°) turn in tuck stand on one leg 1½ (540°) turn in tuck stand on one 2/1 (720°) turn in tuck stand on one
– free leg optional leg – free leg optional leg – free leg optional

360
720˚
540

2.107 2.207 2.307 2.407

2/1 (720°) spin or more on back in kip Double “flair” (Homma)
position (hip-leg < closed)

720+

2.108 2.208 2.308 2.408

1/1 (360°) turn with free leg held upward with hand(s) 1½ (540°) turn with free leg held 2/1 (720°turn with free leg held
at a 180˚ split position upward with hand(s) at a 180˚ split upward with hand(s) at a 180˚ split
position position (Memmel)

360
720
540

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 14

 Group 3 – Handstands (LIMITED BY DIVISION)
A A A
BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY BRONZE ONLY BRONZE/SILVER/GOLDONLY3.003Handstand(Vertical–Mark)--Legpositionoptional
3.001 3.002
Headstand Handstands Partial: minimum. 45°, legs together
(No visual available) (No visual available)

Group 3 – Handstands
A B C D
3.101 3.201 3.301 3.401
stand
Jump with ½ – 1/1 (180°
to handstand – return
– 360˚) turn, return
movement optional optional
or kick or
movement press to hand- Kick or press to handstand – 1½ (540°+) turn or more in handstand – return
movement optional
540 +

.
180

.
360

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 15

 Group 4 – Rolls
A B C D
4.101 4.201 4.301 4.401
Forward roll or handstand forward roll or hecht roll From backward take-off – stretched jump with 1/2 (180°) From backward take-off – stretched jump
twist to hecht roll 180
with 1½ (540°) twist to hecht roll (Esslinger)

180 360

From a stretched jump, 1/1 (360°) twist to hecht roll

360

4.102 4.202 4.302 4.402

Roll backward in tuck or pike Roll backward (tucked or piked) to handstand with
1/1 (360°+) turn or more in handstand

Backward rull to Push-Up shape 360 +

(Hand placement on floor prior to Backward Roll allowed.)
(Arms may be bent or straight)

Roll backward to handstand, also with 1/2 (180°) turn in handstand

180

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 16

 Group 5 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc... (LIMITED BY DIVISION)
A
BRONZE/SILVER/GOLD ONLY
5.001
Bridge, Kick-over (from Stand or Lying position)
OR

Group 5 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...

A B C D
5.101 5.201 5.301 5.401
Walkover forward or backward (all variations), also from tuck sit-Valdez Walkover backward from stand or extended tuck-sit
(Valdez) to handstand with 1/1 turn ( 360°) in hand
stand – return movement optional

.
..
360
.
All are considered as different elements.

Considered as different elements.

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 17

 Group 5 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
5.102 5.202 5.302 5.402
Handspring forward – take-off from one leg – also Jump backward with 1/2 (180°) twist to Handspring forward with 1/1 (360°) twist after
with 1/2 (180°) twist after hand support – handspring forward (Arabian handspring) – hand support or before (Mostepanova)
landing optional landing optional
360

.
. 180

.
180

.
Flyspring forward – take-off from both legs – with ..
both legs with or without hecht phase before hand support,
or
Flyspring hecht phase
withoutforward before
– take-off hand
from –
support, landing on two feet 360

landing on one foot

.
.

5.103 5.203 5.303 5.403

Aerial walkover forward, also in tucked position to Aerial walkover forward with 1/1 (360°) twist
a two-foot landing or kneeling

360

The one foot take-off to a tucked position will

appear as a kick-over salto forward, but will not
be considered a salto for Special Requirement
purposes.

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 18

 Group 5 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
5.104 5.204 5.304 5.404
Cartwheel on one or both arms, with or without flight phase, also aerial cartwheel.

One butterfly forward or backward

All considered as different elements.

5.105 5.205 5.305 5.405
Round-off or free aerial round-off

Considered as different elements.

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 19

 Group 5 – Walkovers, Cartwheels, etc...
A B C D
5.106 5.206 5.306 5.406
All flic-flac and gainer flic-flac variations, also with support of one arm Flic-flacwith1/1 (360°) twist before hand support
(Considered as different elements)

360

5.107 5.207 5.307 5.407

All head or neck kips

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 20

 Group 6 – Saltos Forward
A B C D
6.101 6.201 6.301 6.401 540

Salto forward tucked Salto forward tucked with 1/2 (180°) twist – landing optional Salto forward tucked, piked or Salto forward tucked, piked or
stretched with 1/1 (360°) twist stretched with a 1½ (540°) twist
180

360

Salto forward piked or stretched (also with step-out), also with 1/2 (180°)
twist – landing optional 360
540

180

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 21

 Group 7 – Saltos Sideward, Arabians
A B C D
7.101 7.201 7.301 7.401
From take-off forward from one or both From a take-off backward – salto
legs – salto sideward tucked, piked, or sideward stretched
stretched

180
7.102 7.202 7.302 7.402
Arabian salto tucked, piked, or stretched - take-off backward with 1/2 (180°)
twist, salto forward – landing optional

180

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 22

 Group 8 – Saltos Backward
A B C D
8.101 8.201 8.301 8.401
Salto backward tucked, piked, 1/1
Salto
stretched
(360°) with
twist1/2
backward twist or
(180°)piked
tucked, or Salto backward tucked or Salto backward with 2½ (900°)
stretched, also with step-out stretched with 1½ (540°) twist or twist
2/1 (720°) twist

900
540

180

720

180

540

360

720

360

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 23

 Group 8 – Saltos Backward
A B C D
8.102 8.202 8.302 8.402
Whip salto backward Whip salto backward with a 1/2 (180°) or 1/1 (360°) twist

180

360

360

8.103 8.203 8.303 8.403

Double salto backward tucked

Double salto backward piked

8.104 8.204 8.304 8.404

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 24

 Group 8 – Saltos Backward
A B C D
8.105 8.205 8.305 8.405
Gainer salto tucked, piked or stretched Gainer salto tucked with a 1/1 (360°) twist

360

8.106 8.206 8.306 8.406

Jump forward with 1/2 (180°) twist – salto Jump forward with 1/2 (180°) twist – salto
backward tucked or piked backward stretched

180

180

180

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 25

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

FLOOR EXERCISE ELEMENTS - 26